FREIGHTLINER Sprinter 2015 Operating Instructions Manual

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.
com manuals search engine

Symbols Vehicle distributor Publication details
G WARNING Internet
Warning notes make you aware of dangers In the USA:
which could pose a threat to your health or Further information on Mercedes-Benz vehi-
life, or to the health and life of others. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC cles can be obtained on the Internet at
One Mercedes Drive http://www.mercedes-benz.com
H Environmental note Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
Environmental notes provide you with infor- www.mbusa.com http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
mation on environmentally aware actions or www.mbsprinterusa.com only)
disposal. Customer Assistance Center:
! Notes on material damage alert you to 1-877-762-8267
Editorial office
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle. In Canada: You are welcome to forward any queries or
i These symbols indicate useful instruc- suggestions you may have regarding this
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Operator's Manual to the technical documen-
tions or further information that could be
helpful to you. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue tation team at the address on the inside of the
Toronto, ON M4G 4C9 front cover.
X This symbol designates an instruc-
tion you must follow. www.mercedes-benz.ca © Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
X Several consecutive symbols indi- Customer Relations Department: © Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
cate an instruction with several 1-800-387-0100 Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes-
steps. Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and Mercedes- Not to be reprinted, translated, or otherwise
can find further information on a Benz Canada Inc. are Daimler companies. reproduced, in whole or in part, without writ-
topic. Canada only: ten permission.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or "Authorized Sprinter Dealer" is defined as an
an instruction that is continued on authorized Mercedes-Benz Sprinter Dealer.
the next page. Vehicle manufacturer
Display This text indicates a message on
the display and the rear view cam- Daimler AG
era monitor. Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart, Germany
Germany
Registered trademarks
ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.
As at 03.03.2014
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you first drive off, read these Operat-
ing Instructions carefully and familiarize your-
self with your vehicle. Please adhere to the
information and warning notes in these Oper-
ating Instructions for your own safety and to
ensure a longer operating duration of the
vehicle. Failure to observe the instructions
may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal
injury.
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to
observe the instructions is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
The illustrations in this manual show a left-
hand-drive vehicle. The location of vehicle
parts and controls for right-hand drive vehi-
cles differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to intro-
duce changes in:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnology
Therefore, the descriptions provided may
occasionally differ from your own vehicle.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
ROperating Instructions
RMaintenance/Service Booklet
Rservice and warranty information
Requipment-dependent operating instruc-
tions
We wish you pleasant motoring at all times.
9065849405 É9065849405$ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31
Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 65
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 81
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 91
Climate control ................................. 111
Driving and parking .......................... 135
On-board computer and displays .... 179
Stowing and features ....................... 229
Transporting loads ............................ 239
Maintenance and care ...................... 247
Roadside Assistance ........................ 273
Wheels and tires ............................... 283
Technical data ................................... 315

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air-conditioning system

Refrigerant ..................................... 326
12 V socket ........................................ 236 see Climate control
Air-recirculation mode
A Important safety notes .................. 120
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Switching on/off ........................... 120
Display message ............................ 204 Anti-lock Braking System
Function/notes ................................ 57 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes .................... 57 Anti-theft system
Indicator lamp ................................ 218 Interior motion sensor ..................... 62
Access step in the bumper Armrests .............................................. 87
Cleaning ......................................... 269 Ashtray ............................................... 235
Activating/deactivating cooling ASR (acceleration skid control)
with air dehumidification ................. 117 Activating/deactivating ................... 58
Activating/deactivating the roof Display message ............................ 205
ventilator ........................................... 133 Function/notes ................................ 58
Adaptive Brake Assist Important safety notes .................... 58
Function/notes ............................. 162 Indicator lamp ................................ 218
ADAPTIVE ESP® ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating ................... 61
Add-on equipment ............................... 26 Switching off the alarm .................... 61
Authorized workshop
Additional indicators
see Qualified specialist workshop
Replacing bulbs (roof) .................... 104
Additives Automatic car wash (care) ............... 265
Automatic climate control
Diesel ............................................ 320
Engine oil ....................................... 323 see Climate control
ADR (working speed governor) ........ 172 Automatic headlamp mode ................ 93
Air bags Automatic locking ............................... 71
Deployment ..................................... 49 Automatic transmission
Front air bag (driver, front Accelerator pedal position ............. 144
passenger) ....................................... 48 Changing gear ............................... 143
Important safety notes .................... 47 Changing gear yourself .................. 143
Introduction ..................................... 47 Driving tips .................................... 144
Thoraxbag ........................................ 48 Emergency running mode .............. 145
Window curtain air bag .................... 49 Important safety notes .................. 142
Air filter Kickdown ....................................... 144
Indicator lamp ................................ 225 Maneuvering .................................. 144
Air pressure Overview ........................................ 142
see Tire pressure Problem (malfunction) ................... 145
Air vents Releasing the parking lock man-
Adjusting for the passenger com- ually ............................................... 145
partment ........................................ 121 Selector lever ................................ 142
Adjusting on the roof ..................... 121 Selector lever positions ................. 143
Important safety notes .................. 120 Shift ranges ................................... 144
Setting the center air vents ........... 121 Starting the engine ........................ 139
Setting the side air vents ............... 121 Touchshift ...................................... 143
Trailer towing ................................. 144

Index 5
Transmission oil change ................ 324 Disconnecting and connecting

Automatic transmission emer- (engine compartment) ................... 262
gency mode ....................................... 145 Display message ............................ 216
AUX port ............................................. 237 Important safety notes .................. 258
Auxiliary heating Installing/removing (driver's foot-
Activating/deactivating heater well) ............................................... 262
booster mode ................................ 130 Installing/removing (engine com-
Adjusting ....................................... 194 partment) ....................................... 263
Conditions for switching on ........... 123 Jump starting ................................. 276
Heating time .................................. 123 Location ......................................... 260
Important safety notes .................. 122 Removing/installing the floor cov-
Operating with the button (control ering (driver's footwell) .................. 260
panel) ............................................ 123 Before driving off
Operation with the remote con- Important safety notes .................. 138
trol ................................................. 125 Belt
Operation with the timer ................ 127 see Seat belts
Problem (malfunction) ................... 132 Bleeding the fuel system .................. 141
Selecting a switch-on time ............. 124 Blind Spot Assist
Setting the switch-on time ............. 125 Activating/deactivating ......... 165, 194
see Auxiliary heating Notes/function .............................. 163
Axle load, permissible (trailer tow- Trailer towing ................................. 165
ing) ...................................................... 330 BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat-
ment
B Notes ............................................... 25
Bottle holder
Backup lamps see Cup holder
Replacing bulbs ............................. 103 Brake Assist
Backup lamps (Chassis Cab) see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Replacing bulbs ............................. 104 Brake Assist System
BAS (Brake Assist System) see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Display message ............................ 205 Brake fluid
Function/notes ................................ 59 Checking the level ......................... 254
Indicator lamp ................................ 218 Display message ............................ 206
Basic settings Notes ............................................. 324
see Settings Warning lamp ................................. 219
Battery Brake force distribution, elec-
Isolating switch .............................. 137 tronic
Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 69 see EBD (electronic brake force
Battery (SmartKey) distribution)
Checking .......................................... 68 Brake lamps
Important safety notes .................... 68 Replacing bulbs ............................. 103
Replacing ......................................... 69 Brake lamps (Chassis Cab)
Battery (vehicle) Replacing bulbs ............................. 104
Care ............................................... 264 Brake linings
Charge indicator lamp ................... 222 Display message ............................ 205
Charging ........................................ 263 Indicator lamp ................................ 222
Disconnecting and connecting Brake system
(driver's footwell) ........................... 260 Malfunction .................................... 205

6 Index
Warning lamp ................................. 218 Sliding door ................................... 269

Brakes Steering wheel ............................... 270
ABS .................................................. 57 Step (electrical) ............................. 269
Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 162 Trim pieces .................................... 270
Applying the parking brake ............ 150 Washing by hand ........................... 266
BAS .................................................. 59 Washing the engine ....................... 266
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 324 Wheels ........................................... 267
Checking brake fluid level .............. 254 Windows ........................................ 267
Display messages .......................... 205 Wiper blades .................................. 268
EBD .................................................. 59 Cargo compartment
Important safety notes .................. 154 Activating/deactivating ventila-
Maintenance .................................. 218 tion ................................................ 133
Parking brake (notes) ..................... 155 Cargo compartment floor ................... 27
Riding tips ...................................... 154 Cargo tie-down points and tie
Breakdown downs
Fire extinguisher ............................ 276 Important safety notes .................. 242
First-aid kit .................................... 275 Cargo tie-down rings
Jump-starting ................................. 276 Installing ........................................ 244
Reflective safety jacket .................. 275 Permissible tensile load ................. 327
Vehicle tool kit ............................... 274 Carrier system
Warning lamp ................................. 275 Ladder rack ................................... 245
Warning triangle ............................ 275 CD player/CD changer ...................... 188
see Flat tire Cell phone
see Towing away see Mobile phone
Bulb Center console overview .................... 37
see Changing bulbs Central locking
Bulb failure indicator .......................... 92 Automatic locking ............................ 71
Important safety notes .................... 71
C Locking/unlocking (buttons) ........... 71
Car Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 66
Locking/unlocking manually ............ 71
see Vehicle
Central locking system
Care
see Central locking
Access step in the bumper ............ 269
Changing bulbs
Car wash ........................................ 265
Additional indicators (roof) ............ 104
Display ........................................... 270
Backup lamp (Chassis Cab) ........... 104
Exterior lights ................................ 268
Backup lamps ................................ 103
Interior ........................................... 270
Bi-Xenon bulbs ................................. 99
Notes ............................................. 265
Brake lamps ................................... 103
Paint .............................................. 267
Brake lamps (Chassis Cab) ............ 104
Plastic trim .................................... 270
Cornering lamps ............................ 101
Power washer ................................ 266
Courtesy lights ............................... 105
Rear view camera .......................... 269
Daytime running lamps (halogen
Roof lining ...................................... 271
headlamps) .................................... 101
Seat belt ........................................ 271
Display message ............................ 208
Seat cover ..................................... 271
Front interior light .......................... 105
Selector lever ................................ 270
High-beam headlamps ................... 100
Sensors ......................................... 268
Interior light ................................... 105

Index 7
Interior lighting .............................. 105 Cleaning

License plate lamp ......................... 103 Mirror turn signal ........................... 268
License plate lamp (Chassis Cab) .. 104 Trailer tow hitch ............................. 270
Low-beam headlamps .................... 100 Climate control
Overview of lamp types (front Air-conditioning system ................. 114
bulbs) ............................................. 100 Auxiliary heating ............................ 122
Overview of lamp types (rear Checking/cleaning the air filter
bulbs, Cargo Van/Passenger (rear-compartment air condition-
Van) ............................................... 102 ing) ................................................ 256
Overview of lamp types (rear Cooling with air dehumidification .. 117
bulbs, Chassis Cab) ....................... 104 Defrosting the windows ................. 118
Parking lamps ................................ 100 Heating .......................................... 113
Perimeter lamp ...................... 104, 105 Important safety notes .................. 112
Rear fog lamp ................................ 103 Operating the cargo compartment
Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab) .......... 104 air vents ......................................... 133
Rear interior light ........................... 106 Overview of systems ...................... 112
Standing lamps (rear, Chassis Problem with the rear window
Cab) ............................................... 104 defroster ........................................ 119
Standing lamps (rear) .................... 103 Problems with the windshield
Tail lamps ...................................... 103 heating .......................................... 119
Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) ................ 104 Rear-compartment air condition-
Turn signals (front) ......................... 102 ing ................................................. 116
Turn signals (rear, Chassis Cab) ..... 104 Rear-compartment heating ............ 115
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 103 Reheat function (air dehumidifica-
Warning and indicator lamps ......... 227 tion) ............................................... 118
see Replacing bulbs Setting the air distribution ............. 117
Changing bulbs Setting the air vents ...................... 120
see Replacing bulbs Setting the airflow ......................... 118
Checklist Setting the temperature ................ 117
Before driving off-road ................... 157 Switching air-recirculation mode
Child seat on/off ............................................ 120
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 55 Switching on/off ........................... 116
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching the rear window
anchors ............................................ 53 defroster on/off ............................ 119
On the front-passenger seat ............ 55 Switching windshield heating on/
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 55 off .................................................. 119
Top Tether ....................................... 54 Cockpit
Child-proof locks Overview .......................................... 32
Important safety notes .................... 55 see Instrument cluster
Rear door ......................................... 56 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Sliding door ..................................... 56 Activating/deactivating the dis-
Children tance warning function .................. 162
In the vehicle ................................... 51 COMAND display
Restraint systems ............................ 52 Cleaning ......................................... 270
Special seat belt retractor ............... 52 Combination switch ............................ 94
Chock ................................................. 151 Communications equipment
Cigarette lighter ................................ 235 Operation ....................................... 237
PND fittings ................................... 237

8 Index
Ports .............................................. 237 Customer Assistance Center

Type approval/frequency .............. 316 (CAC) ..................................................... 28
Consumption statistics (on-board Customer Relations Department ....... 28
computer) .......................................... 195
Control panel D
Above the windshield ....................... 38
Dashboard
Center console ................................ 37
Climate control ................................ 37 see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
Driver's door .................................... 39
Left and right side of the steering see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
wheel ............................................... 39
Conversions/equipment .................... 26 see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Coolant (engine)
Activating/deactivating (vehicles
Adding ........................................... 254
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 192
Checking the level ......................... 253
Changing bulbs (halogen head-
Display message ............................ 212
lamps) ............................................ 101
Displaying the temperature (on-
Switching on/off (switch) ................ 92
board computer) ............................ 187
Switching on/off (vehicles with-
Filling capacity ............................... 326
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 183
Important safety notes .................. 253
Dealership
Cooling
see Qualified specialist workshop
see Climate control
Cornering lamps Declarations of conformity ................. 24
DEF
Replacing bulbs ............................. 101
Cornering light function Exhaust gas aftertreatment ............. 25
DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid )
Function/notes ................................ 95
Courtesy lights Refilling .......................................... 147
Replacing bulbs ............................. 105 Delayed switch-off ............................ 193
Crosswind driving assistance ............ 59 Diagnostics connection
Cruise control Operating safety and vehicle
Activating ....................................... 160 approval ........................................... 25
Activation conditions ..................... 160 Diesel .................................................. 319
Cruise control lever ....................... 159 Diesel engine
Deactivating ................................... 160 Preglow indicator lamp .................. 225
Display message ............................ 214 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Driving system ............................... 159 Display messages (vehicles with
Function/notes ............................. 159 steering wheel buttons) ................. 211
Important safety notes .................. 159 Display messages (vehicles with-
Problem (malfunction) ................... 161 out steering wheel buttons) ........... 200
Setting a speed .............................. 160 Indicator lamp ................................ 221
Storing and maintaining current Information on consumption .......... 321
speed ............................................. 160 Level indicator ............................... 182
Cup holder ......................................... 235 Notes ............................................. 320
Cup holder Storage .......................................... 321
see Cup holders Tank content .................................. 321
Diesel particle filter
Cup holders ........................................ 234
Display message ............................ 211
Curtains (cleaning instructions) ...... 271
Short-distance driving .................... 153

Index 9
Digital speedometer Driving off-road

Setting the unit (vehicles with see Off-road driving
steering wheel buttons) ................. 190 Driving on flooded roads .................. 155
Display Driving on rough terrain
Display messages .......................... 197 Checklist before driving off-road .... 157
Outside temperature (vehicles Driving safety systems
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 187 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57
Outside temperature display Adaptive Brake Assist .................... 162
(vehicles without steering wheel ASR (Acceleration Skid Control) ...... 58
buttons) ......................................... 182 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59
Standard display (vehicles with Distance warning function ............. 161
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 EBD (electronic brake force distri-
Standard display (vehicles with- bution) ............................................. 59
out steering wheel buttons) ........... 182 Important safety information ........... 57
see Warning and indicator lamps Overview .......................................... 57
Display messages Driving systems
Calling up the message memory .... 198 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 163
Driving systems ............................. 214 Cruise control ................................ 159
Engine ............................................ 211 Display message ............................ 214
Important safety notes .................. 197 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 165
Lights ............................................. 208 PARKTRONIC ................................. 167
Safety systems .............................. 204 Driving tips
SmartKey ....................................... 217 Automatic transmission ................. 144
Tires ............................................... 215 Brakes ........................................... 154
Vehicle ........................................... 216 Break-in period .............................. 136
Distance recorder ............................. 187 Downhill gradient ........................... 154
see Odometer Drinking and driving ....................... 152
see Trip odometer Driving abroad ............................... 153
Distance warning function Driving in winter ............................. 156
Activating/deactivating ................. 162 Driving on flooded roads ................ 155
Function/notes ............................. 161 Driving on wet roads ...................... 155
Warning lamp ................................. 162 Exhaust check ............................... 152
Door lock Fuel ................................................ 152
see Central locking General .......................................... 151
Doors Hydroplaning ................................. 155
Central locking/unlocking Icy road surfaces ........................... 156
(SmartKey) ....................................... 66 Important safety notes .................. 136
Control panel ................................... 39 Limited braking efficiency on sal-
Display message ............................ 217 ted roads ....................................... 155
Indicator lamp ................................ 227 Off-road driving .............................. 156
Drinking and driving ......................... 152 Overrun cut-off .............................. 152
Drinks holder Snow chains .................................. 287
see Bottle holder Speed limitation ............................. 153
Driver's seat Towing a trailer .............................. 173
see Seats Transport by rail ............................. 154
Driver's/co-driver's door Wet road surface ........................... 154
Unlocking ......................................... 72
Driving abroad ................................... 153

10 Index
E Problem (malfunction) ................... 141

Engine oil
EBD (electronic brake force distri- Adding ........................................... 252
bution) Additives ........................................ 323
Display message ............................ 206 Checking the oil level (on-board
Function/notes ................................ 59 computer) ...................................... 250
Indicator lamps .............................. 218 Checking the oil level using the
Electrical closing assist ...................... 73 dipstick .......................................... 251
Electrical fuses Display message ............................ 213
see Fuses Filling capacity ............................... 323
Electrical step Information about oil consump-
Cleaning ......................................... 269 tion ................................................ 324
Display message ............................ 216 Mixing ............................................ 323
Emergency release .......................... 74 Notes about oil grades ................... 322
Function ........................................... 74 Oil change ...................................... 323
Important safety notes .................... 73 Oil level (note) ............................... 250
Indicator lamp ................................ 227 Viscosity ........................................ 322
Manual retraction ............................ 74 Warning lamp ................................. 222
Obstacle detection ........................... 74 Engine speed setting (working
Electrical system mode) ................................................. 172
Battery main switch ....................... 137 Engine, jump-starting ....................... 276
Electronic brake force distribution
Equipment/conversions ..................... 26
see EBD (electronic brake force
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
distribution)
gram)
Electronic Stability Program
Display message ............................ 207
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Important safety information ........... 59
Emergency exit .................................... 60
Indicator lamp ................................ 221
Emergency exit window ..................... 60 Warning lamp ................................. 218
Emergency Tensioning Devices Exhaust check ................................... 152
Activation ......................................... 49 Exhaust gas aftertreatment
Emissions control
DEF level indicator ......................... 182
Service and warranty information .... 28 DEF reducing agent ....................... 320
Engine
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 320
ADR (working speed governor) ...... 172 Display messages (vehicles with
Changing the power output ............. 25 steering wheel buttons) ................. 211
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 224 Display messages (vehicles with-
Cleaning instructions ..................... 266 out steering wheel buttons) ........... 200
Engine number ............................... 317 Indicator lamp ....................... 221, 225
Engine speed setting (working Malfunction .................................... 211
mode) ............................................ 173 Refilling DEF .................................. 147
Irregular running ............................ 141 Exterior lighting
Jump-starting ................................. 276 see Lights
Starting .......................................... 139 Exterior mirrors
Starting problems .......................... 141 Adjusting ......................................... 89
Switching off .................................. 150 Important safety notes .................... 89
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 280 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 231
Engine electronics
Notes ............................................. 316

Index 11
F Fuel tank
Problem (malfunction) ................... 147
Fire extinguisher ............................... 276 Fuel tank content
First-aid kit ......................................... 275 Reserve, display message .............. 212
Flat tire Fuses .................................................. 280
Changing a wheel/mounting the
spare wheel ................................... 306 G
General notes ................................ 305
Fog lamps Gasoline
Switching on/off .............................. 93 Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 224
Fogged-up windows General driving tips
see Climate control Driving short distances .................. 153
Folding seat ......................................... 85 Genuine parts ...................................... 27
Folding table Glove box ........................................... 230
In the twin co-driver's seat ............ 234 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-
Frequencies tion) .................................................... 303
Mobile phone ................................. 316 Guarantee ............................................ 28
Two-way radio ................................ 316
Front fog lamps H
Switching on/off .............................. 93
Handbrake
Front interior light
see Parking brake
Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
Front windshield Hazard warning lamps ........................ 95
Head restraints
see Windshield
Fuel Adjusting ......................................... 86
Additives (diesel) ........................... 320 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 86
Headlamps
Consumption information .............. 320
Consumption statistics .................. 195 Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 255
Diesel at very low outside temper- Cleaning system (function) .............. 95
atures ............................................ 319 Fogging up ....................................... 97
Display message ............................ 212 see Automatic headlamp mode
Driving tips .................................... 152 Headliner (cleaning instructions) .... 271
Fuel gauge ..................................... 181 Heating
Important safety notes .................. 318 see Climate control
Problem (malfunction) ................... 147 High-beam headlamps
Quality (diesel) ............................... 319 Highbeam Assist .............................. 96
Refueling ........................................ 145 Replacing bulbs ............................. 100
Showing the range (on-board Switching on/off .............................. 94
computer with steering wheel but- Highbeam Assist
tons) .............................................. 195 Function/notes ................................ 96
Showing the range (vehicles with Switching Highbeam Assist on/
steering wheel buttons) ................. 195 off .................................................. 192
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 319 Hood
Fuel filter with water separator Closing ........................................... 249
draining ......................................... 255 Display message ............................ 217
Indicator lamp ................................ 226 Important safety notes .................. 248
Fuel gauge ......................................... 181 Indicator lamp ................................ 227
Opening ......................................... 248

12 Index
Hydroplaning ..................................... 155 K

Key
I
Position in the ignition lock ............ 138
Immobilizer .......................................... 61 Key positions ..................................... 138
Indicator lamp Kickdown ........................................... 144
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators L
see Turn signals
Insect protection on the radiator ...... 27 Lamps
Installing a wheel see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Installing the adapter (spare
wheel) ............................................ 309 Activating/deactivating ................. 166
Instrument cluster Function/notes ............................. 165
Language
Fuel gage ....................................... 181
Important safety notes .................. 180 Display (vehicles with steering
Instrument cluster lighting ............. 181 wheel buttons) ............................... 190
Lashing points and tie downs
Outside temperature display .......... 181
Overview .......................................... 34 Permissible tensile load ................. 327
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Speedometer ................................. 181
Tachometer ................................... 181 anchors ................................................ 53
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 35 License plate lamp
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 181 Replacing bulbs ............................. 103
Instrument lighting License plate lamp (Chassis Cab)
see Instrument cluster lighting Replacing bulbs ............................. 104
Interior lighting ................................... 97 Light sensor ......................................... 93
Lighting
Front ................................................ 97
Motion detectors ............................. 99 see Lights
Lighting
Notes on replacing bulbs ............... 105
Replacing bulbs ............................. 105 see Lights
Lights
Switching the rear compartment
lighting on centrally ......................... 98 Activating/deactivating daytime
Interior motion sensor running lamps (on-board com-
Arming ............................................. 62 puter with steering wheel but-
Deactivating ..................................... 62 tons) .............................................. 192
Function ........................................... 62 Activating/deactivating surround
Switching off .................................... 62 lighting (vehicles with steering
wheel buttons) ............................... 193
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 93
J
Bulb failure indicator ........................ 92
Jack Cornering light function ................... 95
Jacking points ................................ 307 Driving abroad ............................... 153
Preparation .................................... 307 Fog lamps ........................................ 93
Storage location ............................ 274 Hazard warning lamps ..................... 95
Using ............................................. 307 High beam flasher ............................ 94
Jump-starting ..................................... 276 High-beam headlamps ..................... 94
Highbeam Assist .............................. 96

Index 13
Light switch ..................................... 92 Menu (vehicles with steering

Low-beam headlamps ...................... 92 wheel buttons)
Parking lamps .................................. 92 Audio ............................................. 187
Rear fog lamp .................................. 93 Operation ....................................... 186
Setting the exterior lighting Settings ......................................... 188
delayed switch-off (vehicles with Telephone ...................................... 196
steering wheel buttons) ................. 193 Message
Switching the daytime running see Display message
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 92 Message memory (on-board com-
Turn signals ..................................... 94 puter) .................................................. 198
see Changing a bulb Mirrors
see Interior lighting Exterior mirrors ................................ 89
Limited Warranty ................................ 22 Rear-view mirror .............................. 89
Load distribution ............................... 242 Mobile navigation devices ................ 237
Load securing aids Mobile phone ..................................... 237
Carrier systems ............................. 245 Important safety notes .................. 236
Loading guidelines Pre-installation ............................... 237
Important safety notes .................. 240 Type approval/frequency .............. 316
Loading rails Mounting wheels
Installing cargo tie-down rings ....... 244 Lowering the vehicle ...................... 310
Maximum tensile strength ............. 328 Mounting a new wheel ................... 309
Loads Preparing the vehicle ..................... 306
Securing ........................................ 242 Raising the vehicle ......................... 307
Transporting .................................. 240 Removing a wheel .......................... 309
Locator lighting Removing and mounting the spare
Setting (vehicles with steering wheel ............................................. 313
wheel buttons) ............................... 193 Securing the vehicle against roll-
Locking ing away ........................................ 306
see Central locking
Locking and unlocking manually ....... 71 N
Locking centrally
Navigation
see Central locking
Low-beam headlamps Fittings for PND mobile navigation
devices .......................................... 237
Display message ............................ 208
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
Driving abroad ............................... 153
cle ....................................................... 136
Replacing bulbs ............................. 100
Switching on/off .............................. 92
Lumbar support ................................... 83 O
Occupant safety
M Children in the vehicle ..................... 51
M+S tires ............................................ 286
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56
Maintenance ...................................... 256
Odometer
Malfunctions
Display (vehicles with steering
Message memory (on-board com-
wheel buttons) ............................... 187
puter) ............................................. 198
Display (vehicles without steering
Maximum speed
wheel buttons) ............................... 182
Speed limitation ............................. 153

14 Index
Off-road driving Operating system

Checklist after driving off-road ...... 158 see On-board computer
Important safety notes .................. 156 Operator's Manual
Rules for driving off-road ............... 158 General notes .................................. 22
Oil Vehicle equipment ........................... 22
see Engine oil Outline lamp
On-board computer Replacing bulbs ............................. 105
Display message ............................ 197 Outside temperature display ........... 181
Lighting submenu .......................... 192 Overhead control panel ...................... 38
On-board computer (vehicles with Overrevving range ............................. 181
steering wheel buttons) Overrun cutoff ................................... 152
Audio menu ................................... 187
Display message ............................ 184 P
Menu overview .............................. 186
Operating ....................................... 184 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 267
Operation menu ............................. 186 Paper holder ...................................... 233
Settings menu ............................... 188 Parking ............................................... 149
Standard display ............................ 187 Important safety notes .................. 149
Telephone menu ............................ 196 Parking brake ................................ 150
Trip computer menu ...................... 195 Wheel chock .................................. 151
On-board computer (vehicles with- see PARKTRONIC
out steering wheel buttons) Parking aid
Display message ............................ 198 see PARKTRONIC
General notes ................................ 182 Parking assistance
Setting the clock ............................ 183 see PARKTRONIC
Standard display ............................ 182 Parking brake
Operating Instructions Display message ............................ 207
Before the first journey .................... 22 Notes/function .............................. 150
Limited Warranty ............................. 22 Parking lamps
Operating safety Replacing bulbs ............................. 100
Vehicle registration .......................... 28 PARKTRONIC
Operating safety and vehicle Deactivating/activating ................. 169
approval Driving system ............................... 167
Attachments and bodies .................. 26 Function/notes ............................. 167
BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreat- Important safety notes .................. 167
ment ................................................ 25 Problem (malfunction) ................... 171
Changing the engine power out- Range of the sensors ..................... 168
put ................................................... 25 Roll-back warning .......................... 169
Correct use ...................................... 22 Trailer towing ................................. 170
Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Warning display ............................. 169
Equipment and conversions ............. 26 Partition sliding door
Important safety notes .................... 24 Important safety notes .................... 77
Information about body/equip- Opening/closing .............................. 77
ment mounting directives ................ 26 Passenger compartment air-condi-
Notes on operating the vehicle ........ 24 tioning system
Qualified specialist workshop .......... 25 see Climate control
Registering your vehicle ................... 25 Passenger compartment heating
see Climate control

Index 15
Perimeter lamp Rear compartment

Replacing bulbs ............................. 104 Activating/deactivating climate
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56 control ........................................... 116
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Setting the air vents ...................... 121
tions) .................................................. 270 Rear door
Power supply Child-proof locks .............................. 56
Battery isolating switch ................. 137 Important safety notes .................... 75
Switching off .................................. 137 Opening/closing .............................. 75
Switching on .................................. 137 Rear fog lamp
Power take-off Replacing bulbs ............................. 103
Engine speed setting ..................... 172 Switching on/off .............................. 93
Power washers .................................. 266 Rear fog lamp (Chassis Cab)
Power windows Replacing bulbs ............................. 104
see Side windows Rear interior light
Preparing for a journey Replacing bulbs ............................. 106
Checks in the vehicle ..................... 138 Rear lamps
Visual check of the vehicle exte- see Lights
rior ................................................. 138 Rear rack
Protection of the environment Notes ............................................. 245
General notes .................................. 23 Rear view camera
Pulling away ...................................... 140 Cleaning instructions ..................... 269
Important safety notes .................. 171
Q Switching on .................................. 171
Rear window defroster
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 25 Problem (malfunction) ................... 119
Switching on/off ........................... 119
R Rear window wiper ........................... 108
Radiator cover ..................................... 27 Switching on/off ........................... 108
Radio Rear-compartment air-condition-
Changing stations (vehicles with ing system
steering wheel buttons) ................. 187 see Climate control
see separate operating instructions Rear-compartment heating
Radio-wave reception/transmis- see Climate control
sion in the vehicle Rear-view mirror
Declaration of conformity ................ 24 Anti-glare mode ............................... 89
Rain and light sensor Refilling
Setting the sensitivity (vehicles DEF filler neck ............................... 148
with steering wheel buttons) ......... 193 Important safety notes (Diesel
Windshield wiper ........................... 107 Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 147
Range (vehicles with steering Refilling procedure (Diesel
wheel buttons) .................................. 195 Exhaust Fluid – DEF) ...................... 148
Rear bench seat Refrigerant ......................................... 326
Installing/removing (Passenger Refueling
Van) ................................................. 85 Fuel filler flap ................................. 146
Stowage compartment (crewcab) .. 233 Fuel gauge ..................................... 181
Important safety notes (fuel) ......... 145
Refueling procedure (fuel) ............. 146
see Fuel

16 Index
Releasing the parking lock man- Correct driver's seat position ........... 82
ually (automatic transmission) ........ 145 Folding seat ..................................... 85
Remote control Important safety notes .................... 82
Changing the operating duration Rear bench seat ............................... 85
(auxiliary heating) .......................... 126 Seat heating .................................... 87
Replacing the battery (auxiliary Setting the driver's seat ................... 83
heating ) ........................................ 130 Swivel seat ....................................... 84
Switching on/off (auxiliary heat- Twin co-driver's seat ........................ 85
ing) ................................................ 126 Securing loads
Synchronizing (auxiliary heating) ... 126 Important safety notes .................. 242
Replacing bulbs Selector lever
Important safety notes .................... 99 Cleaning ......................................... 270
Replacing the battery (auxiliary Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 268
heating remote control) .................... 130 Service center
Restraint system see Qualified specialist workshop
Introduction ..................................... 42 Service interval display
Warning lamp (function) .......... 42, 222 Calling up the service due date ...... 258
Reverse warning feature .................. 140 Exceeding a service due date ........ 258
Roof carrier Notes ............................................. 257
Maximum payload .......................... 328 Service due date (automatic dis-
Notes ............................................. 245 play) ............................................... 257
Roof load (roof carrier) ..................... 328 Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 324
S Coolant (engine) ............................ 325
Diesel ............................................ 318
Safety Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 320
Child restraint systems .................... 52 Engine oil ....................................... 322
Children in the vehicle ..................... 51 Fuel ................................................ 318
Safety system Important safety notes .................. 318
see Driving safety systems Power steering fluid ....................... 324
Seat belts Refrigerant ..................................... 326
Adjusting the height ......................... 45 Transmission oil ............................. 324
Cleaning ......................................... 271 Washer fluid ................................... 326
Correct usage .................................. 45 Setting the air distribution ............... 117
Display message ............................ 207 Setting the airflow ............................ 118
Fastening ......................................... 45 Setting the clock
Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Vehicles with steering wheel but-
Introduction ..................................... 43 tons ............................................... 191
Releasing ......................................... 46 Vehicles without steering wheel
Warning lamp ................................. 227 buttons .......................................... 183
Warning lamp (function) ................... 46 Settings
Seat heating ......................................... 87 Resetting all (vehicles with steer-
Seats ing wheel buttons) ......................... 188
Adjusting lumbar support ................ 83 Resetting submenus (vehicles
Adjusting the co-driver's seat .......... 83 with steering wheel buttons) ......... 189
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86 Short journeys (diesel particle fil-
Armrest ............................................ 87 ter) ...................................................... 153
Cleaning the cover ......................... 271

Index 17
Side windows Sprinter Dealer

Cleaning ......................................... 267 see Qualified specialist workshop
Hinged side windows ....................... 78 Standing lamps
Important safety information ........... 78 Replacing bulbs ............................. 100
Opening/closing .............................. 78 Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 103
Overview .......................................... 78 Standing lamps (Chassis Cab)
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79 Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 104
Resetting ......................................... 79 Start-off assist
Sliding door Display message ............................ 205
Child-proof locks .............................. 56 Starting (engine) ................................ 139
Cleaning ......................................... 269 Station
Closing assist ................................... 73 see Radio
Important safety notes .................... 72 Steering wheel
Opening/closing .............................. 72 Adjusting ......................................... 88
Opening/closing from the inside ..... 73 Button overview ............................... 37
Opening/closing from the out- Cleaning ......................................... 270
side .................................................. 73 Step
SmartKey see Electrical step
Changing the battery ....................... 69 Stickers
Changing the locking system set- General safety notes ........................ 22
tings ............................................... 194 Stowage spaces
Checking the battery ....................... 68 see Stowage spaces and stowage
Display message ............................ 217 compartments
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 66 Stowage spaces and stowage com-
Important safety notes .................... 66 partments
Loss ................................................. 70 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 231
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70 Glove box ....................................... 230
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 138 Important safety notes .................. 230
Snow chains ...................................... 287 Paper holder .................................. 233
Sockets .............................................. 236 Stowage compartment above the
Spare wheel windshield ..................................... 232
General notes ................................ 312 Stowage compartment in the cen-
Important safety notes .................. 312 ter console ..................................... 232
Removing/mounting ...................... 313 Stowage compartment in the
Special seat belt retractor .................. 52 dashboard ...................................... 231
Specialist workshop ............................ 25 Stowage space above the head-
Speed, controlling liner ............................................... 232
see Cruise control Stowage space under the rear
Speedometer bench seat ..................................... 233
Digital (vehicles with steering Stowage space under the twin co-
wheel buttons) ............................... 191 driver's seat ................................... 232
Digital (vehicles without steering Summer tires ..................................... 286
wheel buttons) ............................... 182 Switch unit
Selecting display unit (vehicles see Control panel
with steering- wheel buttons) ........ 190 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 61
see Instrument cluster Switching the heater booster func-
tion on/off ......................................... 130

18 Index
Switching the surround lighting Time

on/off (on-board computer) ............. 193 Setting the time (vehicles with
Swivel seat ........................................... 84 steering wheel buttons) ................. 191
Setting the time (vehicles without
T steering wheel buttons) ................. 183
Timer
Tachometer ........................................ 181 Activating ....................................... 128
Tail lamps Important safety notes .................. 127
Changing ....................................... 104 Overview ........................................ 127
Replacing bulbs ............................. 103 Setting the heating level (auxiliary
see Lights heating) ......................................... 129
Tail lamps (Chassis Cab) Setting the preselection time
Replacing bulbs ............................. 104 (auxiliary heating) .......................... 129
Tank content Setting weekday, time and oper-
Fuel gauge ..................................... 181 ating duration (auxiliary heating) ... 128
Range (vehicles with steering Switching immediate heating
wheel buttons) ............................... 195 mode on/off (auxiliary heating) ..... 128
Reserve fuel warning lamp ............. 224 Tire pressure
Technical data Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 291
Capacities ...................................... 318 Checking manually ........................ 290
Cargo tie-down points .................... 327 Display messages (vehicles with
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 327 steering wheel buttons) ................. 215
Loading rails .................................. 328 Display messages (vehicles with-
Roof carrier .................................... 328 out steering wheel buttons) ........... 199
Tires/wheels ......................... 294, 311 Maximum ....................................... 290
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 328 Notes ............................................. 289
Vehicle data ................................... 327 Recommended ............................... 288
Telephone .......................................... 236 Setting the unit (vehicles with
Telephone (on-board computer) steering wheel buttons) ................. 191
Accepting an incoming call ............ 196 Tire label ................................ 288, 289
Display messages .......................... 217 Tire pressure loss warning system .. 292
Numbers from the phone book ...... 196 Tire pressure monitor
Operating ....................................... 196 Checking the tire pressure elec-
Redialing ........................................ 197 tronically ........................................ 292
Rejecting or ending a call .............. 196 Display message ............................ 215
Temperature Function/notes ............................. 291
Outside temperature ...................... 181 Indicator lamp ................................ 226
Setting (climate control) ................ 117 Restarting ...................................... 293
Setting the unit (vehicles with Warning lamp ................................. 292
steering wheel buttons) ................. 189 Tire pressure table ............................ 294
Theft deterrent systems Tires
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 61 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 304
Immobilizer ...................................... 61 Average weight of the vehicle
Tow-away alarm ............................... 62 occupants (definition) .................... 303
Thoraxbag ............................................ 48 Bar (definition) ............................... 302
Tightening torques for wheel nuts/ Changing a wheel .......................... 305
wheel bolts ........................................ 310 Characteristics .............................. 302
Checking ........................................ 285

Index 19
Curb weight (definition) ................. 304 TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Definition of terms ......................... 302 (definition) ..................................... 304
Direction of rotation ...................... 306 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 304
Distribution of the vehicle occu- Tire pressure (definition) ................ 304
pants (definition) ............................ 305 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 303
DOT (Department of Transporta- Tire size (data) ....................... 294, 311
tion) (definition) ............................. 303 Tire size designation, load-bearing
DOT, Tire Identification Number capacity, speed rating .................... 300
(TIN) ............................................... 302 Tire tread ....................................... 285
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Tire tread (definition) ..................... 304
(definition) ..................................... 303 Total load limit (definition) ............. 305
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi- Traction (definition) ....................... 304
nition) ............................................ 303 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- noseweight) (definition) ................. 305
inition) ........................................... 303 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Standards (definition) .................... 303
ing) (definition) .............................. 303 valve, Snap-In ................................ 290
Important safety notes .................. 284 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 305
Increased vehicle weight due to Wheel rim (definition) .................... 303
optional equipment (definition) ...... 303 Top Tether ............................................ 54
Information on driving .................... 284 Touchshift (automatic transmis-
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 303 sion) .................................................... 143
Labeling (overview) ........................ 299 Tow-away alarm
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 304 Arming/deactivating ........................ 62
Load index ..................................... 301 Deactivating ..................................... 62
Load index (definition) ................... 304 Operation ......................................... 62
M+S tires ....................................... 286 Tow-starting
Maximum load on a tire (defini- Emergency engine starting ............ 280
tion) ............................................... 304 Important safety notes .................. 277
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Towing
(definition) ..................................... 303 If the vehicle is stuck ..................... 280
Maximum permissible tire pres- Installing/removing the towing
sure (definition) ............................. 304 eye ................................................. 278
Maximum tire load ......................... 301 With a raised front or rear axle ...... 279
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 304 Towing a trailer
Optional equipment weight (defi- Axle load, permissible .................... 330
nition) ............................................ 304 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 270
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Coupling up a trailer ...................... 175
inition) ........................................... 304 Decoupling a trailer ....................... 177
Replacing ....................................... 305 Driving tips .................................... 173
Service life ..................................... 286 Important safety notes .................. 173
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 304 Notes on retrofitting ...................... 328
Snow chains .................................. 287 Power supply ................................. 178
Speed rating (definition) ................ 303 Trailer loads ................................... 330
Storing ........................................... 306 Towing away
Structure and characteristics Important safety guidelines ........... 277
(definition) ..................................... 302 In the event of malfunctions .......... 279
Summer tires ................................. 286 With both axles on the ground ....... 279

20 Index
Trailer TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-

Brake force booster malfunction ... 219 nition) ................................................. 305
Trailer coupling
see Towing a trailer U
Trailer loads and drawbar nose-
Unlocking
weights ............................................... 177
Trailer towing From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 71
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 165
USB port ............................................. 238
PARKTRONIC ................................. 170
Permissible trailer loads and
drawbar noseweights ..................... 177 V
Transmission Vehicle
see Automatic transmission Data acquisition ............................... 29
Transmission oil ................................ 324 Display message ............................ 216
Transport Electronics ..................................... 316
Loading guidelines ......................... 240 Equipment ....................................... 22
Vehicle ........................................... 280 Individual settings (vehicles with
Transport by rail ................................ 154 steering wheel buttons) ................. 188
Transportation Limited Warranty ............................. 22
Rail ................................................ 154 Loading .......................................... 295
Transporting Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 66
Load distribution ............................ 242 Lowering ........................................ 310
Securing a load .............................. 242 Maintenance .................................... 28
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Parking for a long period ................ 151
tions) .................................................. 270 Pulling away ................................... 140
Trip computer (on-board com- Raising ........................................... 307
puter) .................................................. 195 Registration ............................... 25, 28
Trip meter Reporting problems ......................... 28
see Trip odometer Securing from rolling away ............ 149
Trip odometer Towing away .................................. 277
Display (vehicles with steering Transporting .................................. 280
wheel buttons) ............................... 187 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 66
Display (vehicles without steering Vehicle battery
wheel buttons) ............................... 182 see Battery (vehicle)
Resetting ....................................... 181 Vehicle bodies
see Trip computer (on-board computer) Body/equipment mounting direc-
Turn signals tives for trucks ................................. 26
Replacing bulbs (front) ................... 102 Vehicle data ....................................... 327
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 103 Vehicle identification number .......... 316
Switching on/off .............................. 94 Vehicle identification plate .............. 316
Turn signals (Chassis Cab) Vehicle tool kit .................................. 274
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 104 Vents
Twin co-driver's seat see Air vents
Folding table .................................. 234 Voltage supply
Stowage compartment .................. 232 Fuses ............................................. 280
Two-way radios
Type approval/frequency .............. 316

Index 21
W Removing a wheel .......................... 309

Removing and mounting the spare
Warning wheel ............................................. 313
Stickers ........................................... 22 Snow chains .................................. 287
Warning and indicator lamps Storing ........................................... 306
Brakes ........................................... 219 Tightening torque ........................... 310
Check Engine ................................. 224 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 311
Coolant .......................................... 223 Window curtain air bag ....................... 49
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ............. 221 Windows
Electrical step ................................ 227 see Side windows
ESP® .............................................. 218 Windshield
ESP® function ................................ 221 Defrosting ...................................... 118
Overview .......................................... 35 Windshield heating
Seat belt ........................................ 227 Problem (malfunction) ................... 119
Warning lamp .................................... 275 Switching on/off ........................... 119
Warning triangle ................................ 275 Windshield washer fluid
Warning- and indicator lamps Adding ........................................... 255
ABS ................................................ 218 Indicator lamp ................................ 226
Air filter .......................................... 225 Windshield wipers
ASR ................................................ 218 Problem (malfunction) ................... 109
BAS ................................................ 218 Rain and light sensor ..................... 107
Battery charge ............................... 222 Rear window wiper ........................ 108
Brake wear .................................... 222 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 108
Bulbs .............................................. 227 Setting the sensitivity (vehicles
Doors ............................................. 227 with steering wheel buttons and
Engine oil level ............................... 222 rain/light sensor) ........................... 193
Preglow .......................................... 225 Switching on/off ........................... 107
Reserve fuel ................................... 224 Wiping with windshield washer
Tire pressure monitor .................... 226 fluid ............................................... 107
Water separator ............................. 226 Winter diesel ..................................... 319
Windshield washer fluid ................. 226 Winter driving
Washer fluid Slippery road surfaces ................... 156
Adding ........................................... 255 Snow chains .................................. 287
Capacities ...................................... 327 Winter operation
Display message ............................ 217 General notes ................................ 286
Indicator lamp ................................ 226 Radiator cover ................................. 27
Notes ............................................. 326 Winter tires
Wiping with .................................... 107 M+S tires ....................................... 286
Wheels Setting a limit speed ...................... 153
Changing a wheel .......................... 305 Wiper blades
Checking ........................................ 285 Cleaning ......................................... 268
Cleaning ......................................... 267 Replacing ....................................... 108
Important safety notes .................. 284 Workshop
Installing the adapter (spare see Qualified specialist workshop
wheel) ............................................ 309
Interchanging/changing ................ 305
Mounting a new wheel ................... 309
Mounting a wheel .......................... 306

22 Introduction
Operating Instructions The original purchase contract documenta-

tion for your vehicle contains a list of all of the
Before the first journey systems in your vehicle.
These instructions, the Maintenance Booklet If you have questions about equipment and
and the additional equipment-related instruc- operation, consult any authorized Sprinter
tions are integral parts of the vehicle. Keep Dealer.
these documents in the vehicle at all times. If
you sell the vehicle, always pass on all docu-
ments to the new owner. Proper use
Before you first drive off, read these docu-
ments carefully and familiarize yourself with Observe the following information when oper-
your vehicle. ating your vehicle:
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, Rthe safety notes in these operating instruc-
follow the instructions and warning notices in tions
these Operating Instructions. Failure to Rthe technical data in these Operating
observe the instructions may lead to damage Instructions
to the vehicle or personal injury. Rtraffic laws and regulations
Vehicle damage caused by a failure to Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
observe the instructions is not covered by the
There are various warning stickers affixed to
the vehicle. If you remove warning stickers,
you and others may fail to recognize the dan-
gers. Leave the warning stickers in their orig-
Limited Warranty
inal position.
! Follow the instructions in this Operator's
G WARNING
Manual about the proper operation of your
vehicle as well as about possible vehicle Modifications to electronic components, their
damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari- software as well as wiring can impair their
ses from culpable contravention of these function and/or the function of other net-
instructions is not covered by the Limited worked components. In particular, systems
Warranty of the distributor named on the relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
inside of the front cover. result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
Vehicle equipment accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
The Operating Instructions describe all mod- tronic components or their software. You
els and standard and optional equipment of should have all work to electrical and elec-
your vehicle that were available at the time of tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
going to print. Country-specific variations are specialist workshop.
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all of the described functions. The general operating permit for your vehicle
This also applies to systems and functions could be rendered invalid if you carry out
relevant to safety. The equipment in your modifications to electronic components,
vehicle may therefore differ from that shown their software as well as wiring.
in the descriptions and illustrations.

Introduction 23
G WARNING Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,

Gases and fluids from substances that con- transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
stitute a health hazard or react aggressively by these factors:
can escape even from securely closed con- Roperating conditions of your vehicle
tainers. When transporting such substances Ryour personal driving style
in the vehicle interior, your ability to concen-
You can influence both factors. You should
trate or your health could be affected during
bear the following in mind:
the journey. Malfunctions, short circuits or
electrical component system failures may Operating conditions:
also result. There is a risk of an accident and Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
fire. sumption.
Do not store or transport any substances in Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
the vehicle interior which are hazardous to are correct.
health or react aggressively. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
These instructions must also be observed for
vehicles where the cargo compartment is not them.
fully separated from the driver's cab. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
Partition with door/window: always keep the to environmental protection. You should
door/window in the partition closed during therefore adhere to the service intervals.
transport. Ralways have service work carried out at a
Examples of substances that are hazardous qualified specialist workshop.

to health and/or react aggressively: Personal driving style:
RSolvents Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
RFuel starting the engine.

Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
ROiland grease
is stationary.
RCleaning agents
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
RAcids
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
Protection of the environment braking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
Economic and environmentally aware only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
driving Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.

hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental issues and recommen-
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner dations
that takes the requirements of both nature When prompted by this Operator's Manual to
and humanity into account. dispose of materials, please try to regenerate
You too can help to protect the environment and recycle these materials. Observe all rel-
by operating your vehicle in an environmen- evant environmental guidelines and regula-
tally responsible manner.
Z
24 Introduction
tions when disposing of materials. This helps contact with hot components of the exhaust
to protect the environment. system for an extended period.
G WARNING
Operating safety and vehicle approval Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
Important safety notes hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
G WARNING
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
If you do not have the prescribed service/
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
maintenance work or any required repairs
particular, remove parts of plants or other
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
flammable materials which have become
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
Always have the prescribed service/mainte- qualified specialist workshop.
nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have the vehicle checked and repaired imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop. If
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension- you become aware when continuing the jour-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- ney that driving safety has been effected,
rial, which may require special handling and stop as soon as possible in accordance with
regard for the environment. The guidelines the traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a
must be observed during disposal. qualified specialist workshop.
In California, you can find more information
on the Internet at www.dtsc.ca.gov.
Declaration of conformity
Notes on operating the vehicle Radio-based vehicle components

There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-
Rthe vehicle makes contact with the ground,
ation is subject to the following two condi-
e.g. on a high curb or a loose road surface tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-
Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. ful interference. 2. This device must accept
a curb or a pothole any interference received, including interfer-
Ra heavy object hits the underbody or chas- ence that may cause undesired operation.
sis component Changes or modifications not expressly
In these or similar situations, the vehicle approved by the party responsible for com-
body/frame, the underbody, chassis compo- pliance could void the user’s authority to
nents, wheels or tires could be damaged even operate the equipment."
if this is not visible from the outside. Compo- Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
nents that have been damaged in this way can comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
unexpectedly fail or no longer be able to RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
assimilate the loads occurring in the event of following two conditions: 1) These devices
an accident. If the underbody paneling is may not cause interference, and 2) these
damaged, flammable material, such as devices must accept any interference
leaves, grass or twigs, could collect between received, including interference that may
the underbody and underbody paneling. cause undesired operation of the device".
These materials could ignite if they remain in

Introduction 25
Diagnostics connection The following work should always be carried

out at qualified specialist workshop:
The diagnostics connection is only intended
Rwork relevant to safety
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop. Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
G WARNING
Rmodifications as well as installations and
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
alterations
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
Rwork on electronic components
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be For this reason, we recommend an authorized
affected. There is a risk of an accident. Sprinter Dealer.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- ! Only have work carried out on the engine
tics connection in the vehicle. electronics and its associated parts, such
as control units, sensors, actuating com-
ponents and connector leads, at a qualified
Changing the engine power output specialist workshop. Vehicle components
may otherwise wear more quickly and the
! Increases in engine power can:
vehicle's operating permit may be invalida-
Rchange the emission values ted.
Rcause malfunctions
Rcause consequential damage
The operating reliability of the engine is not Registering your vehicle
guaranteed in all cases. We may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealers
Any tampering with the engine management to carry out technical inspections on certain
system in order to increase the engine power vehicles to improve their quality or safety. We
output will lead to the loss of the New Vehicle can only inform you about vehicle checks if
Limited Warranty and other warranty entitle- we have your registration data.
ments. Your registration data is not stored if:
If you sell the vehicle, inform the purchaser Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an
about the changes to the engine power out- authorized Sprinter Dealer.
put of the vehicle. If you do not inform the Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an
buyer, this may constitute a punishable authorized Sprinter Dealer.
offense under national legislation.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with an
authorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform us
as soon as possible about any change of
Qualified specialist workshops
address or vehicle ownership.
An authorized Sprinter Dealer is a qualified
specialist workshop.
A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- Exhaust gas aftertreatment
essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- To function properly, exhaust gas aftertreat-
fications to correctly carry out the work ment must be operated with Diesel Exhaust
required on the vehicle. Fluid (DEF) reducing agent . The DEF range is
This is especially the case for work relevant to dependent on operating and driving condi-
safety. Observe the information in the Main- tions. Therefore, add to the DEF supply tank
tenance Booklet. regularly during vehicle operation or, at the
Z
26 Introduction
latest, after receiving the first warning mes- Attachments, bodies, equipment and
sage via the on-board computer. conversions
To conform to emission regulations, you must
operate the vehicle with DEF and refill the Information about body/equipment
supply regularly. The engine management mounting directives
recognizes attempts to operate the vehicle ! For safety reasons, have add-on equip-
without DEF, with thinned DEF or with ment manufactured and installed accord-
another reducing agent. After previous warning to the Sprinter body/equipment mount-
ing messages, the engine management then ing directives in force. These body/equip-
prevents a further engine start. ment mounting directives ensure that the
If the DEF level drops below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l), chassis and the body form one unit and that
the first warning message is issued and a maximum operating and road safety is ach-
warning tone sounds. After the message ieved.
appears for the first time, and under normal We recommend for safety reasons that:
driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply
Ryou carry out no other modifications to
will last for approximately 1000 miles
the vehicle.
(1600 km).
Ryou obtain the agreement of the distrib-
If a reserve mark of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) is
utor named on the inside of the front
reached, a second warning message is issued
cover for any deviations from the
and a warning tone sequence sounds. After
approved body/equipment mounting
the first message, the DEF supply will last for
directives.
approximately 1200 miles (1900 km). Subse-
quently, you will only be able to start the Approval from certified inspection agen-
engine a further 16 times. cies or official approvals cannot rule out
risks to your safety.
You should immediately add 2.0 US gal (7.6 l)
of DEF (Y page 147) or have the DEF supply Please observe the information concerning
reservoir filled at a qualified specialist work- Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts (Y page 27).
shop. Further information can be obtained at any
When the number of remaining engine starts authorized Sprinter Dealer.
is 0 and the engine is restarted, the engine
G WARNING
management prevents the vehicle from being
driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). The function of systems or components can
be affected by conversions or modifications
If the ; Check Engine indicator lamp lights
to the vehicle. They might not function prop-
up, the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty or
erly any more and/or jeopardize the opera-
an emission-related malfunction has occur-
tional safety of the vehicle. There is an
red (Y page 211). You will then only be able to
increased risk of an accident and injury.
drive a maximum 50 mi (80 km) before the
engine management restricts the number of Conversions or modifications should always
starts remaining. be carried out at qualified specialist work-
shop.
If the exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty,
have it checked and repaired at a qualified If you intend to make modifications to your
specialist workshop. vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
Further information on DEF can be found in contact the distributor named on the inside of
the "Refueling" (Y page 147) and "Service the front cover. There you will receive all the
products and capacities" (Y page 320) sec- necessary information and a charge may be
tions. levied.

Introduction 27
You alone accept the responsibility if body Information on the cargo compartment
manufacturers or dealers make modifications floor
that affect the final certification of the engine,
the vehicle or the equipment. This also ! The wooden or plastic cargo area floor fit-
ted at the factory is an integral component
applies to the identification and documenta-
of the vehicle structure. The vehicle body
tion of modifications to the affected vehicle
could be damaged if you have the load area
components.
floor removed. This then affects the secur-
You are responsible for certification and con- ing of loads and the maximum loading
firmation that: capacity of the lashing points is no longer
Rall the applicable standards and regulations guaranteed.
that are affected by the vehicle modifica- Therefore, do not have the load area floor
tion are met removed.
Rthe modified vehicle fulfills the vehicle
safety standards and emissions laws and
regulations Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Rthe modifications or installation of acces-
sories does not affect the safety of the ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
vehicle ces, as well as control units and sensors for
We are not responsible for the final certifica- these restraint systems, may be installed in
tion, product liability or warranty claims the following areas of your vehicle:
which result from the modifications. This Rdoors
applies to: Rdoor pillars
Rthe modified components, assemblies or Rdoor sills
systems Rseats
Rany resulting noncompliance with any of Rcockpit
the emissions laws and regulations or the Rinstrument cluster
motor vehicle safety standards
Rcenter console
Rany consequences arising from the
changes that make the vehicle less safe or Do not install accessories such as audio
even render it defective systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
We do not assume responsibility as the final- operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
stage manufacturer or for the consequential tems.
product liability.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Notes on the radiator
Even seemingly small changes to the vehicle, H Environmental note
such as attaching a radiator trim for winter We supply reconditioned assemblies and
driving, is not permitted. Do not cover up the parts which are of the same quality as new
radiator. Do not use thermal mats, insect pro- parts. The same New Vehicle Limited War-
tection covers or anything similar. ranty applies as for new parts.
Otherwise, the values of the diagnostic sys- The operating safety of the vehicle could be
tem may be affected. Some of these values jeopardized if you use parts, tires and wheels
are legally prescribed and must always be as well as accessories relevant to safety
correct. which have not been approved by Mercedes-
Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in
Z
28 Introduction
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys- Replacement parts and accessories are sub-
tem. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ject to the Replacement Part and Accessory
or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, Warranty of the dealer mentioned on the
wheels and accessories that have been spe- inside cover. You can obtain these from any
cifically approved for your vehicle. authorized Sprinter dealer.
We test genuine Sprinter parts, as well as
conversion parts and accessories that have
been specifically approved for the type of Maintenance
vehicle, for: The Maintenance Booklet and the Service and
Rreliability Warranty Information Booklet describe all
Rsafety necessary maintenance work that should be
Rsuitability
carried out at regular intervals.
When you take the vehicle to an authorized
Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-
Sprinter dealer, always be sure to bring the
Benz is unable to assess other parts. There-
Maintenance/Service/Warranty Information
fore, we accept no responsibility for the use of
Booklet. Your customer service advisor
such parts in Sprinter vehicles, even if they
enters each maintenance service into the
have been officially approved or independ-
Maintenance Booklet for you.
ently approved by a testing center.
In some countries, certain parts are only offi-
cially approved for installation or modification Registering your vehicle
if they comply with legal requirements. All
genuine Sprinter parts satisfy these require- We may ask our authorized Sprinter Dealers
ments. Make sure that all parts are suitable to carry out technical inspections on certain
for your vehicle. vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
Always specify the vehicle identification num- We can only inform you about vehicle checks
ber (VIN) and engine number when ordering if we have your registration data.
genuine Sprinter parts (Y page 316). Your registration data is not stored if:
Ryou did not purchase your vehicle at an
authorized Sprinter Dealer.
Service and vehicle operation
Ryour vehicle has never been inspected at an
Maintenance and literature authorized Sprinter Dealer.
The Service and Warranty Information Book- It is advisable to register your vehicle with an
let contains detailed information on the types authorized Sprinter Dealer. Please inform us
of warranty that your Sprinter is covered by, as soon as possible about any change of
including: address or vehicle ownership.
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
RDiesel Engine Limited Warranty Problems with your vehicle
RAnti-Perforation Warranty
RLimited Warranty for Restraint Systems If you should experience a problem with your
(only vehicles that have been sold and reg- vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
istered in the state of Kansas) affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
RLegally required Emission Performance
tact an authorized Sprinter Dealer immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and rec-
Warranty
tified.

Introduction 29
If the problem cannot be rectified to your sat- The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
isfaction there: movements.
Rplease discuss the problem with a manage- When you use one of the available services,
ment representative from the authorized technical information may be read from the
Sprinter Dealer. event data memory and malfunction data
Rif necessary, contact the distributor named memory.
on the inside of the front cover. Services include, for example:
Rrepair services
Rservice processes
Data stored in the vehicle
Rwarranty claims
Rquality assurance
A wide range of electronic components in
your vehicle contain data memories. The information is read out by employees of
These data memories temporarily or perma- the service network (including manufactur-
nently store technical information about: ers) using special diagnostic testers. Further
information is available there if required.
Rthe vehicle's operating status
After a malfunction has been rectified, the
Revents
information is deleted from the malfunction
Rmalfunctions memory or is continually overwritten.
In general, this technical information docu- When operating the vehicle, situations are
ments the state of a component, a module, a conceivable in which this technical data, in
system or the surroundings. connection with other information - if neces-
This includes, for example: sary, under consultation with an authorized
Roperating conditions of system compo- expert - could be traced to a person.
nents, e.g. fluid levels. Examples include:
Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of Raccident reports
its individual components, e.g. number of Rdamage to the vehicle
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in Rwitness statements
movement, lateral acceleration, accelera-
Further additional functions which are con-
tor pedal position.
tractually agreed with the customer likewise
Rmalfunctions and defects in important sys-
allow specific vehicle data to be obtained
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes. from the vehicle. Such additional functions
Rthe vehicle's reactions and operating sta- include vehicle locating in an emergency, for
tuses in special driving situations. e.g. air example.
bag deployment, intervention of stability
control systems.
Rambient conditions, e.g. outside tempera-
ture.
This data is exclusively technical in nature
and can be used to:
Rassistin the detection and rectification of
malfunctions and defects
Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
Roptimize vehicle functions
Z
30

31
Cockpit ................................................. 32
Instrument cluster .............................. 34
Steering wheel buttons ...................... 37
At a glance
Center console .................................... 37
Overhead control panel ...................... 38
Door control panel .............................. 39
Further control panels ........................ 39

32 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Door control panel 39 E • Stowage compartment
with interior light 97
; Light switch 92
• Overhead control panel 38
= Combination switch
F Rear-view mirror 89
• turn signals 94
• high-beam headlamps 94 G PARKTRONIC warning dis-
• windshield wipers 107 play 167
• rear window wiper 108 H Opens/closes the right-
hand side window 78
? Cruise control lever 159
I Stowage compartment
A Steering wheel without/
(jack and vehicle tool kit) 274
with buttons 37
J Glove box 230
B Instrument cluster 34
K Center console 37
C Stowage compartment
• 3.5 mm audio jack 237 L Selector lever (automatic
• USB port 238 transmission) 142
D Timer for the auxiliary M Ignition lock 138

warm-air heater (auxiliary N Further control panels 39
heating) 127
O Steering wheel buttons 37
P Applies/releases the park-
ing brake 155

Cockpit 33
Function Page
Q Horn
At a glance
R Opens the hood 248
S Steering wheel buttons 37

34 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer 181 B Reset button 9 34
; Tachometer 181 C Menu button 4
= f, g Brightens/dims the • changes standard display 182
instrument cluster lighting 181 • selects menus 183
? Fuel gage with fuel filler flap D Service button Ë

location indicator 181 Checks the engine oil level 250
A Display
Vehicles without steering
wheel buttons 182
Vehicles with steering
wheel buttons 184

Instrument cluster 35
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
Instrument cluster on vehicles without steering wheel buttons
Instrument cluster in vehicles with steering-wheel buttons

: Speedometer with warn- ; Check Engine indicator
ing and indicator lamps lamp 224
d ESP® warning lamp 218 % Preglow 139
ASR warning lamp 218 Preglow system malfunc-
tion 225
% Coolant level too low 223
; Indicator and warning
? Coolant temperature too lamps
high 223
G Left-hand turn signal 94
6 Restraint systems malfunc-
tion 42 ! ABS malfunction 218
b Brake fluid level too low 219 h Tire pressure loss or the tire
EBD malfunctioning 218 pressure monitor is mal-
functioning (USA only) 226
Trailer brake force booster
malfunction 219 Tire pressure loss (Canada
only) 292
4 Engine oil level warning 222


¦ Fluid level too low in wind- È Dirt accumulation in air fil-
At a glance
shield washer/headlamp ter 225

cleaning system 226
6 Reserve fuel 181
å DEF supply low or contami- Fuel filler cap open 224
nated/thinned 182
Exhaust gas aftertreatment : Water in the fuel 226
malfunction 221 # Battery charging malfunc-
Ä Warning and indicator tion 222
lamps, distance warning b Bulb defective 227
system 162
= Tachometer with warn-
Ã Warning and indicator ing and indicator lamps
lamps, Lane Keeping Assist 166
c Parking brake applied 155
1 Door or hood open 227
Electrically operated step L Low-beam headlamps on 92
malfunction 227 K Working speed governor
# Brake pads/linings worn 222 (ADR) on 172
K High-beam headlamps on K High-beam headlamps on

(vehicle with steering wheel (vehicle without steering
buttons) 94 wheel buttons) 94
J Right-hand turn signal 94 | Reserve fuel 224

Fuel filler cap open 224
: ASR malfunction 58
BAS malfunction 218 h ESP® malfunction 218
h ESP® malfunction 218 7 Fasten seat belts 227
i Corresponding messages may also be

shown in the display (Y page 197).

Center console 37
Steering wheel buttons Center console
At a glance
Function Page
: Display 184
On-board computer oper-
ation
Function Page
; Selects a submenu or
adjusts the volume 184 : Stowage compartment 231
W Up/increases the vol- ; Audio 10 or Audio 15 (see
ume the separate operating
X Down/reduces the instructions)
volume
Using the telephone 196 = Air-conditioning control
panel 112
6 Accepts a call/starts
dialing Paper holder1 233
~ Ends a call/rejects an ? Center console control
incoming call panel
= Scrolls from one menu to c Switches the left/right-
another 184 hand seat heating on/off 87
V Forwards
z Switches the windshield
U Back heating on/off 119
Scrolls within a menu 184
| Switches the rear window
9 Forwards
defroster on/off 119
: Back
f Activates/deactivates
PARKTRONIC 169
1 Only on vehicles without rear-compartment climate control.

38 Overhead control panel
Function Page Overhead control panel
£ Switches the hazard warn-

At a glance
ing lamps on/off 95

à Activates/deactivates ASR 58
Ã Central locking, interior/
Ä rear compartment 71
æ Activates/deactivates the
distance warning function 162
j Activates/deactivates
Lane Keeping Assist 166
Function Page
Activates/deacti- : Microphone for the mobile
vates Blind Spot Assist 163 phone 236
A • Stowage compartment or ; Switches the reading lamp
• CD changer; see the sep- on/off, right 97
arate operating instruc-
tions, or = Switches the automatic
interior lighting on/off 97
B Cup holder with: 234
? • Eyeglasses compartment
• ashtray 235
or 231
• cigarette lighter 235
• Anti-Theft Alarm system
C 12 V socket 236 (ATA) 61
A Switches the interior light-
ing on/off 97
B Switches the reading lamp
on/off, left 97

Further control panels 39
Door control panel Further control panels

Control panel between the light
At a glance
switch and the steering wheel
Function Page
: Adjusts the exterior mirrors 89
Function Page
; Selects an exterior mirror 89
y Switches the auxiliary heat-
= Opens/closes the left-hand
ing on/off 123
side window 78
± Switches the heater boos-
? Opens/closes the right-
ter function on/off 130
hand side window 78
E Sets the working speed
F 172
E Switches the working
speed governor (ADR)
on/off 172
´ Ventilates the cargo com-
· partment 133

40 Further control panels
Control panel between the steering

wheel and the ignition lock
At a glance
Function Page
l Switches the central rear
k compartment lighting
on/off 97

41
Useful information .............................. 42

Occupant safety .................................. 42
Children in the vehicle ........................ 51
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56
Safety
Driving safety systems ....................... 57
Emergency exit .................................... 60
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 61

42 Occupant safety
Useful information cle occupants in the event of an accident. For

example, if, in the event of an accident, the
This Operator's Manual describes all models protection offered by the seat belt is suffi-
as well as standard and optional equipment of cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an
your vehicle that were available at the time of accident occurs, only the air bags that
going to print. Country-specific variations are increase protection in that particular accident
Safety
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be situation are deployed. However, seat belts
equipped with all of the described functions. and air bags generally do not protect against
This also applies to systems and functions objects penetrating the vehicle from the out-
relevant to safety. side.
Read the information on qualified specialist Information on restraint system operation
workshops (Y page 25). can be found under "Deployment of Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 49).
Occupant safety For more information about children traveling
with you in the vehicle and on child restraint
Restraint system introduction systems, see "Children in the vehicle"
The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi- (Y page 51).
cle occupants coming into contact with parts
of the vehicle's interior in the event of an
accident. The restraint system can also Important safety notes
reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants
are subjected during an accident. G WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system, may
The restraint system comprises:
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
RSeat belt system restraint system may then not perform its
RAir bags intended protective function and may fail in an
RChild restraint system accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
RChild seat securing systems This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only Never modify parts of the restraint system.
deploy their protective function if, at all times, Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
all vehicle occupants: components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an airbag system to
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
(Y page 45)
tact an authorized Sprinter dealership for
Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint
details. USA only: contact our Customer
properly (Y page 82). Assistance Center at 1‑877‑762‑8267 for
As the driver, you also have to make sure that details.
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the cor-
rect driver's seat position (Y page 82). Restraint system warning lamp
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
The restraint systems functions are checked
inflate properly if deployed (Y page 47).
after the ignition is switched on and at regular
An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat intervals when the engine is running. This
belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehi-

Occupant safety 43
allows malfunctions to be detected in good The seat belt system comprises:

time. RSeat belts
When the ignition is switched on, the 6 REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat
restraint system warning lamp in the instru- belt force limiters for the driver's and front-
ment cluster lights up. It goes out no later passenger seat belts
than a few seconds after the vehicle is star-
Safety
On vehicles with two seats on the front-
ted. The components of the restraint system
passenger side, both seat belts on the
are on standby.
front-passenger side have an Emergency
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 Tensioning Device. Only the seat belt on the
restraint system warning lamp: outer front-passenger seat has a seat belt
Rdoes not light up after the ignition is force limiter.
switched on. The seat belt system only includes Emer-
Rdoes not switch off after a few seconds. gency Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
Rgoes out, but then lights up again, e.g. when limiters for the driver and front passenger if
the engine is running. the vehicle is equipped with a driver's air bag.
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
G WARNING quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be
system components may be triggered unin- extracted any further.
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens
the event of an accident with a high rate of
the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
close against the body. However it does not
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
of the backrest.
even fatal injury.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
Have the restraint system checked and
correct an incorrect seat position or the rout-
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
soon as possible.
When triggered, seat belt force limiters help
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicle occupant.
Seat belts
The seat belt force limiters are synchronized
Introduction with the front air bags, which absorb part of
the deceleration force. This can reduce the
Seat belts are the most effective means of
force exerted on the vehicle occupants during
restricting the movement of vehicle occu-
an accident.
pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-
cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
cle occupants coming into contact with parts do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle
of the vehicle interior or being ejected from of the front-passenger seat. This may oth-
the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-
to keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi- gency Tensioning Device in the event of an
tion in relation to the air bag. accident, which will then need to be
replaced.
Vehicles with two seats on the front-
passenger side: the Emergency Tensioning
Device of the inner front-passenger seat is
Z
44 Occupant safety
triggered independently of the lock status of belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
the seat belt. as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for
Important safety notes example, in an accident, during braking or an
abrupt change of direction. This poses an
The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Safety
tems is required by law in:

For this reason, always secure persons under
Rall 50 states 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint
Rthe U.S. territories systems.
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten Ralways secure the child in a child restraint
their seat belts before starting the journey. system suitable for this vehicle. The child
restraint system must be appropriate to the
G WARNING age, weight and size of the child
If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- Ralways observe the instructions and safety
not protect as intended. Furthermore, an notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-
incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addition of this Operator's Manual
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- (Y page 51) in addition to the child
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or tion instructions
even fatal injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are G WARNING
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat The seat belts may not perform their intended
belt. protective function if:
Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely
G WARNING dirty, bleach or dyed
The seat belt does not offer the intended level Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
of protection if you have not moved the back- extremely dirty
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
ing or in the event of an accident, you could anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain fied
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
injury.
fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
Adjust the seat properly before beginning e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
is in an almost vertical position and that the fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
across the center of your shoulder.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
G WARNING
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat

Occupant safety 45
immediately at a qualified specialist work- If you have such items located on or in your
shop. clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,
store these in a suitable place.
Only use seat belts that have been approved Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a
for your vehicle by the sales organization time.
named on the inside cover. Any such modifi-
Safety
Infants and children must never travel sit-
cations could invalidate the vehicle's general ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the
operating permit. event of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat
Proper use of the seat belts belt.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if
(Y page 44). the seat belt is also being used by one of the
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the vehicle's occupants.
seat belt correctly before beginning the jour- Seat belts are only intended to secure and
ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe
pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,
rectly while the vehicle is in motion. luggage or loads (Y page 240).
When fastening the seat belt, always make
sure that: Fastening and adjusting seat belts
Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the Please take note of the safety notes on seat
belt buckle belonging to that seat. belts (Y page 44) and the notes on their cor-
Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. rect use (Y page 45).
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
Rthe seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be
distributed over the area of the belt.
Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be
routed under your arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate
height.
Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down
as possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo- Illustration
men. This applies particularly to pregnant
women. If necessary, push the lap belt
down to your hip joint and pull it tight using
the shoulder section of the belt.
Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects.
Z
46 Occupant safety
X Adjust the seat (Y page 82). protective function and must be replaced.
The seat backrest must be in an almost Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
upright position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sash
guide = and engage belt tongue ; into
belt buckle :.
Safety
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
X Press release button :, hold belt

tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards
The shoulder section of the belt must always belt outlet =.
run over the center of the shoulder. Adjust the
belt outlet if necessary. Belt warning for drivers and co-drivers
X To raise: slide belt guide = upwards. The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
The belt outlet engages in various posi- ment cluster is a reminder for all occupants to
tions. fasten their seat belts. It may light up contin-
X To lower: press belt guide release ? and uously or flash. A warning tone may also
slide belt guide = downwards. sound.
X Let go of belt guide release ? in the Regardless of whether the driver has already
desired position and make sure that the fastened their seat belt, the 7 seat belt
belt guide engages. warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds each
time the ignition is switched on. After the
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv- engine is started, it goes out as soon as the
er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat driver's seat belt had been fastened.
belt retractor to secure child restraint sys-
tems properly. Further information can be If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
found under "Special seat belt retractor" the engine is started, an additional warning
(Y page 52). tone will sound. This warning tone switches
off after a maximum of 6 seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
Releasing seat belts
If a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled exceeded and the driver has still not fastened
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue their seat belt, a warning tone sounds again.
will be trapped in the door or in the seat The warning tone sounds for 60 seconds or
mechanism. This could damage the door, until the driver has fastened their seat belt.
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their

Occupant safety 47
If the driver unfastens their seat belt during Always make sure that there are no objects
the journey, the belt warning is automatically between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
activated again. pants.
i For more information on the 7 seat RAdjust the seats properly before beginning
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-
your journey. Always make sure that the
Safety
cator lamps in the instrument cluster"
seat is in an almost upright position. The
(Y page 227).
center of the head restraint must support
the head at about eye level.
RMove the driver's and front-passenger
Air bags
seats as far back as possible. The driver's
Introduction seat position must allow the vehicle to be
driven safely.
The installation point of an air bag can be rec-
ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-
ognized by the SRS/AIR BAG or AIR BAG sym-
bol. side. This allows the air bag to be fully
deployed.
An air bag complements the correctly fas-
RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-
tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat
belt. The air bag provides additional protec- ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against
tion in applicable accident situations. the door or side window. You may other-
wise be in the deployment area of the air
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
bags.
The different air bag systems function inde-
RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in
pendently from one another (Y page 49).
front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the
However, no system available today can com-
dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
erwise be in the deployment area of the air
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury bag.
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
RFor this reason, always secure persons less
which the air bag must be deployed.
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
Important safety notes
cannot be worn correctly.
G WARNING If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
If you do not sit in the correct seat position, observe the following notes:
the air bag cannot protect as intended and RAlways secure children under 12 years of
could even cause additional injury when age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in
deployed. This poses an increased risk of suitable child restraint systems.
injury or even fatal injury. RChild restraint systems should be installed
To avoid hazardous situations, always make on the rear seats.
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: RAlways secure a child in a rearward-facing
Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, child restraint system on a suitable rear
including pregnant women seat. The front-passenger front air bag can-
Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- not be deactivated.
est possible distance to the air bags RAlways observe the instructions and safety
Rfollow the following instructions notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 51) and on the "Child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat"
(Y page 55) in addition to the child
Z
48 Occupant safety
restraint system manufacturer's installa- Front air bags

tion instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-
vent an air bag from functioning correctly.
Before starting your journey and to avoid risks
resulting from the speed of the air bag as it
Safety
deploys, make sure that:

Rthere are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
Rthere are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
the grab handles or coat hooks. steering wheel. Front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are
box and the center console.
attached to the vehicle within the deploy-
ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
windows. tional head and thorax protection for the
occupants in the front seats.
Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects
are in the pockets of your clothing. Store
Thorax bags
such objects in a suitable place.
G WARNING G WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer prevent deployment of the air bags integrated
function correctly. There is an increased risk into the seats. The air bags may then fail to
of injury. protect the vehicle occupants as intended.
There is an increased risk of injury, possibly
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
even fatal.
to it.
Only use seat cushions that are approved for
G WARNING your vehicle by the distributor named on the
inside cover page.
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- Thorax bags : deploy next to the outer seat
shop. cushions.

Occupant safety 49
Thorax bags are only available in combination Deployment of Emergency Tensioning

with individual seats on the driver's and co- Devices and air bags
driver's side.
When deployed, thorax bag : offers addi- Important safety notes
tional thorax protection. However, it does not G WARNING
protect the:
Safety
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
Rhead been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Rneck Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
Rarms deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
The thorax bag is deployed on the side of the cialist workshop as soon as possible.
impact.
G WARNING
Window curtain air bags A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your

passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
Window curtain air bags : are integrated function for the vehicle occupants in the
into the side of the roof frame above the front event of a crash.
doors.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag G WARNING
enhances the level of protection for the head. Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
However, it does not protect the chest or that have been deployed are no longer opera-
arms. tional and are unable to perform their inten-
In the event of a side impact, the window cur- ded protective function. This poses an
tain air bag is deployed on the side on which increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
the impact occurs. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
If the system determines that they can offer sioning Devices which have been triggered
additional protection to that provided by the immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be workshop.
deployed in other accident situations
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-
(Y page 49).
gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. The 6 restraint system warn-
ing lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is released gener-
ally does not constitute a health hazard, but it
Z
50 Occupant safety
may cause short-term breathing difficulties in If the restraint system control unit detects a
people with asthma or other respiratory prob- more severe accident, further components of
lems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the restraint system are activated independ-
the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it ently of each other in certain frontal collision
is safe to do so. situations:
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
Safety
RFront air bags

ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate- RWindow curtain air bag on the side of
rial, which may require special handling and impact
regard for the environment. National guide-
The activation threshold of the Emergency
lines must be observed during disposal. In
Tensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-
California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-
index.cfm.
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-
emptive in nature. Deployment should take
Method of operation place in good time at the start of the collision.
During the first stage of a collision, the The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
restraint system control unit evaluates impor- tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- tially determined by:
ation or acceleration, such as: Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-
Rduration sion
Rdirection Rthe collision angle
Rintensity Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-
Based on the evaluation of this data, the cle
restraint system control unit triggers the Rthe characteristics of the object with which
Emergency Tensioning Devices during a fron- the vehicle has collided
tal or rear collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be after a collision has occurred do not play a
triggered, if: decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Rthe ignition is switched on. Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
Rthe components of the restraint system are
operational; see "Restraint system warning The vehicle can be deformed considerably,
lamp" (Y page 42) without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
deformed are affected and the rate of decel-
the respective front-passenger seat
eration is not high. Conversely, air bags may
Vehicles with two seats on the front- be deployed even though the vehicle suffers
passenger side: the Emergency Tensioning only minor deformation. This is the case if, for
Device on the inner front-passenger seat is example, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-
triggered independently of the lock status of gitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient
the seat belt. deceleration occurs as a result.

Children in the vehicle 51
If the restraint system control unit detects a the child restraint system manufacturer's
side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, installation instructions
the relevant restraint system components are
activated independently of one another G WARNING
depending on the apparent type of accident. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
If the system determines a need for additional cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Safety
protection for the vehicle occupants, the Rrelease the parking brake.
Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
RThorax bag on the side of impact, inde- parking position P.
pendently of the Emergency Tensioning Rstart the engine.
Device and the use of the seat belt In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
impact, independently of the use of the an accident and injury.
seat belt and independently of whether the When leaving the vehicle, always take the
front-passenger seat is occupied SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
dent. The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. G WARNING
How the air bag system works is deter- If persons, particularly children are subjected
mined by the severity of the accident detec- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
acceleration and the apparent type of acci- fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
dent: vehicle.
Rfrontal collision
G WARNING
Rside impact
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
Children in the vehicle
particularly on the metal parts of the child
Important safety notes restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
Accident statistics show that children
you, always ensure that the child restraint
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil-
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
this reason, we strongly advise that you install
restraint system has been exposed to direct
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Chil-
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
dren are generally better protected there.
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft the vehicle.
(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:
Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
system suitable for this vehicle. The child their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
restraint system must be appropriate to the ting properly. Particular attention must be
age, weight and size of the child paid to children.
Rbe sure to observe the instructions and Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
safety notes in this section in addition to (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 45).
Z
52 Children in the vehicle
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-

proper seat belt positioning for children over ing the special seat belt retractor:
41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height X Make sure you observe the child restraint
where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened system manufacturer's installation instruc-
properly without a booster seat. tions.
Safety
X Press the belt buckle release button, hold
Special seat belt retractor the belt tongue and guide it back towards
the belt outlet.
G WARNING The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-
If the seat belt is released while driving, the ted.
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a Child restraint system
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot The use of seat belts and child restraint sys-
be immediately refastened. There is an tems is required by law in:
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Rall 50 states
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
Rthe U.S. territories
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the Rthe District of Columbia
child restraint system properly. Rall Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driv-
correct child restraint system from any
er's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat
belt retractor. When activated, the special
seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt G WARNING
cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. If the child restraint system is installed incor-
Installing a child restraint system: rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
X Make sure you observe the child restraint
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
sudden changes of direction. There is an
tions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
outlet.
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
Activating the special seat belt retractor: that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cush-
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
reel retract it again.
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
While the seat belt is retracting, you should
child restraint systems with the original cover
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat
designed for them. Only replace damaged
belt retractor is enabled.
covers with genuine covers.
X Push the child restraint system down so
that the seat belt is tight and does not G WARNING
loosen.
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a

sudden change in direction. The child Confirmation that the child restraint system
restraint system could be thrown about, strik- corresponds to the standards can be found
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased on an instruction label on the child restraint
risk of injury, possibly even fatal. system. This confirmation can also be found
Always install child restraint systems prop- in the installation instructions that are inclu-
ded with the child restraint system.
Safety
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions. rior and on the child restraint system.
You will find further information on stowing

objects, luggage or loads under "Loading LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
guidelines" (Y page 240). ing system
G WARNING G WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
tems which have been damaged or subjected do not offer sufficient protective effect for
to a load in an accident can no longer protect children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
as intended. The child cannot then be (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy integrated in the child restraint system. In the
braking or sudden changes of direction. There event of an accident, a child might not be
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even restrained correctly. This poses an increased
fatal. risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Replace child restraint systems which have If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
been damaged or subjected to a load in an only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- systems with which the child is also secured
ing systems on the child restraint system with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
checked at a qualified specialist workshop, child restraint system with the Top Tether
before you install a child restraint system belt, if available.
again.
Always comply with the manufacturer's
The securing systems of child restraint sys- installation and operating instructions for the
tems are: child restraint system used.
Rthe seat belt system Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-
FIX) securing rings
i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child
on the front-passenger seat, be sure to
! When installing the child restraint system,
make sure that the seat belt for the middle
observe the information on "Child restraint
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt
systems on the front-passenger seat"
could otherwise be damaged.
(Y page 55).
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-
ards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Z
54 Children in the vehicle

G WARNING
If the Top Tether belt has been incorrectly
secured, e.g. to an eyelet in the cargo com-
partment, the child restraint system is not
Safety
correctly kept in place. It therefore cannot

perform its intended protective function in the
event of an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Only secure the Top Tether hook to the Top
: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Tether anchorage intended for this purpose.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO- Top Tether anchorages
FIX) securing rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings : for a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system are installed between the
seat cushion and the seat backrest:
Ron the outer left and right seat on rear
bench seats with 3 seats
Ron the outer left seat on rear bench seats
with 2 seats
Example: rear bench seat with 3 seats
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the Top Tether anchorages ; are on the bench
vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat legs on the rear side of the respective
seat according to the manufacturer's instruc- rear bench seat.
tions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount
and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of
injury even further. If the child restraint sys-
tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this X Move head restraint : upwards.
should always be used. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Always
comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions
when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt ? under head restraint system must lie as flat as possible
restraint : between the two head restraint against the backrest of the front-passenger
bars. seat. The child restraint system must not be
X Hook Top Tether hook = into Top Tether subjected to a load by the head restraint.
anchorage ;. Adjust the head restraint position accord-
ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt
Safety
Make sure that:
strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt
RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child
Tether anchorage ; as shown. restraint system. The shoulder belt strap
RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. must be routed forwards and downwards
X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary,
with the child restraint system manufactur- adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-
er's installation instructions when doing so. passenger seat accordingly.
X If necessary, move the head restraint back Always observe the child restraint system
down again slightly (Y page 86). Make manufacturer's installation and operating
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- instructions.
rect routing of Top Tether belt ?.
Child-proof locks
Child restraint system on the co-driv- Important safety notes
er's seat
G WARNING
General notes
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
Accident statistics show that children could:
secured in the rear seats are safer than chil- Ropen doors, thus endangering other people
dren secured in the front-passenger seat. For or road users
this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises
Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
that you install the child restraint system on a
rear seat. traffic
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
Rearward-facing child restraint system trapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.
The front-passenger front air bag cannot be
Always activate the child-proof locks and
deactivated. Always install a rearward-facing
override feature if children are traveling in the
child restraint system on a suitable rear seat.
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
Always observe the child restraint system
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
manufacturer's installation and operating
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
instructions.
Child-proof lock/override feature for:
Forward-facing child restraint system
RSlidingdoor (Y page 56)
If it is absolutely necessary to install a RRear door (Y page 56)
forward-facing child restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child
Z
56 Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING Child-proof locks for the sliding door

If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- and rear door
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the
Safety
parking position P.
Rstart the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Sliding door
G WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
Rear door
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
: Child safety bolt
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury. 2 Door secured – then make sure that the
child-proof locks are working properly.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint 3 Door released
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- The child-proof lock on the doors enable you
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child to secure each door individually.
restraint system has been exposed to direct A door with an activated child-proof lock can-
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the not be opened from the inside. If the vehicle is
child in it. Never leave children unattended in unlocked, the door can be opened from the
the vehicle. outside.
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.

Driving safety systems 57
As a result, they could: and the road can. Pay particular attention to
the information regarding tires, recommen-
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
ded minimum tire tread depth etc. under
trapped, for example
"Wheels and tires" (Y page 284).
Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
endangering other road users
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow
Safety
Unsecured animals could also be flung around chains. This is the only way to get the full
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- benefit from the driving safety systems
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- described.
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- Important safety notes
port box. Observe the important safety guidelines for
the driving safety system (Y page 57).
Driving safety systems G WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
Overview braking. The steerability and braking charac-
In this section, you will find information about teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
the following driving safety systems: ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ding and accidents.
RASR (Acceleration Skid Control)
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
RBAS (Brake Assist System) diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
REBD (Electronic Brake Force Distribution)
If ABS is malfunctioning, other systems will
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) also fail, including driving safety systems.
Observe the information relating to the !
warning lamp (Y page 218).
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
are inattentive, the driving safety systems can This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
neither reduce the risk of accident nor over- cle when braking.
ride the laws of physics. Driving safety sys- ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
tems are merely aids designed to assist driv- (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
ing. You are responsible for the distance to tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking when you only brake gently.
in good time and for staying in your lane. The yellow ! warning lamp in the instru-
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- ment cluster lights up when the ignition is
ing road and weather conditions and maintain switched on. The lamp goes out when the
a sufficient, safe distance from other road engine starts running.
users. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described can only
attain their maximum effectiveness when
there is optimum contact between the tires
Z
58 Driving safety systems
Braking If ASR intervenes, the d warning lamp in

the instrument cluster flashes.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsating in the brake pedal.
Activating/deactivating ASR
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and func- G WARNING
Safety
tions as a reminder to take extra care while If deactivated, ASR will not attempt to stabi-
driving. lize the vehicle during pulling away and accel-
X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the eration. There is an increased risk of skidding
brake pedal with force until the braking sit- and of an accident.
uation is over. Only deactivate ASR in the situations descri-
X To make a full brake application: bed in the following.
depress the brake pedal with full force.
! If you deactivate ASR, ESP® will still inter-
vene to stabilize the vehicle. Frequent brak-
ASR (acceleration skid control) ing automatically triggered by ESP® can
damage the brake system.
General notes For this reason, deactivate ASR only briefly
and when absolutely necessary.
Observe the important safety guidelines for
ASR can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor suspend the laws of physics if the driver
does not pay attention when pulling away or
accelerating. ASR is only an aid. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road
and weather conditions.
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if
ASR is malfunctioning, the : indicator
lamp lights up while the engine is running and When ESP® is intervening and the d warn-
the engine power may be reduced ing lamp in the instrument cluster is flashing,
(Y page 218). leave ASR on. In this case, only depress the
ASR significantly improves traction, i.e. the accelerator pedal as far as required when
transmission of power from the tires to the pulling away.
road surface, and thus increases the vehicle's
X Press the à button.
driving stability. If the driving wheels start to
If ASR is deactivated, the d warning
spin, ASR brakes individual drive wheels and
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
limits the engine torque. ASR thus signifi-
cantly assists you when pulling away and ASR is automatically activated when the
accelerating, especially on wet or slippery engine is started.
roads. It may be best to deactivate ASR briefly in the
If traction on the road surface is not sufficient, following situations:
even ASR will not allow you to pull away with- Rwhen using snow chains
out difficulty. The type of tires and total Rin deep snow
weight of the vehicle as well as the gradient of
Ron sand or gravel
the road also play a crucial role.

Driving safety systems 59
If you deactivate ASR: You should therefore adapt your driving style
Rengine torque is not limited and the drive to the different handling characteristics. Have
wheels are able to spin. The spinning the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
wheels will then achieve a cutting effect for cialist workshop.
better traction.
EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-
Safety
Rtraction control remains active through
sure to the rear wheels. This enables EBD to
brake intervention. If a drive wheel attains
improve handling during braking.
its tire traction limit because one side of the
road is slippery, for example, that wheel is Observe the information on warning and indi-
braked. The traction is then increased in cator lamps (Y page 218).
this situation.
Ractive brake intervention by ESP® to
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
increase driving stability remains active.
The d warning lamp in the instrument Important safety notes
cluster flashes when ESP® is intervening.
Observe the important safety guidelines for
BAS (Brake Assist System) G WARNING
G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning it will not provide
any vehicle stabilization. There is an increased
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
risk of skidding or of an accident.
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident. Exercise caution when continuing to drive.
In an emergency braking situation, depress Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents workshop.
the wheels from locking.
! Do not run the vehicle on a roller dyna-
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons: if mometer (e.g. for performance tests). If
the BAS driving safety system is malfunction- you must operate the vehicle on a roller
ing, the : warning lamp lights up while the dynamometer, please consult a qualified
engine is running (Y page 218). specialist workshop in advance. You could
otherwise damage the drive train or the
BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
brake system.
tions. If you depress the brake quickly, BAS
automatically increases the brake pressure, If ESP® is malfunctioning, the h warning
thereby reducing the stopping distance. lamp lights up while the engine is running and
The brakes will function as usual once you the engine power may be reduced
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. (Y page 218).
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion) Crosswind Assist
G WARNING Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can deactivated or disabled because of a mal-
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the function.
risk of skidding and an accident.
Z
60 Emergency exit
Crosswind Assist does not react: Pay attention to traffic conditions.

Rin the event of severe jolts and vibrations,
e.g. as a result of uneven surfaces or pot- G WARNING
holes If the emergency exit window is unlocked
Rif the vehicle loses traction, e.g. on snow or while driving, it could open and slam shut and
Safety
ice or when aquaplaning consequently fall down. There is a risk of an

Rto large and sudden steering movements accident and injury.
by the driver Before starting off, make sure that the emer-
Crosswind Assist is operational again as soon gency exit window is locked and the locking
as the driving conditions return to normal. pins are undamaged.
Crosswind Assist detects strong crosswind ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance
gusts that can impair the road holding of your when opening the emergency exit window.
vehicle when driving straight ahead. Cross- Hold the open window in position. You
wind Assist intervenes depending on the could otherwise damage the emergency
direction and strength of the crosswind. exit window.
A stabilizing brake application helps you to
keep the vehicle on track.
Information appears in the instrument cluster
In the event that Crosswind Assist intervenes
noticeably.
On vehicles without steering wheel but-
tons: the d indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster flashes.
On vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
the d indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster flashes and the message Crosswind
Assist Active appears in the multifunction The emergency exit window is intended for
display. use in an emergency only and must not be
Crosswind Assist is active above a vehicle opened unless the vehicle is stationary. The
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when the vehicle emergency exit window is the first window
is driving straight ahead or cornering gently. behind the driver's seat on the driver's side. It
is marked by the "Emergency Exit" label.
X To open: position both handles : verti-
Emergency exit cally. This will break locking pins ;.
The window is unlocked.
Emergency exit window
X Swing the window outward by the handles
G WARNING and hold it in this position. Make sure there
The emergency exit window cannot be locked is sufficient clearance when doing so.
in place. You risk injury if you exit the vehicle X To close: close the window.
through the emergency exit window.
RMake sure that nobody becomes trapped,
both when closing and when opening the
emergency exit window.
RThe opened emergency exit window must
be held in place by another person.

Theft deterrent locking system 61
X Position both handles : horizontally. Always take the key with you and lock the
Make sure that the locks = are inside in vehicle when leaving the vehicle. If you leave
front of the window frame. the key in the vehicle, anyone can start the
The window is locked. engine.
X Replace locking pins ; at the latest before
i The immobilizer is always deactivated
starting on a new journey.
Safety
when you start the engine.
You can obtain information on this at any
In the event that the engine cannot be star-
ted when the starter battery is fully
In an emergency, or after an accident, the charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
vehicle occupants can exit the vehicle Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer or
through the emergency exit window. call 1-877-762-8267 (in USA) or
Observe the following notes to make sure that 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
the emergency exit window can be used
safely in the event of an emergency:
RBefore beginning a journey, inform the vehi-
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
cle occupants of the emergency exit win- X To arm: close all doors.
dow and explain how to use it. Make sure to X Lock the vehicle with the key.
explicitly point out the risks described here. The indicator lamp in the central locking
ROnly vehicle occupants who know how to button (Y page 71) flashes.
use the emergency exit window are permit- X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
ted to sit next to it. key.
RAccess to the emergency exit window must The indicator lamp in the central locking
remain unobstructed. Do not place any button (Y page 71) goes out.
large or heavy objects on or in front of the i Cargo Van and Passenger Van only:
seats next to the emergency exit window.
Unless you open a door within 40 seconds
RThe window handles must not be used as
after unlocking the vehicle:
hooks, e.g. to hang up light objects, bags or
Rthe vehicle will be locked again
items of clothing.
RWhen exiting the vehicle through the emer- Rthe anti-theft alarm system will be armed
gency exit window, pay attention to the again

vehicle height and the local conditions. Par- If the alarm system is armed, a visual and
ticularly children and smaller adults may audible alarm is triggered by the following:
require assistance when exiting the vehi- RUnlocking the vehicle from inside
cle.
ROpening a door
ROpening the hood
Theft deterrent locking system i The alarm is not switched off, even if you
Immobilizer immediately close the open door that has
triggered it, for example.
X To activate: remove the key from the igni-
X To stop the alarm: press the % button
tion lock.
on the remote control.
X To deactivate: turn the key to position 2 in
or
the ignition lock.
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from The alarm stops.
being started without the correct key.
Z
62 Theft deterrent locking system
Tow-away alarm Interior motion sensor

Operation Operation
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the If the armed interior motion sensor detects
inclination of the vehicle changes when the motion in the vehicle interior, a visual and
Safety
tow-away alarm is armed. This can be the acoustic alarm is triggered. This can happen if
case if the vehicle is raised on one side, for someone reaches into the vehicle interior, for
example. example.
Arming/disarming Switching on
The tow-away alarm is automatically armed X Close the side windows.
approximately 20 seconds after you lock the X Make sure that nothing (such as mascots or
vehicle. coat hangers) are hanging on the rear-view
The tow-away alarm is automatically deacti- mirror or on the grab handles on the head-
vated when you unlock the vehicle. liner.
This will prevent false alarms.
Disarming X Lock the vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is armed after
approximately 40 seconds.
Switching off
X Unlock vehicle.
The interior motion sensor automatically
switches off.
Deactivating
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.

X Press button :.
When the button is released, indicator
lamp ; in the button lights up for about
5 seconds.
X Lock the vehicle.
The tow-away alarm is disarmed.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until
you lock the vehicle again.
Disarm the tow-away alarm when locking X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
your vehicle and: X Press button :.
Rloading and/or transporting the vehicle, on When the button is released, indicator
a ferry or car transporter, for example lamp ; of the button lights up for about
Rparking on a moving surface, as split-level 5 seconds.
garage X Lock the vehicle.
This will prevent false alarms. The interior motion sensor is deactivated.

Theft deterrent locking system 63
The interior motion sensor remains deactiva-

ted until you lock the vehicle again.
Deactivate the interior motion sensor when
locking your vehicle:
Rwith people or animals remaining inside
Safety
Rwith the side windows remaining open
Rwhen transporting it on a ferry or car trans-
porter, for example
This will prevent false alarms.
Z
64

65

Key ........................................................ 66
Central locking .................................... 71
Driver's door and co-driver's door ..... 72
Sliding door ......................................... 72
Electrical step ...................................... 73
Opening and closing

Rear doors ........................................... 75
Partition sliding door .......................... 77
Side windows ...................................... 78

66 Key
Useful information tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could

cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
This Operator's Manual describes all models risk of an accident.
as well as standard and optional equipment of Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
your vehicle that were available at the time of SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
going to print. Country-specific variations are inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
equipped with all of the described functions. Do not keep the key with remote control:
Opening and closing
This also applies to systems and functions Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
relevant to safety. phone or another key with remote control
Read the information on qualified specialist Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
workshops (Y page 25). foil
Rin metallic objects, e.g. metal cases
Key This can affect the key's functionality.

Key functions of the remote control
G WARNING
Activate the child-proof door locks if children General notes
are traveling in the vehicle. The children could
The vehicle is equipped with either 2 or
otherwise open the doors while the vehicle is
4 remote controls with a folding key, or 4
in motion, injuring themselves and others.
mechanical keys. In this Operator's Manual,
both the mechanical keys and the keys with
G WARNING remote control are referred to as keys. The
Do not leave children unsupervised in the remote control key has a range of up to 32 ft
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child (10 m). Use the remote control of the key only
restraint system. Children could otherwise when in immediate proximity of the vehicle.
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. This prevents theft.
They could be severely or even fatally injured
Remote controls that are not included in the
by prolonged exposure to intense heat or
scope of delivery for the vehicle must be pro-
cold.
grammed before use. Further information can
If children open a door, they could: be obtained at any authorized Sprinter
Rinjure other people Dealer.
Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure The key's remote control locks/unlocks the
themselves or be injured by a passing vehi- driver's door and/or the following centrally if
cle the factory settings have not been changed:
Rseverely injure themselves by falling down, Rthe driver's and the co-driver's door
in particular due to the vehicle height Rthe sliding doors
Always take the key with you when leaving the Rthe rear doors
vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short
time. i If the driver's or co-driver's door is not
closed, the corresponding door is not
G WARNING locked. If a sliding door or a rear door is not
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
closed properly, none of the rear doors are
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
locked.

Key 67
If there is a key is in the ignition lock, the If you do not open a Cargo Van or
remote control is inoperative. When locking Passenger Van within approximately
or unlocking the vehicle with the remote con- 40 seconds of unlocking:
trol, always pay attention to the indicator Rthevehicle is locked again.
lamp signaling. Also check the locking knobs
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is
of the doors.
armed again.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the X To lock centrally: press the & button.
Opening and closing

remote control The indicator lamps flash three times when
the theft deterrent locking system has been
armed and all doors have been closed.
X Check the locking knobs on all the doors.
The locking knobs must all be in the low-
ered position.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the

mechanical key or the folding key
The anti-theft alarm system (ATA) is triggered
if you unlock and open the driver's door or the
rear door with the mechanical key or the fold-
Remote control with an integrated folding key
ing key.
: 5 To unlock the sliding doors and the
rear door The alarm can be disabled in the following two
ways:
; % To unlock the driver's door only or
unlock the vehicle centrally X Press the % or & button on the
= & To lock the vehicle centrally remote control.
? Key release button Or
A Battery check lamp X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
X To unlock the driver's door: press the

% button.
The turn signals flash once. The theft deter-
rent locking system is deactivated.
X To unlock the sliding doors and the rear
door: press the 5 button.
The turn signals flash once.
X To unlock centrally: unlock the driver's
door.
X Press the % button again within 2 sec-
onds.
The turn signals flash once.
i If the surround lighting has been switched
on using the on-board computer
(Y page 193), it goes on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Z
68 Key
Remote control battery

G WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Opening and closing
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If

a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Driver's door immediately.
H Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
Rear door manner. Take discharged
1 Locked batteries to a qualified spe-
2 Unlocked cialist workshop or a special
X To unlock the driver's or rear door: press collection point for used bat-
the key release button on the remote con- teries.
trol.
The key folds out. The key batteries contain perchlorate mate-
X Insert the key fully into the door lock and
rial, which may require special handling and
turn it to position 2. regard for the environment. Check with your
The door is unlocked. local government’s disposal guidelines. Cali-
fornia residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
X To lock the vehicle: lock all doors except
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
the driver's door and, if necessary the rear index.cfm.
door, from inside. To do this, press down
the door locking buttons. We recommend that you have batteries
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Press the key release button on the remote
control.
Checking the batteries
The key folds out.
X Insert the key fully into the driver's door X Press the % or & button for longer
lock and turn it to position 1. than two seconds.
The driver's door is locked. If battery indicator lamp (Y page 66) lights
up briefly, the batteries in the remote con-

Key 69
trol still have sufficient charge. Otherwise, X Align battery compartment cover : and
change the batteries immediately. push it on until it audibly engages.
i If the remote control is checked within the X Check the function of all the remote control
signal reception range of the vehicle, press- buttons on the vehicle.
ing the & or % button:
Rlockor
Runlock the vehicle
Opening and closing

Changing batteries
You need a CR 2025 2 3 V cell battery, which
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
When changing the batteries, do not press
any of the buttons on the remote control.
X Press release button ;.

The key folds out.
X Remove battery compartment cover : in
the direction of the arrow.
X Remove the batteries from the battery tray.

X Insert the new batteries into the battery
tray with the positive pole facing upwards.
Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
Z
70 Key
Problems with the key/remote control
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

It is no longer possible The doors are not closed properly.
to lock the vehicle X Close the doors properly and lock the vehicle again.
using the remote con-
trol. The central locking system has malfunctioned.
Opening and closing
The turn signals do not X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).
flash when the vehicle X Have the central locking system checked as soon as possible at
is locked. a qualified specialist workshop.
It is no longer possible The key battery is weak or discharged.

to lock or unlock the X Point the remote control at the driver's door handle from very
vehicle using the close range and press the % or & button.
remote control.
If this does not work:
X Replace the key battery (Y page 69).
or
X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).
The remote control is faulty.

X Lock the vehicle using the folding key (Y page 66).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
The key cannot be The steering lock has jammed mechanically.

turned in the ignition X Remove the key and insert it again into the ignition lock. Turn the
lock. steering wheel from side to side while doing so.
The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.

started using the key. X Switch off all non-essential consumers, such as interior lighting,
and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 263).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a key. X Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the mechanical locks replaced.

Central locking 71
Central locking Locking and unlocking manually

G WARNING
Activate the child-proof door locks if children
are traveling in the vehicle. The children could
otherwise open the doors while the vehicle is
in motion, injuring themselves and others.
Opening and closing

G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. Children could otherwise Central locking buttons
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle. Use the central locking buttons to centrally
They could be severely or even fatally injured lock/unlock either the entire vehicle or just
by prolonged exposure to intense heat or the sliding doors and rear doors from the
cold. inside.
If children open a door, they could: X To lock/unlock the entire vehicle: press
Rinjure other people the upper Ã central locking button

when the doors are closed.
Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure
When the entire vehicle is locked, the indi-
themselves or be injured by a passing vehi-
cator lamp in the Ã central locking but-
cle
ton lights up.
Rseverely injure themselves by falling down,
in particular due to the vehicle height
i If the key has been removed or is in posi-
tion 0 in the ignition lock, the indicator
Always take the key with you when leaving the
lamp in the Ã central locking button
vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short
remains lit for 5 seconds.
time.
X To lock/unlock the sliding doors and
You can open a locked front door from the rear doors: press the lower section of the
inside at any time. You can open a locked Ä central locking button when the
sliding door or rear door from the inside if it doors are closed.
has been previously unlocked from inside. When the sliding doors and rear doors are
locked, the indicator lamp in the upper
Ã central locking button lights up.
Automatic locking
General notes
The vehicle locks automatically as standard
once a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) has been
reached. Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the doors may be locked automatically
once the ignition is switched on. Information
on the functions of the automatic locking
Z
72 Sliding door
mechanism of your vehicle can be obtained Driver's door and co-driver's door
from any authorized Sprinter Dealer.
If the automatic locking when driving function ! Only open the doors when road and traffic
is activated, there is a risk of being locked out conditions permit. Make sure that there is
when the vehicle is pushed or towed. sufficient clearance when opening the
For this reason, deactivate the automatic doors. Otherwise, you could damage your
locking when driving function: vehicle or other vehicles.
Rbefore pushing the vehicle
Opening and closing
Rbefore towing the vehicle

If activated, automatic locking is deactivated
when the vehicle is unlocked or locked using
the central locking button.
Automatic locking is reactivated after the
ignition is switched off or a door is opened
with the vehicle stationary.
Activating automatic locking when driv-

ing You can open the driver's or co-driver's door
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition from the inside at any time, even if it is locked.
lock when the doors are closed. X Pull door handle :.
X For the entire vehicle: press the upper Locking knob ; pops up.
Ã central locking button until the indi- The door opens.
cator lamp in the button flashes four times.
X For the sliding doors and rear doors
only: press the Ä lower central locking Sliding door
button until the indicator lamp in the Ã Important safety notes
upper button flashes four times.
G WARNING
Deactivating automatic locking when If the open sliding door is not engaged, it could
driving move on its own if the vehicle is on a slope.
This could trap you or other persons. There is
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
a risk of injury.
lock when the doors are closed.
Always make sure that the open sliding door is
X For the entire vehicle: press the Ã
engaged.
upper central locking button until the indi-
cator lamp in the button flashes twice. ! Only open the doors when road and traffic
X For the sliding doors and rear doors conditions permit. Make sure that there is
only: press the Ä lower central locking sufficient clearance when opening the
button until the indicator lamp in the Ã doors. Otherwise, you could damage your
upper button flashes twice. vehicle or other vehicles.
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equip-
ped with an electrical access step. Observe
the notes on the electrical step when opening
and closing the sliding door (Y page 73).

Electrical step 73
Opening/closing from the outside The sliding door is equipped with an active
retainer, which engages the door at the end
stop when opened.
You can only open a sliding door from the
inside if the child-proof locks have not been
activated.
i You can also lock the sliding door in place
around halfway when opening/closing. The
Opening and closing

door does not have to be opened fully when
getting into or out of the vehicle. The inter-
mediate detent does not fully engage the
sliding door.
The sliding door is equipped with an active X To unlock: pull locking knob = upwards.
retainer, which engages the door at the end Only this sliding door unlocks. The other
stop when opened. doors remain locked.
i You can also lock the sliding door in place X To open: press button :.
around halfway when opening/closing. The X Slide the sliding door by handle ; back to
door does not have to be opened fully when the stop.
getting into or out of the vehicle. The inter-
X Check the sliding door detent.
mediate detent does not fully engage the
The sliding door must be engaged.
sliding door.
X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
X To open: pull door handle :.
wards by handle ; until it engages.
The sliding door opens.
X To lock: press locking knob = down.
X Push back the sliding door using door han-
Only the sliding door is locked. All other
dle : until it engages. doors that were previously unlocked
X Check the sliding door detent. remain unlocked.
X To close: slide the sliding door firmly for-
wards by handle : until it closes.
Electrical closing assist
If your vehicle is equipped with electrical clos-
Opening/closing from the inside
ing assist, you will require less force to close
the sliding door.
Electrical step
If you do not use the grab handle and the step,
you could injure yourself when getting in and
out of the vehicle.
Interior door handle on the sliding door
Z
74 Electrical step
In order to reduce risks: ing equipment can be moved nearer to the

Rdraw the passengers' attention to the elec- cargo compartment.
trical step. Wait until the electrical step is Vehicles without steering-wheel buttons:
fully extended. if the 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
Rdo not jump out of the vehicle. cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds,
Ronly use the grab handle and step. Only electrical step : is malfunctioning
they are designed for such a load. (Y page 227).
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if
Opening and closing
Rkeep grab handles, access steps and entry

sills free from dirt, e.g. mud, clay, snow and the Electrical Step message is shown in
ice. the display and a warning tone sounds, elec-
trical step : is malfunctioning (Y page 216).
If electrical step : is malfunctioning, the
Operation and obstacle detection step may only partially extend/retract or may
not extend/retract at all. If a malfunction
does occur, you will have to retract and lock
electrical step : manually before continuing
the journey (Y page 74).
Before passengers get out of the vehicle, let
them know that electrical step : might not
be extended.
Emergency release
! Driving with the step extended may result
Electrical step in it being damaged.
The sliding door of your vehicle can be equip- If the electrical step does not retract auto-
ped with an electrical step. matically, you will have to push it in and
X When getting in and out of the vehicle, use lock it into place manually before continu-
the grab handles and electrical step :. ing your journey.
Electrical step : automatically extends
when the sliding door is opened and retracts
when it is closed.
Electrical step : is equipped with an
obstruction detection device on the front
side. If the step comes into contact with an
obstacle while it is extending, it stops.
After you have removed the obstacle, you
must first close the sliding door and open it
once again so that the step can extend com-
pletely.
X Pull R-clips ; on both rods : on the
i If the electrical step obstructs loading, underside of the step out of their respective
you can prevent the step from extending pins.
when opening the sliding door via obstacle X Remove washers = and detach both
detection. The electrical step can then rods :.
remain retracted and a forklift or other lift-

Rear doors 75
G WARNING
If you open the rear doors to 90° (detent posi-
tion), the rear lamps are no longer visible.
The vehicle is no longer sufficiently visible
from the rear and will only be recognized as an
obstacle at a late stage by other road users.
This could lead to an accident.
Therefore, in such a situation, ensure that the
Opening and closing

vehicle is visible from the rear according to
the respective national regulations, e.g. with a
X Fold rods : into the housing in the step. warning triangle.
X Push the step into its housing.
! Make sure that there is sufficient clear-
ance when opening the rear doors. You
could otherwise damage the vehicle and
objects in close range of the rear doors.
You can lock the rear doors at an angle of 90°,
180° and 270°. Always make sure that the
open rear door is correctly engaged in the
detent.
Opening/closing from the outside
i When securing the step for the first time, Opening the right-hand rear door
you must pierce a film with the R-clips.
X Insert R-clips ; into the step as far as they
will go through the holes on both sides of
the housing.
The step is secured in its housing.
Rear doors
G WARNING X Pull handle :.
If you open a rear door, you could:
X Swing the rear door to the side until it
Rendanger other people or road users engages.
Rbe caught by oncoming traffic
This is particularly the case if you open the
rear door more than 90°. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Only open the rear doors when traffic condi-
tions permit. Always make sure that the rear
doors are properly locked.
Z
76 Rear doors
Opening the left-hand rear door

Opening and closing
Magnetic door retainer

XWith the rear door opened to an angle of
X Make sure that the right-hand rear door is
270°, push it against magnetic door
open and engaged.
retainer ; on the side wall.
X Pull release handle : in the direction of
When the magnet on the rear door is in
the arrow. contact with magnetic door retainer ;, the
X Swing the rear door to the side until it rear door is held in this position.
engages. i Vehicles with 270° pivoting rear doors:
If door retainer : malfunctions while load-
Opening the rear doors to an angle of ing, you can swivel it 180° against the
180° or 270° spring force and onto the door and engage
it. The door retainer remains in this position
and will not swivel back to its original posi-
tion.
Before closing the door, release door
retainer : from the detent and return it to
its original position.
Closing the rear doors from the outside

X Pull the rear door away from magnetic door
retainer.
Door retainer (example: right rear door) X Close the left-hand rear door firmly from
X Open the rear door to about 45°. the outside.

X Pull and hold door retainer : in the direc- X Close the right-hand rear door firmly from
tion of the arrow. the outside.

X Open the rear door more than 90°, so that
the door retainer cannot engage.
X Release the door retainer and open the
door to an angle of 180° or 270°.

Partition sliding door 77
Opening/closing from the inside the vehicle is in motion. This could trap you or
other persons. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Close the partition sliding door before every
journey and make sure that it is engaged.
Opening/closing the partition sliding
Opening and closing

door from the cab
Release the lever on the inside of the right rear

door.
A white section on latch ; indicates that the
rear door is unlocked.
i You can only open the locked rear doors
from the inside if the child-proof locks have
not been activated.
X To unlock: slide latch ; to the left.
You will see a white marking. X To open: turn the key counter-clockwise
=.
Only the rear door unlocks. All other doors
that were previously locked remain locked. The sliding door is unlocked.
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the
X To open: pull opening lever : and open
direction of arrow ;.
the unlocked rear door.
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc-
X Swing the rear door to the side until it
engages. tion of arrow : until it engages.
The sliding door can be locked using the
X To close: make sure that the left-hand rear
key.
door is closed.
X Pull the rear door firmly by the door handle
to close it. Opening/closing the partition sliding
X To lock: slide latch ; to the right. door from the cargo compartment
The white section is no longer visible.
Only the rear door is locked. All other doors
that were previously unlocked remain
unlocked.
Partition sliding door

G WARNING
If the open partition sliding door is not
engaged, it could move automatically while
Z
78 Side windows
X To unlock: press the catch in the direction injure themselves on parts of the vehicle.
of arrow =. They could be severely or even fatally injured
The sliding door is unlocked. by prolonged exposure to intense heat or
X Slide the sliding door to the stop in the cold.
direction of arrow :. If children open a door, they could:
X To close: slide the sliding door in the direc- Rinjure other people
tion of arrow ; until it engages. Rget out of the vehicle and thereby injure
Opening and closing
themselves or be injured by a passing vehi-

cle
Side windows Rseverely injure themselves by falling down,
Important safety notes in particular due to the vehicle height
Always take the key with you when leaving the
G WARNING vehicle, even if you are only leaving for a short
While opening the side windows, body parts time.
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury. Opening/closing the side window
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press Control panel (example: driver's door)
the switch to open the side window again. : Power window, left
; Power window, right
G WARNING
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
If children operate the side windows they
lock.
could become trapped, particularly if they are
X Press or pull button : or ; until the cor-
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
responding side window has reached the
Activate the override feature for the rear side
desired position.
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi- If you press the switch beyond the pressure
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the point and then release it, the window opens
vehicle. automatically. To stop the movement, press
or pull the switch again.
G WARNING
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. Children could otherwise

Side windows 79
Resetting the side windows

You must reset the side windows if there has
been a malfunction or an interruption in the
voltage supply.
lock.
X Pull the two power window switches and
Opening and closing

hold for approximately 1 second after clos-
ing the side window.
Problems with the side windows

If you cannot completely open or close a side
window:
If there are no objects or leaves in the window
guide that prevent the sliding sunroof from
closing, there has been a malfunction or the
on-board voltage has been interrupted.
X Reset the side window (Y page 79).
Z
80

81

Seats .................................................... 82
Steering wheel .................................... 88
Mirrors ................................................. 89
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

82 Seats
Useful information G WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intended level
This Operator's Manual describes all models of protection if you have not moved the back-
as well as standard and optional equipment of rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
your vehicle that were available at the time of ing or in the event of an accident, you could
going to print. Country-specific variations are slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
equipped with all of the described functions. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
This also applies to systems and functions injury.
relevant to safety. Adjust the seat properly before beginning
Read the information on qualified specialist
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest

workshops (Y page 25). is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
Seats
Important safety notes G WARNING
If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
G WARNING ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do as intended. There is an increased risk of
the following while driving: injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
Radjust
event of an accident or when braking.
the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors Always drive with the head restraints instal-
Rfasten the seat belt
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
There is a risk of an accident. restraint supports the back of the head at
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- about eye level.
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine. Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that
you can wear the seat belt correctly.
G WARNING Observe the following points:
If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could RPosition the backrest in an almost vertical
move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in position so that you are sitting virtually
motion. This could cause you to lose control of upright. Do not drive with the backrest
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. reclined too far back.
Always make sure that the driver's seat is RYour arms should be slightly bent when you
engaged before starting the engine. are holding the steering wheel.
RAvoid seat positions that prevent the seat
G WARNING
belt from being routed correctly. The shoul-
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle der section of the belt must be routed over
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the the middle of your shoulder and be pulled
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. tight against your upper body. The lap belt
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one must always pass across your lap as low
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. down as possible, i.e. over your hip joints.

Seats 83
RAdjust the head restraint so that it supports You can find information on rotating the
the back of the head at eye level. front seats under "Swiveling front seats"
RThe distance from the pedals should be (Y page 84).
such that you can depress them fully. X To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position:
Observe also the safety notes in the section pull lever : up.
on "Air bags" (Y page 47) and "Children in the X Slide the seat forwards or back.
vehicle" (Y page 51). X Release lever :.
If you swap over the head restraints for the X Slide the seat forwards or back until you
front and rear seats, you will not be able to hear it engage.
adjust the height and angle of the head
X To adjust the backrest: turn handwheel

restraints to the correct position.
= towards the front.
Use the head restraint pad to adjust the head The seat backrest moves to a vertical posi-
restraint so that it is as close as possible to tion.
the back of your head.
X Turn handwheel = towards the rear.
Before the journey, make sure the head The seat backrest tilts towards the rear.
restraints have been correctly set for each of
X To adjust the seat height: press or pull
the vehicle's passengers (Y page 86).
lever ? repeatedly until you have reached
the desired seat height.
Driver's and co-driver's seat X To adjust the seat angle: turn handwheel
A towards the front.
The front of the seat cushion is lowered.
X Turn handwheel A towards the rear.
The front of the seat cushion is raised.
i The lumbar support allows you to use the
backrest to increase the support provided
to the lumbar spine.
When the lumbar support is correctly
adjusted, it reduces strain on your back
while driving.
X To adjust the lumbar support: turn hand-
wheel ; upwards.
This increases the support provided to the
lumbar region.
X Turn handwheel ; downwards.
: Seat fore-and-aft adjustment This reduces the support provided to the

lumbar region.
; Lumbar support adjustment
= Seat backrest adjustment
? Seat height adjustment
A Seat cushion angle adjustment
B Seat suspension adjustment
C Seat suspension lock
i Depending on the seat model, some
adjustments may not be available.
Z
84 Seats
The seat suspension must be adapted to your

body weight. Adjust the seat suspension only
while the seat is unoccupied.
X To adjust the seat suspension: take your
weight off the seat.
X Using handwheel B, set your body weight
(40 to 120 kg) for optimum seat suspen-
sion.
The seat suspension will become more rigid
the higher you set the weight. It will then
not move as far. Seat release (example: co-driver's seat)

If the seat moves up and down frequently and The driver's seat and co-driver's seat can be
to a great extent, you can lock the seat in the rotated by 50° and 180°.
lower range. The seats engage when facing in the direction
X To engage the seat suspension lock: of travel as well as when facing in the opposite
turn lever C upwards. direction and also engage at an angle of 50°
When it next moves, the seat will lock in to the door.
position. X Make sure that the parking brake has been
X To release the seat suspension lock: engaged and that the handbrake lever has
turn lever C to the right. been pushed down to the stop
The seat can now move up and down again. (Y page 150).
X Adjust the steering wheel to provide the
necessary space to rotate and adjust the
Swiveling front seats driver's seat (Y page 88).
X Before rotating, push the co-driver's seat
G WARNING forwards (Y page 83).
If the driver's and co-driver's seats are not
X 2 To rotate the seat: push lever : on the
engaged facing the direction of travel while
rear of the seat towards the center of the
driving, the restraint systems may not be able
vehicle and rotate the seat slightly inwards.
to provide the intended protection. There is an
The rotation device is released.
X Release lever :.
Engage the driver's and co-driver's seats so
X Turn the seat about 50° towards the out-
they are facing the direction of travel before
starting the engine. side or inside to the desired position.
! When rotating the seats, make sure that

there is sufficient space to do so.
Move the seat forward or back first. This
will help to avoid contact with other parts of
the interior.
Push the handbrake lever down to the stop.
The parking brake or handbrake lever could
otherwise be damaged.

Seats 85
Twin co-driver's seat

Folding seat (example with partition sliding door)
X Remove key : from the partition sliding
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the
door.
seat cushion out of front anchorage :.
X Pull grip ; of the catch in the direction of
X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and
the arrow and fold seat cushion = up or
out of rear anchorage ;. down.
X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.
X Release grip ; of seat cushion = in the
i You can stow various articles in the space corresponding end position.
under the twin co-driver's seat. X Move the seat cushion = until it engages.
X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down Grip ; of the catch must lie completely on
the seat cushion by the rear edge. the seat frame.
X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back-
rest into rear anchorage ;.
X Push down on the seat cushion at the front Rear bench seat (Passenger Van)
until it engages in front anchorage :.
G WARNING
If the rear bench seat is not installed as descri-
bed or an unsuitable rear bench seat is instal-
Folding seat
led, the seat belts may not provide protection
G WARNING as intended. There is an increased risk of
If the key is inserted in the partition sliding injury.
door, it may come into contact with the per- Install the rear bench seat as described. Only
son on the folding seat. There is a risk of use rear bench seats that are approved for
injury. your vehicle by the distributor named on the
Always remove the key from the partition slid- inside cover page.
ing door before a person sits on the folding
seat.
! For safety reasons, the four-seat rear
bench must only be removed or installed at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Keep the seat bench mounting recesses in
the vehicle floor free from dirt and foreign
objects.
Z
86 Seats
X Slide the bench seat forwards until you

hear the locking mechanisms engage.
X Check levers : on the anchorages of the
bench seat.
All levers : must be flush to the vehicle
floor.
Head restraints
G WARNING
Locking mechanism lever on the feet of the bench

If head restraints are not installed and adjus-
seat
ted correctly, they cannot provide protection
X To remove the rear bench seat: swing all as intended. There is an increased risk of
levers : of the bench seat completely injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
upwards. event of an accident or when braking.
The bench seat moves back into the seat Always drive with the head restraints instal-
mounting recesses on the vehicle floor. led. Before driving off, make sure for every
X Lift the bench seat upwards out of the seat vehicle occupant that the center of the head
mounting recesses. restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Do not change over the head restraints for the

front and rear seats. Otherwise, it will not be
possible to correctly adjust the height and
angle of the head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
as possible to your head.
i Do not exceed the maximum permissible

number of seats for models registered as
passenger vehicles.
X To install the rear bench seat: observe
the prescribed installation position of the
bench seat.
Install the two-seat bench seat only on the
driver's side. Head restraint (example: luxury head restraint on
X Check mounting shells ; on the vehicle the co-driver's seat)
floor. : Release button
X Position the bench seat in the direction of ; Head restraint height
travel in corresponding mounting shells ;. = Head restraint angle (luxury head
restraints only)

Seats 87
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the Seat heating

desired position.
X To lower: press release button : and slide
G WARNING
the head restraint down to the desired posi- Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
tion. cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
X To adjust the angle: hold the front part of
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
the luxury head restraint by the lower edge
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
and tilt it to the desired position.
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
the stop. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on

X Press release button : and pull out the repeatedly.
head restraint.
X To insert: insert the head restraint so that ! When you leave your seat, do not place
the rod with the detents is on the left when anything on the seat and switch off the seat
viewed in the direction of travel. heating. Do not switch the seat heating on
when the seat is not occupied, e.g. when
X Press and hold release button :.
driving without a co-driver. The seat heat-
X Push the head restraint down until it ing may otherwise overheat, causing dam-
engages. age to the seat.
Armrests
The three red indicator lamps in the c

button show the activated heating level 1 to
3.
X To set the armrest angle: fold the armrest The system automatically switches down
upwards by more than 45° ;. from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
The armrest is released. five minutes.
X Fold armrest = forwards to the stop. The system automatically switches down
X Slowly fold the armrest upwards to the from level 2 to level 1 after approximately
desired position. ten minutes.
X To fold the armrest up: if necessary, fold At level 1, the seat heating remains in con-
the armrest upwards : by more than 90°. tinuous operation.
Z
88 Steering wheel
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or 2 When leaving the vehicle, always take the
in the ignition lock. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
X To switch on: press the c button leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
repeatedly until the desired heating level
has been set. The steering wheel can still be adjusted if the
X To switch off: press the c button
key has been removed.
repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out.
If the indicator lamps of the current heating
level in the c button flash, the seat heat-
ing has switched off automatically. In this
case, too many electrical consumers are

switched on or the battery charge is not suf-
ficient. The seat heating will automatically
switch back to the current heating level when
enough on-board voltage is available again.
Steering wheel
G WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving: : Steering column fore-and-aft adjustment
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, ; Steering column height
steering wheel or mirrors = Lever
Rfasten the seat belt X To set the steering wheel: swing lever =
There is a risk of an accident. down until it engages.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- The steering wheel is unlocked.
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt X Move the steering wheel to the desired
before starting the engine. position.
X Pull lever = up to the stop.
G WARNING The steering wheel is locked again.
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
G WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.

Mirrors 89
Mirrors Adjusting electrically

Rear-view mirror

Adjustment buttons and switches for setting the
mirrors
X Anti-glare mode: push anti-glare lever : X Before pulling away, turn the key to position
in the direction of the arrow. 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 138).
X Press switch ; to position 1 for the left-
hand exterior mirror or to position 2 for the
Exterior mirrors right-hand exterior mirror.
Important safety notes X Press adjustment button : at the top, bot-
tom, right or left.
G WARNING Adjust the exterior mirrors in such a way
The additional mirrors in the exterior mirrors that you can get a good overview of road
reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in and traffic conditions.
the mirrors are closer than they appear. You
could misjudge the distance from road users i The exterior mirrors are automatically
driving behind you when changing lanes, for heated at low outside temperatures.
instance. There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore always determine the
actual distance from road users driving
behind you, e.g.:
Rby looking over your shoulder
Rby looking in the main mirror in the exterior
mirror.
Adjusting manually
X Before starting off, manually adjust the
exterior mirrors in such a way that you can
get a good overview of road and traffic con-
ditions.
Z
90

91

Exterior lighting .................................. 92
Interior lighting ................................... 97
Changing bulbs .................................... 99
Windshield wipers ............................ 107
Lights and windshield wipers

92 Exterior lighting
Useful information Light switch
This Operator's Manual describes all models Operation

as well as standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle that were available at the time of
going to print. Country-specific variations are
equipped with all of the described functions.
This also applies to systems and functions
relevant to safety.
workshops (Y page 25).
Exterior lighting 1 Ã Automatic headlamp mode/

daytime running lamps
Important safety notes 2$ Lights off
For reasons of safety, we recommend that 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
you drive with the lights switched on even instrument lighting
during the daytime. There may be differences 4L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
in operation due to legal requirements and 5N Fog lamps
voluntary recommendations in some coun- 6R Rear fog lamp
tries.
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
Bulb failure indicator X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
The bulb failure indicator is only an aid. You or
are responsible for the proper functioning of X If the rear fog lamp is switched on: press
the vehicle lighting. Insufficient or non-func- the light switch in to the stop.
tioning vehicle lighting puts the operating The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and
safety of the vehicle at risk. the high-beam flasher are operated using the
For this reason, check the condition and func- combination switch (Y page 94).
tion of your vehicle's lighting system and, if
necessary, that of the trailer before each jour- Low-beam headlamps
ney.
The bulb failure indicator monitors all of the
X To switch on: turn the key to position 2 in
exterior lighting lamps, except the perimeter the ignition lock or start the engine.
lamp and the trailer lighting. If a bulb fails, X Turn the light switch to position L.
either the b(Y page 35) indicator lamp The L indicator lamp in the instrument
lights up, or you will see a corresponding cluster lights up.
message in the display (Y page 208).
Daytime running lamps
i Depending on the equipment, the bulb
failure indicator can fail for all lamps with You can activate/deactivate the daytime run-
the exception of the turn signal lamps. ning lamps function using the on-board com-
puter.

Exterior lighting 93
This is not possible in countries where day- lamps, low-beam headlamps and the license
time running lamps are a legal requirement. plate lamp. This excludes weather-related
The daytime running lamps function must be impairments to visibility, such as snow, fog or
activated using the on-board computer: spray.
Rvehicles
If there is fog, snow or spray, turn the light
with steering wheel buttons
switch quickly from Ã to L. You could
(Y page 192)
otherwise briefly interrupt operation of the
Rvehicles without steering wheel buttons
headlamps.
(Y page 183)
X To switch on automatic headlamp
X To switch on: turn the light switch to the
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
$ position.
Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
The low-beam headlamps, parking lamps
parking lamps switch on or off automati-
and license plate lamp are switched on
cally depending on the ambient light.

when the engine is running. The L indi-
cator lamp in the instrument cluster lights When the engine is running: if you activate
up. the "daytime running lamps" function using
the on-board computer, the daytime run-
i USA only: ning lamps are switched on. The parking
If you turn the light switch to the T or lamps and low-beam headlamps also
L position, the parking lamps or low- switch on or off automatically, depending
beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the on the ambient light.
light switch to the Ã position, the day-
When the low-beam headlamps are
time running lamps remain switched on.
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
i Canada only: instrument cluster lights up.
If you turn the light switch to the L
position, the low-beam headlamps are Fog lamps/rear fog lamp
switched on. If you turn the light switch to
the T or Ã position, the daytime G WARNING
running lamps remain switched on. If you suspect that driving conditions will be
foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
Automatic headlamp mode start your journey. Your vehicle may other-
wise not be visible and you could endanger
G WARNING yourself and others.
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on G WARNING
automatically if there is fog, snow or other In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
causes of poor visibility due to the weather only switch from position Ã to L with
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
accident. Switching from Ã to L will briefly
In such situations, turn the light switch to switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driv-
L. ing in low ambient lighting conditions may
result in an accident.
Automatic headlamp mode is only a driving
aid. You are responsible for the vehicle light- X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the
ing at all times. ignition lock or start the engine.
Depending on ambient light, the rain and light X Turn the light switch to L or T.
sensor automatically switches on the parking
Z
i If your vehicle is only equipped with one X To indicate: press the combination switch
rear fog lamp, you must turn the light in desired direction : or ; until it
switch to L. engages.
The combination switch automatically
i When the light switch is set to Ã, you
returns to its original position after large
cannot switch on the front or rear fog
steering movements.
lamps.
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
X To switch on the front fog lamps: pull the
switch briefly in desired direction : or ;.
light switch out to the first locking point. The corresponding turn signal flashes three
The green N indicator lamp on the light times.
switch lights up.
X To switch on the rear fog lamp: pull the
High-beam headlamps and high-beam
light switch out to the second locking point. flasher
The yellow R indicator lamp on the light

switch lights up.
X To switch off the front fog lamps/rear
fog lamp: push in the light switch to the
stop.
The R and N indicator lamp on the
light switch go out.
Combination switch
Turn signal lamps
: High-beam headlamps
; High-beam flasher
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
switch on the low-beam headlamps
(Y page 92).
X Press combination switch : forwards.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
i In the Ã position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and the engine is running.
: To indicate a right turn
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
; To indicate a left turn
move the combination switch back to its
normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
X To switch on the high-beam flasher: turn
the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Pull the combination switch briefly in direc-
tion of arrow ;.

Exterior lighting 95
Cornering lamps
The cornering lamps improve the illumination
of the road over a wide angle in the direction
you are turning, enabling better visibility in
tight bends, for example.
The cornering light function switches on
automatically, if:
Ryou are traveling at a speed of less than
25 mph (40 km/h) and you switch on a turn
signal or turn the steering wheel.
Hazard warning lamp switch
Ryou are traveling at a speed between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) X To switch on/off: press the £ hazard

and turn the steering wheel. warning lamp switch.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short If you have indicated a turn while the hazard
time, but is automatically switched off after warning lamps are switched on, only the turn
no more than 3 minutes. signal lamps on the side of the vehicle selec-
ted will light up.
i If reverse gear is engaged the lamp on the
opposite side of the vehicle switches on The hazard warning lamps switch on auto-
instead. matically if:
Ran air bag is deployed.
Ryou brake sharply and bring the vehicle to a
Hazard warning lamps halt from a speed of more than 45 mph
(70 km/h).
G WARNING
If the hazard warning lamps have been
The rear exterior light will be covered if you:
switched on automatically, press the £
Ropen the rear doors by 90° hazard warning lamp switch to switch them
Ropen the rear dropside. off.
The vehicle will then be difficult for other road i The hazard warning lamps work even
users to see or will not be seen by them at all, when the ignition is switched off.
particularly if it is dark or visibility is poor.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should therefore ensure in this and simi- Headlamp cleaning system
lar situations that the vehicle is visible from
the rear in accordance with the relevant The headlamps are cleaned automatically
national regulations, by using the warning tri- with a high-pressure water jet if the "Wipe
angle, for instance. with washer fluid" function is activated
(Y page 107) while the low-beam headlamps
are on and the engine is running.
You can find information on refilling washer
fluid in the "Maintenance and care" section
(Y page 255).
Z
Highbeam Assist In particular, the detection of obstacles can

be restricted if there is:
General notes
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
You can use this function to set the head- snow
lamps to change between low beam and high Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
beam automatically. The system recognizes ing the sensors
vehicles with their lights on, either approach-
ing from the opposite direction or traveling in Activating/deactivating Highbeam
front of your vehicle, and consequently Assist
switches the headlamps from high beam to
low beam. X To activate: switch on the Highbeam
Once the system no longer detects any other Assist function using the on-board com-
vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam head- puter (Y page 192).
lamps. X Turn the light switch to the Ã position.
The system's optical sensor is located behind X Press the combination switch beyond the
the windshield near the overhead control pressure point in the direction of arrow :
panel. (Y page 94).
Highbeam Assist is active.
The _ or indicator lamp in the
G WARNING multifunction display lights up when it is
Highbeam Assist does not recognize road dark and the light sensor activates the low-
users: beam headlamps.
Rwho
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
imately 22 mph (35 km/h) and no other
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
road users have been detected:
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
In very rare cases, Highbeam Assist may fail to automatically. The K indicator lamp in
recognize other road users who have lights, or the instrument cluster also lights up.
may recognize them too late. In this or similar If you are driving at speeds below approx-
situations, the automatic high-beam head- imately 19 mph (30 km/h), other road
lamps will not be deactivated or will be acti- users are recognized or the roads are ade-
vated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- quately lit:
dent.
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions automatically. The K indicator lamp in
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in the instrument cluster goes out. The _
good time.
or indicator lamp in the multifunc-
Highbeam Assist cannot take into account tion display remains lit.
road, weather or traffic conditions. Highbeam X To deactivate: move the combination
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for switch back to its normal position or move
adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevail- the light switch to another position.
ing light, visibility and traffic conditions.
The _ or indicator lamp in the
multifunction display goes out.

Interior lighting 97
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Switch on the low-beam headlamps and
drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes, depend-
ing on the length of the journey and the
weather conditions (humidity and temper-
ature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish: Interior lights in the overhead control panel
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified : Switches the left-hand reading lamp
specialist workshop. on/off

; Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/
off
Interior lighting = Right-hand reading lamp
Switching the dashboard lighting on/ ? Interior light
off A Switches the automatic control system
on/off
Overview B Switches the interior light on/off
C Left-hand reading lamp
If you manually switch on the interior lighting
or reading lamps on the overhead control
panel, they switch off automatically after
20 minutes.
Automatic control
The interior light comes on if you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the driver's or the co-driver's door
Standard interior light
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
1 Interior light switched on
2 Interior light switched off The interior light switches off again automat-
3 Automatic control system switched on
ically.
If a door is left open, the interior lighting
switches off after approximately 20 minutes.
Z
98 Interior lighting
Switching the rear compartment Switching the rear/cargo compart-

lighting on/off centrally (Passenger ment lamp on/off
Van)
Interior light with switch (example: Cargo Van)

Rear compartment lighting switch 1 Automatic control
: To switch on the rear compartment light- 2 To switch off the interior lighting
ing 3 To switch on the interior lighting
; Automatic control
= To switch off the rear compartment light-
ing
You can switch the rear compartment lighting
on/off centrally on Passenger Vans that are
equipped with convenience control.
There may also be a switch on the rear com-
partment lights that allows you to switch
them on/off separately. If you switch off rear
compartment lighting =, the rear compart-
ment light is switched off, regardless of the
Interior light with switch (example: Passenger Van
position of its own switch. with rear-compartment air conditioning)
If you move the rear compartment lighting 1 To switch on the interior lighting
switch to center position ;, the automatic 2 To switch off the interior lighting
control system is switched on. When you
3 Automatic control
open a door or unlock the vehicle, the rear
compartment lighting then goes on automat- For Cargo Vans and Passenger Vans without
ically. Once the doors are closed, it switches convenience control, the switch for the inte-
off automatically after 20 minutes. rior lighting is on the rear interior light in the
cargo compartment/vehicle interior.
If you move the switch to automatic control,
the rear/cargo compartment lamps go on
when you open a door or unlock the vehicle.
They switch off automatically after
20 minutes, or when you close the doors.

Changing bulbs 99
Motion detector Changing bulbs

G WARNING Important safety notes
The motion detector sends the invisible infra-
G DANGER
red radiation emitted by LEDs (light emitting
diodes). Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
These LEDs are classified as class 1M lasers
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-
and can damage the retina if you:
tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Rlook directly into the unfiltered laser beam Never touch the parts or the electrical con-
of the motion detector for an extended tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on
period the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-
Rlook directly into the laser beam of the cialist workshop.
motion detector using optical instruments,

e.g. eyeglasses or a magnifying glass. G WARNING
There is a risk of injury. Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
Never look directly into the motion detector. when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
The cargo compartment lighting is also There is a risk of injury.
switched on by the motion detector in the Allow these components to cool down before
cargo compartment of Cargo Vans equipped changing a bulb.
with this feature.
If the motion detector detects a movement in ! Make sure the bulbs are always securely
the cargo compartment when the vehicle is installed.
stationary, the cargo compartment lighting If your vehicle is equipped with Bi-Xenon
switches on for approximately two minutes. bulbs, you can recognize this by the following:
The cargo compartment lighting can be the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
switched on by the motion detector within from the top to the bottom and back again
four seconds if: when you start the engine. For this to be
Rthe rear interior light switch (Y page 98) is observed, the low-beam headlamps must be
set to automatic control. switched on before starting the engine.
Rthe vehicle is stationary, the parking brake The bulbs and lamps are an essential compo-
is applied and the brake pedal is not being nent of vehicle safety. You must therefore
depressed make sure that these function correctly at all
Or times. Have the headlamp setting checked
regularly.
Rthe selector lever is in position P on vehi-
RAlways switch off the vehicle's lighting sys-
cles with automatic transmission and the
tem before changing a bulb.
brake pedal is not being depressed and
Rthe vehicle has not been locked from the
This will prevent a short circuit.
RDo not touch the glass tube of new bulbs
outside using the key
with your bare hands. Always use a clean,
The motion detector switches off automati-
lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the
cally if no change is detected in the vehicle for
bulb when installing.
several hours, e.g. if a door is opened, if the
ignition key is turned, etc. This prevents the Even minor contamination can burn into
battery from becoming discharged. the glass surface and reduce the service life
of the bulbs.
Z
100 Changing bulbs
RDo not use a bulb that has been dropped or = Low-beam headlamps: H7 55W
that has scratches on its glass tube. ? High-beam headlamps: H7 55W
The bulb could explode. A Parking lamps/standing lamps: W5W
ROnly use bulbs in closed lamps which have
been designed for this purpose.
ROnly use spare bulbs of the same type and
with the prescribed voltage
RProtect the bulbs from moisture when in
use.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
RHave the LEDs and bulbs of the following
lamps changed at a qualified specialist

workshop:
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps
- the additional turn signals in the exterior
: Turn-signal: NAK 3457
mirrors
- the high-mounted brake lamp
Additional turn signals in the exterior mir-
ror (not for all-wheel-drive vehicles):
- LED daytime running lamps (Bi-Xenon
HPC 16WY
headlamps)
- Bi-Xenon lamps (Bi-Xenon headlamps) Low-beam headlamps and high-beam
- front fog lamps headlamps/cornering lamp
If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Front bulbs
Overview of bulb replacement – bulb
types
The following bulbs can be replaced. Bulb
types can be found in the legend.
Example (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lighting system.
X Open the hood (Y page 248).
X Turn housing cover : in the direction of
the arrow and remove it.
Vehicles with halogen headlamps

: Turn signal: PY21W
; Daytime running lamps: W21W

Changing bulbs 101

X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and remove.
Example (halogen headlamps)

; Low-beam headlamp bulb holder

= Bulb holder for high-beam headlamp
? Bulb holder for parking lamp/standing
lamp (halogen headlamps)
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: turn bulb holder
X Turn the corresponding bulb holder with
with bulb ; counter-clockwise and
bulb ;, = or ? counter-clockwise and
remove it.
pull it out of the lamp.
Halogen headlamps: press the spring
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder.
catches of the bulb holder together and
X Insert the new bulb in such a way that its
remove the bulb holder with bulb ;.
base fits into the recess of the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder with the bulb into the
X Press a new bulb into the bulb holder.
lamp and turn it clockwise to tighten.
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: insert the bulb
The bulb holder engages audibly.
X Place housing cover : into the opening
holder with bulb ; into the lamp and turn
clockwise.
and turn in the opposite direction of the
arrow. Halogen headlamps: insert the bulb
X Close the hood.
holder with bulb ; into the lamp.
The bulb holder with bulb ; engages audi-
bly.
Cornering light function/daytime run-
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to the
ning lamps
stop.
The cap audibly engages.
X Close the hood (Y page 249).
Z
102 Changing bulbs
Turn signal lamps Rear bulbs (Cargo Van/Passenger

Van)
Overview of bulb types


X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X Applying light pressure to the bulb, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb
holder :.
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder : and
screw it in clockwise.
X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn
it clockwise to tighten.
X Close the hood.
Lights Bulb type

: High-mounted brake LED
lamp
; Brake lamp/tail lamp P21W/5W
= Turn signal lamps PY 21 W
? Tail lamps/standing R5W
lamps
A License plate lamp W5W
B Rear fog lamps (driver's P21W
side)
C Backup lamps P21W

Changing bulbs 103
Tail lamps X Release retaining lugs ; and take the bulb

holder out of the tail lamp.
counter-clockwise and remove it from the
bulb holder.
X Press the new bulb into the bulb holder and
X Press the connector into the bulb holder.
X Insert the lamp lens.
To do this, clip the bulb holder into the three
holes provided at the side and tighten
screws :.

License plate lamp

X Open the rear door.
X Undo screws : and unclip the lamp lens in
the direction of the arrow.
X Pull the connector off the bulb holder.

X Insert a screwdriver or similar implement
into recess ; and carefully pry off lamp
lens :.
X Insert a new bulb.
X Align lamp lens : and clip it in so that it
engages.
; Retaining lugs
= Brake lamps
? Turn signal lamps
A Standing lamp/tail lamp
B Backup lamps
C Rear fog lamp
Z
104 Changing bulbs
Rear bulbs (Cab Chassis) A Brake lamps

B Tail lamps
Overview of bulb types
C Rear fog lamp
D License plate lamp
E Backup lamps
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten

Chassis (example: Cab Chassis)
screws :.
Lights Bulb type
: Perimeter lamp/stand- R 5 W
Additional lamps
ing lamp
; Tail lamps R5W Additional turn signal lamp on the roof
= Brake lamps P 21 W
? Turn signal lamps PY 21 W
A Backup lamps P 21 W
B Rear fog lamps (driver's P 21 W
side)
C License plate lamp R5W
Tail lamps
Type of lamp: P 21 W
X Undo screws : and remove lamp lens ;.
bulb holder.
X Position lamp lens ; and tighten
screws : again.
: Screws
; Lamp lens
= Perimeter lamp/standing lamp
? Turn signal lamps

Changing bulbs 105
Perimeter lamp (Cab Chassis) X Disconnect cable connector =.

X Unscrew bulb holder ;.
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into courtesy
light :.
X Connect cable connector =.
The connector locking spring must engage.
X Align courtesy light : on the side and
engage.

Interior lighting
General notes
! Have the bulbs in the overhead control
Type of lamp: W 5 W panel replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop. You could otherwise damage
the overhead control panel.
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp unit.
X Turn bulb holder ; and remove it. Front interior light
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Press the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Screw bulb holder ; into the lamp unit.
X Carefully position the lamp housing and
tighten screws :.
Courtesy lights, rear compartment
Type of lamp: K 18 W
X Switch off the interior lighting.
X Press spring catch ; in the direction of the
arrow and lift off interior light :.
X Remove bulb = from the bulb holder.
X Insert new bulb =.
X Align interior light : on the right-hand side
Bulb type: W5W and engage the spring catch.
X Press in the latching spring of courtesy
light : with a suitable implement, e.g. a
screwdriver.
X Pry off courtesy light :.
Z
106 Changing bulbs
Rear interior light X Switch off the interior lighting.

X Press in the catch springs of lamp hous-
Interior light with switch
ing : with a suitable object and pry off
lamp housing :.
X Open protective cover ?.
X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
X Insert new bulb =.
X Fold protective cover ? back into place.
X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side
and engage.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
Interior light with switch faulty, consult a qualified specialist work-

shop.
Type of lamp: K 15 W
X Switch off the interior lighting. Cargo compartment lamp
X Press in the catch springs of lamp hous-
ing : with a suitable object and pry off
lamp housing :.
X Press the contact spring of bulb holder ;
outwards and remove bulb =.
X Insert a new bulb =.
X Align lamp housing : on the left-hand side
and engage.
i Vehicles with LED lighting: if an LED is
faulty, consult a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Interior light without switch
Type of lamp: W 10 W
X Switch off the interior lighting.
X Undo screws : and remove the lamp lens.
X Press bulb ; into the bulb holder and
unscrew it counter-clockwise.
X Press new bulb ; into the bulb holder and
Interior light without switch
X Position the lamp lens and tighten
Type of lamp: K 15 W screws :.
i Vehicles with LED cargo compart-
ment lamp: if an LED is defective, consult

Windshield wipers 107
Windshield wipers X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition

lock.
Switching the windshield wiper X Turn the combination switch in the direc-
on/off
tion of arrow ; to the appropriate setting
! Do not operate the windshield wipers depending on the intensity of the rain.
when the windshield is dry, as this could X Single wipe: push the combination switch
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust briefly to the pressure point in the direction
that has collected on the windshield can of arrow :.
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when X To wipe with washer fluid: press the com-
the windshield is dry. bination switch beyond the pressure point
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield in the direction of arrow :.
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
The detent positions of the combination
use washer fluid when operating the wind-

switch correspond to the following wiper
shield wipers.
speeds:
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on 0 Windshield wipers off
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or I Intermittent wipe
other residues may be the reason for this. II Normal wipe
Clean the windshield using washer fluid III Rapid wipe
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash. i Canada only:
If the windshield wipers are switched on
! Vehicles with rain/light sensor: and you stop the vehicle, the windshield
Switch the wipers off in dry weather. Oth- wiper speed is reduced. For example, if you
erwise, dirt or optical effects may cause have selected level II and stop the vehicle,
undesired windshield wiper sweeps. This wiping continues with intermittent wipe
could then damage the windshield wiper while the vehicle is stationary. If intermit-
blades or scratch the windshield. tent wipe is selected, the intervals become
The windshield will no longer be wiped prop- longer.
erly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the Vehicles with a rain and light sensor:
wiper blades twice a year (Y page 108), ide- you can use level I as the universal setting.
ally in spring and fall. The rain and light sensor sets the appropri-
ate wiping frequency automatically,
according to the intensity of the rain. When
you stop the vehicle, levels III and II are
switched down to level I automatically.
The windshield wiper will return to the orig-
inal level when you drive faster than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
You can adjust the sensitivity of the rain and
light sensor using the on-board computer
(Y page 193).
Combination switch Information on checking the washer fluid
level can be found in the "Maintenance and
care" section (Y page 255).
Z
108 Windshield wipers
Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
off you change the wiper blade. If you release
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
We recommend that you have the wiper
blades replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
! Only hold the wiper blade by the wiper
arm. You could otherwise damage the
wiper rubber.
Combination switch The windshield will no longer be wiped prop-

: è Rear window wiper switch
erly if the wiper blades are worn. Replace the
wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring and
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
fall.
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Turn switch : to the corresponding posi-
tion
The rear window wiper switches on automat-
ically if you engage reverse gear and the wind-
shield wipers are on.
Front windshield wiper arm with wiper blade
X Fold wiper arm = away from the wind-
Replacing the wiper blades shield.
G WARNING X Set wiper blade : at right angles to the
If the windshield wipers begin to move while wiper arm.

you are changing the wiper blades, you could X Press both retaining clips ; together in
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of the direction of the arrow and swing wiper
injury. blade : away from wiper arm =.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and X Pull wiper blade : up and out of the
ignition before changing the wiper blades. retainer on wiper arm =.
X Slide new wiper blade : into the retainer
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper on wiper arm =.
arm has been folded away from the wind- X Press new wiper blade : onto wiper arm
shield.
= until you hear retaining clips ; engage.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a X Fold wiper arm = back onto the windshield
wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear
again.
window.

Windshield wipers 109
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wiper Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
jams. wiper movement. The wiper motor has switched off.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch on the windshield wipers again.

The windshield wiper There is a malfunction in the windshield wiper drive.
does not move at all. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The washer fluid com- The spray nozzles are misaligned.

ing from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles checked at a qualified specialist work-
zles no longer hits the shop.
center of the wind-
shield.
Z
110

111
Useful information ............................ 112

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 112
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 116
Adjusting the air vents ..................... 120
Operating the auxiliary heating
system ............................................... 122
Operating the cargo compartment
air vents ............................................. 133
Climate control

112 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information
This Operator's Manual describes all models

relevant to safety.
Overview of climate control systems

Climate control

Observe the recommended settings on the
following pages. Otherwise, the windows
could fog up.
Climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity in the vehicle interior and
filters undesirable substances from the air.
Climate control is only operational when the
engine is running. The system only functions
optimally when the side windows are closed.
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather. In order to cool the
vehicle more rapidly, switch climate control
to air-recirculation mode briefly. This will
speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the airflow
into the vehicle interior. For this reason,
you should always observe the interval for
replacing the filter, which is specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on
environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air
pollution, the interval may be shorter than
that stated in the Maintenance Booklet.

Overview of climate control systems 113
Heating control panel
Climate control
: Sets the temperature (Y page 117)
z Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)
; K Sets the airflow (Y page 118)
= e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)
? Sets the air distribution (Y page 117)
sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)
Information on heating
Below, you can find a number of notes and
recommendations to help you use the heating
optimally.
RSet the temperature control to the middle
level. Only change the temperature in small
increments.
ROnly use the defrosting function briefly,
until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
erwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

114 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for the air-conditioning system

Climate control
: Sets the temperature (Y page 117)

; Sets the airflow (Y page 118)
K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
= e Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 120)
? x Switches the reheat function (window air dehumidification) on/off (Y page 118)
A Sets the air distribution (Y page 117)
sz Defrosts the windshield (Y page 118)
B ¿ Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 117)
C Blower setting bar display
Information on the air-conditioning ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.

system if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could oth-
Below, you can find a number of notes and erwise fog up as no fresh air is drawn into
recommendations to help you use the air- the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
conditioning system optimally.
ROnly use the reheat function until the fog-
RSwitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-
ged up windows are clear again.
cation function. The indicator lamp above
the rocker switch lights up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Only
change the temperature in small incre-
ments.
ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshield is clear
again.

Overview of climate control systems 115
Rear-compartment heating control panel
Climate control
: i Switches the rear-compartment heating on/off (Y page 116)
; K Sets the airflow (Y page 118)
= Sets the temperature (Y page 117)
Information on rear-compartment
heating
For optimum climate control, set the temper-
ature control to the middle level. Only change
the temperature in small increments.

116 Operating the climate control system
Control panel for rear-compartment air-conditioning system

Climate control
: Sets the airflow (Y page 118)

K Increases the airflow
I Reduces the airflow
; Sets the temperature (Y page 117)
= Blower setting bar display
? i Switches the rear-compartment air conditioning on/off (Y page 116)
Information on rear-compartment air Activating/deactivating climate con-

conditioning trol via the control panel
For optimum climate control, set the temper- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
ature control to the middle level. Only change lock.
the temperature in small increments. Vehicle with heating
X To switch on: set airflow control ; down
Operating the climate control system to at least level 1 (Y page 114).
X To switch off: set airflow control ; up to
Switching the climate control on/off
the 0 position (Y page 114).
Important information Vehicle with air conditioning
When the climate control is switched off, air X To switch on: press the K button.
intake and air circulation also stop. Only use The blower speeds are shown in bars next
this setting for a brief period. Otherwise, the to the button.
windows could fog up. X To switch off: press the I button and,
after reaching the lowest blower speed,
press it again.

Operating the climate control system 117
Activating/deactivating rear-compart- Setting the temperature

ment climate control via the control
panel Increasing/reducing temperature in
the front compartment via the control
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition panel
lock.
Only change the temperature in small incre-
Vehicle with rear-compartment heating/ ments. Start at the center position, or at 72 ‡
rear-compartment air conditioning (22 †).
X To switch on/off: press the i switch. X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).
If the indicator lamp in the button lights up,
the rear-compartment heating/rear-com- X Turn temperature control : clockwise to
partment air conditioning is switched on. increase or counterclockwise to reduce the
temperature (Y page 114).
Switching the cooling with air dehu- Increasing/reducing temperature in

midification function on/off the rear compartment via the control
Climate control
panel
Important information
Only change the temperature in small incre-
If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehu- ments.
midification" function, the air inside the vehi- X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).
cle will not be cooled (in warm weather) or
X Turn rear-compartment temperature con-
dehumidified. The windows could fog up more
trol = (Y page 115) or rear-compartment
quickly.
air-conditioning system ; (Y page 116)
The cooling with air dehumidification function clockwise to increase or counterclockwise
is only available when the engine is running. to reduce the temperature.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehu-
midified according to the temperature selec- i Vehicles with additional air conditioning
ted. and heating in the rear compartment: if you
set the temperature control to the center
Condensation may appear on the underside position, only one of the two climate con-
of the vehicle when in cooling mode. This is trol systems works in the rear compart-
normal and not a sign that there is a malfunc- ment and in air-recirculation mode
tion. (Y page 120).
Switching on/off
Vehicle with air conditioning Setting the air distribution
X Press the ¿ button. Air distribution settings
cooling with air dehumidification is The air distribution symbols have the follow-
switched on. ing meanings:
m Directs air through the center and
side air vents
s Directs air to the windshield and the
z air vents

118 Operating the climate control system
q Directs air to the windshield, the air X Close the center air vents (Y page 121) and
vents and into the footwell the air outlets for the headroom and the
r Directs air to the air vents and into rear compartment (Y page 121).
the footwell X Direct the side air vents towards the side
windows and open the defroster vents for
Adjusting the side windows (Y page 121).
X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). Vehicle with air conditioning

X Set air-distribution control ? for the heat- X Set temperature control : to
ing (Y page 113) or air-conditioning system z (Y page 114).
A (Y page 114) to the corresponding sym- X Press the K button until the maximum
bol. blower output is reached.
All bars in the display next to the button
light up.
Setting the airflow X Set air-distribution control A to s
z (Y page 114).
Climate control
X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).

X Close the center air vents (Y page 121) and
X Vehicle with heating/rear-compart-
ment heating: set airflow control ; of the the air outlets for the headroom and the
rear compartment (Y page 121).
heating (Y page 113) or of the rear-com-
X Direct the side air vents towards the side
partment heating (Y page 115) to the
desired level. windows and open the defroster vents for
X Vehicle with air conditioning/rear-com-
the side windows (Y page 121).
partment air conditioning: press the
I button to reduce or the K button
to increase the airflow. Clearing condensation from the win-
The blower speeds are shown in bars next dows
to the buttons. Windows fogged up on the inside
You should only select this setting until the
Defrosting the windows windows are clear again.
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on
You can use the "defrosting" function to
the front (Y page 119) and/or rear window
defrost the windshield or to demist the inside
defroster (Y page 119) .
of the windshield and the side windows.
Only use the following settings until the win-
X Switch off air-recirculation mode
dows are clear again.
(Y page 120).
X Vehicle with window heating: switch on
the front (Y page 119) and/or rear window Vehicle with heating
defroster (Y page 119) . X Set temperature control : to a higher tem-
X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). perature (Y page 113).
Vehicle with heating X Set airflow control ; to a higher blower
setting. It should be set at least to level two
X Set temperature control : and airflow (Y page 113).
control ; to z (Y page 113).
X Set air-distribution control ? to s
X Set air-distribution control ? to s
z (Y page 113).
z (Y page 113).

Operating the climate control system 119
i If the windows still fog up, set the control X Start the engine.
as described for defrosting (Y page 118). X To switch on/off: press the z switch.
Vehicle with air conditioning The indicator lamp in the z button
comes on when the windshield heating is
X Activate cooling with air dehumidification
switched on.
(Y page 117).
X Press the ¨ button (Y page 114). If the indicator lamp in the z windshield
The reheat function is switched on. The heating button flashes, the on-board voltage
indicator lamp in the switch lights up. is too low. The windshield heating has
switched off prematurely or cannot be acti-
To switch off the reheat function, press the
vated.
¨ button again. The indicator lamp in
the button goes out. X Switch off any consumers that are not
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
Windows fogged up on the outside lighting.
If enough on-board voltage is available again
You should only select this setting until the within 30 seconds, the windshield heating
Climate control
windshield is clear again. automatically switches on again. It otherwise
X Switch on the windshield wipers remains switched off.
(Y page 107).
X Switch on climate control (Y page 116). Rear window defroster
X Adjust air distribution to the footwell
(Y page 117).
X Close the air vents (Y page 120).
Window heating
Windshield heater
Rear window defroster switch

The rear window defroster consumes a lot of
power. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the window is clear. The rear window
heating otherwise only switches off automat-
ically after 12 minutes.
X Start the engine.
X To switch on/off: press the | switch.
Windshield heater switch
The indicator lamp in the | button
The windshield heater consumes a lot of comes on when the rear window defroster
power. You should therefore switch it off as is switched on.
soon as the windshield is clear. The wind-
shield heating otherwise switches off auto- If the indicator lamp in the | rear window
matically after 5 minutes. defroster button flashes, the on-board volt-
age is too low. The rear window defroster has

120 Adjusting the air vents
switched off prematurely or cannot be acti- or rear-compartment air conditioning sys-

vated. tem ; (Y page 116) to the center position.
X Switch off any consumers that are not Only one of the two climate control sys-
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior tems in the rear compartment is activated
lighting. and is in air-recirculation mode.
X To deactivate: turn the temperature con-
If enough on-board voltage is available again
within 30 seconds, the rear window heating trol of rear-compartment heating =
automatically switches on again. It otherwise (Y page 115) or rear-compartment air-con-
remains switched off. ditioning system ; (Y page 116) clock-
wise or counterclockwise. Only change the
temperature in small increments.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
Adjusting the air vents
Climate control
When you switch on air-recirculation mode,

the windows could fog up more quickly, in G WARNING
particular at low outside temperatures. Only Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
switch on air-recirculation mode for a short vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
time. the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
You can deactivate the intake of fresh air if is a risk of injury.
unpleasant odors enter the vehicle from out- Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
side. The air inside the vehicle will only be maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
circulated. lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
Heating/air-conditioning system
The center and side air vents are adjustable.
Air-recirculation mode switches off automat-
On vehicles with a rear-compartment air-con-
ically after about 10 to 30 minutes, depending
ditioning system, you can also adjust the air
on the outside temperature.
vents in the roof duct.
X To switch on/off: press the e switch.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
the sliders of the center air vents to the
If the indicator lamp in the e button
center position.
lights up, air-recirculation mode is activa-
ted. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
Rear-compartment heating/rear-com- please observe the following notes:
partment air conditioning Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood free of
blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.
On vehicles with a rear-compartment heating
Rnever cover the vents or the ventilation
and air-conditioning system, you can acti-
vate/deactivate air-recirculation mode for grilles in the vehicle interior.
the rear-compartment climate control.
X To activate: set the temperature control of
rear-compartment heating = (Y page 115)

Adjusting the air vents 121
Setting the center air vents Adjusting air vents for the passenger
compartment
: Center air vent, left

; Center air vent, right Air vents (example: right-hand side of the vehicle)
= Thumbwheel for center air vent, right You can use the air vents to ventilate the
Climate control
? Thumbwheel for center air vent, left vehicle interior on the left and right, in the rear
and the headroom.
X To open: turn thumbwheel = to the left or
thumbwheel ? to the right. X To open: for the right-hand side of the vehi-
X To close: turn thumbwheel = to the right

cle, turn thumbwheel ; to the left or for
or thumbwheel ? to the left. the left-hand side of the vehicle, thumb-
wheel : to the right.
X To close: for the right-hand side of the
Setting the side air vents vehicle, turn thumbwheel ; to the right or
for the left-hand side of the vehicle, thumb-
wheel : to the left.
Adjusting the air vents in the roof duct

! Always leave at least one air vent open.
If the rear-compartment air conditioning is
switched on and all the air vents are closed,
the air-conditioning system may be dam-
aged.
Side air vent (example: right-hand side of the vehi-

cle)
X To open: turn thumbwheel = of side air
vents : upward.
X To close: turn thumbwheel = of side air
vents : downward.
i If the ® symbol can be seen on thumb-
wheel =, defroster vent ; is open.
Z
122 Operating the auxiliary heating system
On vehicles with rear-compartment air con- When the auxiliary heating is switched on,
ditioning, adjustable air vents are integrated make sure that:
into the roof duct.
Rno flammable materials come into contact
X To adjust the airflow: open or close the with hot vehicle components
air flap in air vents : as needed. Rthe exhaust gas can escape from the
X To adjust the air distribution: turn air exhaust pipe unhindered
vent : to the desired position. Rthe exhaust gas does not come into contact
with flammable materials.
Operating the auxiliary heating sys- ! Turn on the auxiliary heating at least once
tem a month for approximately 10 minutes. The
auxiliary heating could otherwise be dam-
aged.
G DANGER ! Make sure that the flow of hot air is not
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate blocked. The auxiliary heating will other-
Climate control
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases wise overheat and switch off.
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
Your vehicle may be equipped with either an
vehicle. This is the case, for example in
auxiliary hot-water heater or an auxiliary
enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets stuck in
warm-air heater. Adjustment and operation of
snow. There is a risk of fatal injury.
the:
Switch the auxiliary heating off in enclosed
Rhot-water auxiliary heater is done via the
spaces without extraction systems, e.g. in
garages. If the vehicle is stuck in snow and on-board computer and with the auxiliary
you have to leave the auxiliary heating run- heating button in the control panel
ning, keep the exhaust pipe and the area (Y page 123) or with the remote control
around the vehicle free of snow. To ensure an (Y page 125).
adequate supply of fresh air, open a window Rauxiliary warm-air heater is done via the
on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into timer above the overhead control panel
the wind. (Y page 127).
The auxiliary heating works independently of
G WARNING the engine and supplements the climate con-
When the auxiliary heating is switched on, trol system in the vehicle. The auxiliary heat-
parts of the vehicle can become very hot, e.g. ing heats the air in the vehicle interior to the
the exhaust system. temperature set.
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or If your vehicle is equipped with a hot-water
twigs may ignite if they come into contact auxiliary heater, the auxiliary heating also
with: keeps the coolant warm. This way, the load on
the engine is minimized and fuel is saved.
Rhot parts of the exhaust system
The heater booster function (Y page 130) of
Rthe exhaust gas itself
the auxiliary heating supports the climate
There is a risk of fire. control system when the engine is running
and the outside temperature is low.
You can use the auxiliary heating at an out-
side temperature of up to 39 ‡ (4 †). At an
outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) the

Operating the auxiliary heating system 123
auxiliary heating system and the heater boos- tion of charge depends on the outside tem-
ter function switch off automatically. perature and on the electrical consumers
switched on.
Heating time Outside tempera- Engine runtime

ture
The heating time when operating the auxiliary
heating with the vehicle is stationary without Above 32 ‡ (0 †) at least 10 minutes
the engine running depends on the outside 32 ‡ (0 †) to 14 ‡ at least 15 minutes
temperature and the electrical consumers (Ò10 †)
switched on.
Below 14 ‡ (Ò10 †) at least 20 minutes
Outside Heating Possible
tempera- time startup proce-
ture dures
Before switching on
Above Approx. 6 X Check the fuel level and top up if necessary.
Climate control
23 ‡ 20 minutes The auxiliary heating is operated directly
(Ò5 †) using the vehicle's fuel. The tank must be at
23 ‡ Approx. 3 least a quarter full to ensure that the aux-
(Ò5 †) to 40 minutes iliary heating functions.
5‡ X Switch on climate control (Y page 116).
(Ò15 †) X Set the temperature control to the desired
temperature (Y page 117).
Below 5 ‡ Approx. 2
X Set the air distribution as required
(Ò15 †) 50 minutes
(Y page 117).
X Open the center (Y page 121) and side air
You can then switch on the auxiliary heating
again. vents (Y page 121) and set them to the
middle position.
If you do not start the engine for a while, the
total duration of heating is limited to a maxi- i The auxiliary heating automatically
mum of 120 minutes to protect the starter switches to heater booster mode after the
battery. Switching on the auxiliary heating is engine is started.
then automatically disabled. You can, for
example, switch on the auxiliary heating with-
out the engine running if the outside temper- Operating with the button (control
ature is Ò5 ‡ (Ò20 †) a maximum of two panel)
times. If you try it again, the indicator lamps in
the y button (Y page 123) flash alter-
nately for approximately 2 minutes to signal
switch-on interlock. The auxiliary heating can-
not be switched on without starting the
engine.
When the condition of charge of the starter
battery is sufficient again, the switch-on inter-
lock will be deactivated. To charge the starter
battery, let the engine run. The engine run
time required to reach the necessary condi-
Z
i Switch the heater booster function on or The switch-on time selected is displayed.
off with the ¢ button (Y page 130). X Wait 10 seconds for the standard display to
X To activate the auxiliary heating sys- appear.
tem: press and hold the upper section of The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
the y switch for longer than 2 seconds. indicator lamp in the y button lights up.
The red indicator lamp in the button lights If you do not preselect a switch-on time,
up. The auxiliary heating heats or ventilates and --:-- is shown in the display, this
the interior to the temperature that you means that the automatic switch-on mode
have set. The blower switches to the first is switched off. The yellow indicator lamp in
level. the y button goes out.
X To switch off auxiliary heating: press the
upper section of the y button. On-board computer with steering wheel
or buttons
X Turn the key in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 0.
Climate control
The red indicator lamp in the button goes

out. The auxiliary heating operates for
another 2 minutes and then switches off
automatically.

Selecting a switch-on time lock.
X Press the y button.
The Aux. heat submenu is shown in the
You can use the on-board computer to define display.
up to three switch-on times, one of which can If no switch-on time has been selected, the
be selected. selected switch-on time is highlighted or
The yellow indicator lamp in the y button Timer off is highlighted.
goes out after 30 minutes, if you: i You can also access the Aux. heat. sub-
Rhave selected the switch-on time and menu via the Settings (Y page 188)
Rturn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock menu.
X Use the W or X button on the steer-
On-board computer without steering ing wheel to select the desired switch-on
wheel buttons time.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Use the Timer off setting to deactivate
lock. automatic switch-on.
X Press the V button on the steering
X Press the y button.
The y symbol flashes in the display. wheel.
The switch-on time is selected. The yellow
or
indicator lamp in the y button lights up.
X Press the 4 menu button on the instru-
ment cluster repeatedly until the y
symbol flashes in the display.
X Use the f or g buttons on the instrument
cluster to select the switch-on time 1 to 3.

Setting the switch-on time The remote control has a maximum range of
approximately 600 meters. This range is
X Use the same method to select a switch-on reduced by:
time as described in the "Preselecting a
Rsources of interference
switch-on time" section.
Rsolid objects between the remote control
On-board computer without steering
and the vehicle
wheel buttons
Rthe remote control being in an unfavorable
X Press the 9 reset button on the instru- position in relation to the vehicle
ment cluster. Rtransmitting from an enclosed space
The hour display flashes.
X Use the f and g buttons on the instru-
Overview of the remote control
ment cluster to set the hours.
X Press the 9 reset button
The minute display flashes.
X Use the f and g buttons to set the
Climate control
minutes.
The switch-on time is set and selected.
On-board computer with steering wheel
buttons
X Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
The display shows the Hours menu. : Indicator lamp
X Use the W and X buttons on the
; To confirm settings
steering wheel to set the hours.
= To switch the remote control on/off, set
X Press the 9 button.
the operating duration or end or cancel
The display shows the Minutes menu. settings
X Use the W and X buttons to set the
Indicator lamp : lights up in various ways to
minutes.
show different operating modes:
X Press the V button.
The switch-on time is set and selected. Signaling Meaning
Lights up red Remote control switched
on
Operation with the remote control
Data transfer
Flashes red Auxiliary heating switched
You can switch the auxiliary heating on/off
off
and set the operating duration using the
remote control. You can use up to 4 remote Lights up Auxiliary heating switched
control units on the vehicle. These must be green on
synchronized for the receiver in your vehicle
(Y page 126).
Z
Signaling Meaning When indicator lamp : flashes red, the

auxiliary heating is switched off.
Flashes green Change operating duration
active Changing the operating duration
Flashes alter- Remote control in syn- X Switch on the remote control.
nately red and chronizing mode X When indicator lamp : flashes red, press
green Ü and b simultaneously.
Indicator lamp : flashes green.
i When the remote control battery is weak, X Press the Ü button repeatedly until the
indicator lamp : flashes red rapidly. desired operating duration is shown.
Replace the remote control battery R20 minutes
(Y page 130).
Indicator lamp : flashes green twice.
You can find further information on the lamp R30 minutes
status in the "Problems with the auxiliary
heating" section (Y page 132). Indicator lamp : flashes green three
Climate control
times.
Switching the remote control on/off R40 minutes
Indicator lamp : flashes green four
The remote control switches to standby mode times.
after 10 seconds. Indicator lamp : goes out.
X Press the b button.
X To switch on: press and hold the Ü
During data transmission, indicator
button until indicator lamp : lights up red. lamp : lights up red.
If a connection between the remote control
If indicator lamp : emits two long, green
and the receiver in the vehicle has been
flashes, the selected operating duration is
established and indicator lamp ::
stored.
Rflashes red, the auxiliary heating is
i If no adjustment is made, indicator
switched off.
lamp : flashes six times and the remote
Rlights up green, the auxiliary heating is
control goes into standby mode.
switched on.
X To switch off: press and hold the Ü Synchronizing the remote control
button until indicator lamp : goes out.
X Press the y auxiliary heating button in
the control panel (Y page 123) for longer
Switching the auxiliary heating on/off than 10 seconds.
X Switch on the remote control. When you press and hold the y button,
X To switch on: when indicator lamp : the red indicator lamp lights up in the but-
flashes red, press the b button. ton.
During data transmission, indicator When the red indicator lamp in the y
lamp : lights up red. button flashes, the receiver in the vehicle is
When indicator lamp : lights up green, the ready for synchronizing.
auxiliary heating is switched on. X Press and hold the Ü remote control
X To switch off: when indicator lamp : button until indicator lamp : lights up red.
lights up green, press the b button. If there is an active connection between the
During data transmission, indicator remote control and the receiver, indicator
lamp : lights up red. lamp : flashes alternately red and green.

The remote control is in synchronizing Rset the operating duration from 10to
mode. 120 minutes or to continuous operation
i If you press the Ü button again on the Rset the heating level (preselected temper-
remote control after starting synchroniza- ature) to a range between 10 and 30
tion, you will only synchronize this remote
control unit with the receiver. Any other Timer overview
remote control units that were synchron-
ized will be cleared. Indicator lamp :
flashes alternately red and green (very
slowly).
X Press the b button on the remote con-
trol.
During data transmission, indicator
lamp : lights up red.
When remote control indicator lamp :
Climate control
emits two long green flashes, the selected
operating time is synchronized. The indica-
tor lamp in the y auxiliary heating but- Timer above the overhead control panel
ton goes out. : Program column
G Sets preselection memory 1 – 3
(Y page 129)
Operation with the timer Sets weekday (Mon. – Sun.)
(Y page 128)
Important safety notes Menu bar
;
This is only for vehicles with a hot-water aux- y Activates/deactivates immediate
iliary heater. heating mode (Y page 128)
G DANGER B Sets the program times
(Y page 129)
If a switch-on time has been selected, the
auxiliary heating switches on automatically. Ñ Sets the day, time and the operating
duration (Y page 128)
RIf the ventilation is insufficient, poisonous
exhaust gases can collect, in particular car- ß Sets the heating level
bon monoxide. This is the case in enclosed (Y page 129)
spaces, for example. There is a risk of fatal = Display panel for: time, heating level
injuries. and operating duration
RIf highly flammable substances or flamma- à Continuous operation mode active
ble materials are nearby, there is a risk of a ß Heating level set
risk of fire and explosion. ? Selects options in program column : or
Always deactivate the preselected switch-on menu bar ; (forwards)
times if you stop the vehicle in such or similar Increases values
situations. A Confirms a selection or setting
B Status bar
Use the timer to:
y Heating mode activated
Ractivate/deactivate immediate heating C Activates the timer
mode Cancels or ends settings in a menu
Rset up to three switch-on times
Z
D Selects options in program column : or X Using the Û or â button, set the

menu bar ; (backwards) minute value or select the à symbol for
Reduces values continuous operation.
Activating the timer The operating duration is stored. The time
is shown.
The timer switches to standby mode after
10 seconds. The display goes off.
Activating/deactivating immediate
X Press and hold the Ü button until the heating mode
menu bar appears in the display and the
time is shown. X To switch on: press the Û or â but-
ton until the y symbol in the menu bar
Setting the day, time and operating flashes.
duration X Press the b button.
The operation duration flashes in the dis-
You must reset the day, time, and default play.
Climate control
value for the operating duration:

i You can preset the default value that is
Rduring initial operation shown (Y page 128).
Rafter a voltage supply interruption (e.g. if X Using the Û or â button, set the
the battery has been disconnected) minute value (10 – 120) or select the à
Rafter a malfunction. symbol for continuous operation.
You can find further information on malfunc- X Press the b button.
tions in the "Problems with the auxiliary heat- Immediate heating mode is activated. The
ing" section (Y page 132). time and the y symbol appear.
X Press the Û or â button until the X To switch off: press the Û or â
Ñ symbol in menu bar ; flashes. button until the y symbol flashes in the
X Press the b button. menu bar, and then press the b button.
In program column :, the day selected Immediate heating mode is deactivated.
flashes. The y symbol disappears.
X Press the Û or â button to set the The auxiliary heating operates for another
desired day. two minutes and then switches off auto-
X Press the b button. matically.
The day selected is stored. The hour setting i If you switch off the ignition while imme-
of the clock flashes. diate heating mode (operating duration
X In the same way, set the hour and subse- 10– 120 minutes) is active, immediate
quently the minutes, then confirm by press- heating mode is also switched off. The aux-
ing the b button. iliary heating operates for another
The time is stored. Program column : dis- two minutes and then switches off auto-
appears and the operating duration matically.
flashes. If you have set continuous operation as the
i The operating duration set is the default operating duration and you switch off the
setting for immediate heating mode. You ignition, the auxiliary heating switches off
can set the operating duration from 10 to automatically after about 15 minutes. If, in
120 minutes or activate continuous opera- the remaining time, the ignition is switched
tion. on again, continuous operation of the aux-
iliary heating continues.

Setting the preselection time X Set the day and time as described in the
"Setting the day, time and operating dura-
G WARNING tion" section (Y page 128).
The auxiliary heating must not be operated if The preselection time is stored. The pro-
there are highly flammable substances gram column disappears. In the display
nearby or in enclosed spaces without an panel, the on message and the y sym-
extraction system. Make sure that the auxili- bol appear.
ary heating is not switched on automatically X Press the b button.
by the timer in such places. If this possibility The operating duration flashes.
exists, deactivate the respective programmed
X Press the Û or â button to set the
time.
minute value (10 – 120).
You can set three preselection times using X Press the b button.
the timer. The operating duration for the preselection
Observe that when setting the preselection time is saved. The time and number of the
time, this does not correspond to the switch- selected preselection memory are shown.
Climate control
on time but to the switch-off or departure i The preselection memory that will be acti-
time. The auxiliary heating system starts up vated next is underlined. Additionally, the
automatically and runs for the operating dura- day that is set appears.
tion set prior to departure.
Example: For a planned departure time of Deactivating the preselection time
7:00 a.m., you should also set the preselec- X Carry out the steps as described in the
tion time to 7:00 a.m. If the operating dura- "Setting the preselection time" section.
tion is preset to 40 minutes, for example, the
auxiliary heating starts up at 6:20 a.m. If the y symbol in the status bar is shown:
If an identical time (time and day) is set in the X Press the Û or â button until the off
preselection memory, only the last time set is message in the display panel is shown.
saved. X Press the b button.
After a malfunction or if the battery has been The preselection time is deactivated. The
disconnected, you must set the preselection time is shown.
times again. You can find further information
on malfunctions in the "Problems with the Setting the heating level
auxiliary heating" section (Y page 132).
You can set the heating level to a range
X Press the Û or â button until the
between 10 and 30.
B symbol in the menu bar flashes.
The heating level corresponds to a preselec-
tion temperature for the vehicle interior. This
In the program column, the G preselec-
is a guide value and may, depending on the
tion memory numbers appear. The selected
outside temperature, differ from the actual
preselection memory flashes.
vehicle interior temperature.
X Press the Û or â button to select the
X Press the Û or â button until the
desired preselection memory.
ß symbol in the menu bar flashes.
The preselection memory is selected. The
The heating level display flashes.
days are shown.
Z
X Using the Û and â buttons, set the will be switched on the next time the engine is
desired heating level to a range between 10 started (memory function).
and 30. i Switch the auxiliary heating on or off with
X Press the b button. the y button (Y page 123).
The heating level is set and the y sym-
X To switch on/off: press the ¢ switch.
bol appears.
the heater booster function is switched on.
Switching the heater booster function After switching off, the auxiliary heating oper-
on/off ates for about another 2 minutes and then
switches off automatically.
Replacing the remote control battery

G WARNING
Climate control
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-

ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
Vehicles with auxiliary heating
immediately.
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
Vehicles with heater booster function environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
At outside temperatures of up to 39 ‡ (4 †)
batteries to a qualified spe-
the fuel-fired heater booster system heats the
cialist workshop or a special
vehicle interior as quickly as possible when
collection point for used bat-
the engine is running.
teries.
The auxiliary heating automatically switches
to heater booster mode after the engine is If the indicator lamp on the remote control
started. flashes red rapidly, the remote control battery
At an outside temperature above 39 ‡ (4 †) is discharged. You should replace the remote
the auxiliary heating system and the heater control battery.
booster function switch off automatically. You need a battery of the type CR2430, which
If you switch off the engine without switching can be obtained at any qualified specialist
off the heater booster function, the system workshop.

X Remove battery cover ; using a suitable

implement, e.g. a coin, by turning it coun-
ter-clockwise.
X Check the seal on battery cover ; for
damage and, if necessary, replace.
Climate control
X Remove old batteries =.
X Insert new, clean battery = into the bat-
tery tray with the positive pole facing
upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
X Position battery cover ; so that mark :
on the raised area points between two
recesses ?.
X Turn battery cover ; using a suitable
implement, e.g. a coin, clockwise to the
stop.
X Check all the functions of the remote con-
trol (Y page 125).
Z
Problems with the auxiliary heating

The indicator lamp on The remote control battery is discharged. Data transmission is not
the remote control possible.
flashes red rapidly. X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130).
The indicator lamp on There is no connection between the remote control and the
the remote control receiver in the vehicle.
flashes red and green in X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, e.g. hold the
rapid succession. remote control higher or to the side.
X Move closer.
If you cannot establish a connection and the auxiliary heating is

switched on, it can then only be deactivated using the y button
(Y page 123).
Climate control
or
Several remote controls are being used at the same time.
X Switch on the remote control again after a short while
(Y page 126).
or
The remote control is not synchronized.

X Synchronize the remote control (Y page 126).
The indicator lamp on The remote control is being synchronized.

the remote control X Wait until the remote control synchronization process is com-
slowly flashes red and plete (Y page 126).
green alternately.
The remote control for The remote control battery is discharged.
the auxiliary heating X Replace the remote control battery (Y page 130).
cannot be switched on.
The auxiliary heating The outside temperature is above 39 ‡ (4 †). The auxiliary heating
does not switch on. switches off automatically.
The auxiliary heating The fuel tank is less than Õ full. The auxiliary heating switches off
switches off automati- automatically.
cally and/or cannot be X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
switched on. X Then, start the auxiliary heating several times until the fuel lines
are full.
or

Operating the cargo compartment air vents 133

The low-voltage protection system integrated in the control unit
switches off the auxiliary heating because the on-board voltage is
less than 10 V.
X Have the alternator and battery checked.
or
The fuse is blown.

X Replace the fuse; see the "Fuse allocation" supplement.
X Have the cause of the blown fuse determined at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
or
A malfunction has occurred.
Climate control
X Switch the ignition on and off twice.
If the auxiliary heating still cannot be switched on, the heating

device is faulty.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The auxiliary heating is The coolant level is too low.

overheated. X Check the coolant level and add more coolant if necessary
(Y page 253).
Operating the cargo compartment air X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
vents lock.
X To activate and extract air: press the
upper section of the ´ switch.
The roof ventilator removes used air from
the cargo compartment.
X To activate and ventilate: press the lower
section of the · switch.
The roof ventilator feeds fresh air into the
cargo compartment.
X To switch off: set the switch to the middle
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with a roof venti-

lator, you can ventilate and extract air from
the cargo compartment.
Z
134

135

Breaking-in notes .............................. 136
Driving ............................................... 136
Automatic transmission ................... 142
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 145
Parking ............................................... 149
Driving tips ........................................ 151
Driving systems ................................ 159
Working mode ................................... 172
Towing a trailer ................................. 173

136 Driving
Useful information drive train on your vehicle have been

replaced.
your vehicle that were available at the time of Driving
Driving and parking
going to print. Country-specific variations are Important safety notes

equipped with all of the described functions. G WARNING
This also applies to systems and functions If you switch off the ignition while driving,
relevant to safety. safety-relevant functions are only available
Read the information on qualified specialist with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
workshops (Y page 25). for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
Breaking-in notes of an accident.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
New or replaced brake pads and brake disks G WARNING

only reach their optimum braking effect after If the parking brake has not been fully
a few 100 miles (a few 100 kilometers). Until released when driving, the parking brake can:
then, compensate for this by applying greater
Roverheat and cause a fire
force to the brake pedal.
Rlose its hold function.
For the service life and economy of your vehi-
cle it is crucial that you break in the engine There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
with due care. the parking brake fully before driving off.
RTherefore, protect the engine for the first
If you park the vehicle for more than
1000 miles (1500 km) by driving at varying
three weeks:
vehicle and engine speeds.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle and high Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
engine speeds during this period, e.g. driv- Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or
ing at full throttle. Do not exceed Ø of the Rswitch off the electrical system using the
maximum speed for each gear. battery main switch (Y page 137) and
RDo not change down a gear manually in Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
order to brake. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator condition of charge every three weeks, since
pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- standby power consumption can drain the
down). battery. If the battery voltage is lower than
RThe shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 should only be 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-
engaged when driving slowly, e.g. when wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-
driving in mountainous terrain. tive discharging.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-
the engine speed gradually and accelerate ing and charging the batteries under "Battery"
the vehicle to full speed. (Y page 258). You can obtain information
about trickle chargers from a qualified spe-
i You should also observe these notes on cialist workshop.
breaking-in if the engine or parts of the

Driving 137
Battery isolating switch

! Make sure that the key is in position 0 in
the ignition lock and wait at least 20 sec-
Driving and parking

onds before disconnecting or connecting
the battery isolating switch. You could oth-
erwise damage electrical system compo-
nents.
You can use the battery isolating switch to
disconnect the power supply to all your vehi- Battery isolating switch in the driver's footwell, on
cle's consumers. This will prevent uncontrol- the right-hand side next to the accelerator pedal
led battery discharge caused by off-load cur- X Remove the key from the ignition lock and
rent consumption. wait for about 20 seconds.
If your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary X Press button ; in the direction of the
battery in the engine compartment, you will arrow and hold.
need to disconnect both batteries. Only then X Pull connector : from the earth pin.
is the electrical system fully disconnected X Clamp connector : under the accelerator
from the power supply.
pedal so that it cannot make contact with
i Only switch the vehicle to de-energized the earth pin.
using the battery main switch if: All starter battery consumers are discon-
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
nected from the power supply.
period
Rit is absolutely necessary Switching on the power supply
After the power supply has been activated,
you will need to reset the side windows
(Y page 79).
Switching off the power supply

! When you clamp the connector under the
accelerator pedal, make sure that the con-
nector does not become damaged or dirty.
It may otherwise not be possible to restore
the electrical connection when the parts
are reassembled. X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
X Press connector : onto earth pin ; until
you feel it engage and the lock inhibitor is
released.
Connector : must be in full contact with
earth pin ;.
All consumers are reconnected to the DC
power supply.
Z
138 Driving
Key positions operation, care and maintenance should

be observed.
X Rectify any noticeable defects before com-
mencing the journey.
Driving and parking
Checks in the vehicle

Emergency equipment/first-aid kit
X Check the equipment to make sure that it is
accessible, complete and ready for use.
The first aid and breakdown assistance equip-
ment is in the front door stowage compart-
g To insert/remove the key, to lock the
ments and behind the driver's seat.
steering wheel
1 To unlock the steering wheel, power sup- Vehicle lighting
ply for some consumers (e.g. the radio) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
2 To switch on the ignition. Power supply for lock.
all consumers, preglow and drive position X Check the lighting system with the aid of a
3 To start the engine second person.
On vehicles with a battery main switch, you X Replace defective bulbs (Y page 99).
must first switch on the power supply
(Y page 137).
Before driving off
i To unlock the steering, move the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key to posi- G WARNING
tion 1. Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
Preparing for a journey ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a
Visual check of the vehicle exterior risk of an accident.
Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that
X In particular, check the following compo- they do not get into the driver's footwell.
nents on the vehicle, and on the trailer as When using floormats or carpets, make sure
necessary: that they are properly secured so that they do
Rlicense plates, vehicle lighting, turn sig- not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not place
nals, brake lamps and wiper blades for several floormats or carpets on top of one
dirt and damage another.
Rtires and wheels for firm seating, correct
tire pressure and general condition G WARNING
Rtrailer tow hitch for play and security Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
The trailer coupling is one of the most of the pedals, e.g.:
important vehicle parts with regard to Rshoes with thick soles
road safety. The separate instructions Rshoes with high heels
issued by the manufacturer pertaining to
Rslippers

Driving 139
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct

usage of the pedals.
X Secure the load as per the loading guide-

lines (Y page 240).
Driving and parking

X Make sure that the floormats and carpets
are properly secured so that they cannot
slip and obstruct the pedals.
X Close all doors.
Gearshift pattern
Starting the engine j Park position with parking lock
G WARNING k Reverse gear
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust i Neutral
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling h Drive
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There XMove the selector lever to position P.
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave The display in the instrument cluster shows
the engine running in enclosed spaces with- P:
out sufficient ventilation.
Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal (Y page 187)

when starting the engine. Ron vehicles without steering wheel but-
tons (Y page 182)
X Before starting the engine, make sure that:
Rall the doors are closed.
i You can also start the engine in neutral N.
Rall the vehicle occupants are wearing X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
their seat belts correctly. lock.
Rthe parking brake is applied. The % preglow indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up briefly.
i If you depress the brake pedal before
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes
starting the engine, the pedal travel is short
and pedal resistance is high. out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition
lock and release it as soon as the engine is
If you depress the brake pedal again after
running.
starting the engine, pedal travel and resist-
ance will be back to normal again. i You can start the engine without preglow
when the engine is warm.
The preglow system is malfunctioning if the
% preglow indicator lamp lights up for
approximately 1 minute:
Rafter the ignition is switched on
Rwhile the engine is running
At extremely low outside temperatures you
may then no longer be able to start the
engine. Have the malfunction rectified at a
Z
140 Driving
i Depending on the equipment installed, You can also deactivate the automatic lock-
the vehicle either automatically locks cen- ing feature (Y page 71).
trally after switching on the ignition or after
pulling away. The locking knobs in the
doors drop down. Reverse warning device
Driving and parking
You can open the doors from the inside at

G WARNING
any time.
Other road users may ignore or fail to hear the
Automatic door locking can be deactivated warning tone of the reverse warning feature.
(Y page 71). There is a risk of injury if you fail to ensure that
the area in which you are maneuvering is
clear.
Driving off
Make sure that there are no persons or
G WARNING objects in the area in which you are maneu-
If the engine speed is above the idling speed vering. It may be necessary to enlist the help
and you engage transmission position D or R, of a second person when maneuvering.
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
The reverse warning feature is a system
a risk of an accident.
designed to assist you in ensuring the safety
When engaging transmission position D or R, of other road users.
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
A warning signal sounds to alert other road
not simultaneously accelerate.
users when reverse gear is engaged. The vol-
! Only shift into reverse gear R when the ume of the warning tone can be reduced for
vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could night-time driving.
damage the transmission. X To reduce the volume of the warning
tone: engage reverse gear twice in quick
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
succession.
depressed.
The selector lever lock is released. The warning tone is now quieter.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R. i The warning tone sounds at a normal vol-
On vehicles with a reverse warning feature, ume by default. The volume of the warning
when reverse gear is engaged a warning tone has to be reduced each time you
tone sounds to alert other road users engage reverse gear if necessary.
(Y page 140).
X Release the parking brake (Y page 150).
The c indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i After pulling away or switching on the

ignition, the vehicle automatically locks
centrally. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.

Driving 141
Problems with the engine

The engine does not There is air in the fuel system.
start. X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
Driving and parking

The starter motor can attempting to start the engine again.
be heard. X Start the engine again.
Please bear in mind that lengthy and frequent starting attempts
will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine does not The fuel tank has been run dry.
start. X Refuel the vehicle.
The starter motor can
If you drive until the fuel tank is completely empty, air may get into
be heard. The reserve
the fuel system. If the engine does not start after refueling, bleed
fuel warning lamp is lit
the fuel system as follows:
and the fuel gage is at
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition for approximately
0.
10 seconds.
X Start the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
If the engine does not start:

X Wait approximately 2 minutes.
X Restart the engine continuously for a maximum of 60 seconds.
X If the engine still fails start, do not continue trying to start it.
The vehicle cannot be The exhaust gas aftertreatment is faulty, an emission-relevant

driven at a speed malfunction has occurred or the DEF reserve has been used up.
exceeding 5 mph This malfunction or defect can damage the exhaust gas after-
(8 km/h). treatment.
The yellow ; engine X Observe the messages in the display:
diagnostic lamp and Ron vehicles without steering-wheel buttons (Y page 200)
the yellow å DEF
Ron vehicles with steering-wheel buttons (Y page 211) and
indicator lamp2 light
(Y page 211).
up.
The engine does not The battery isolating switch is switched off.
start. X Switch on the power supply (Y page 137).
The starter motor can-
not be heard.
2 Only vehicles without steering-wheel buttons.
Z
142 Automatic transmission

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low. The battery is too weak or dis-
start. charged.
The starter motor can- X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).
Driving and parking
not be heard.
If the engine cannot be jump-started, the starter motor is faulty.
The engine does not The battery is discharged or faulty.

start. X Check the battery for damage.
The starter motor can- X Charge the battery (Y page 263).
not be heard.
Automatic transmission Selector lever

G WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission j Park position with parking lock

may roll only briefly in the neutral position k Reverse gear
N. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g. i Neutral
when being towed, will result in transmis- h Drive
sion damage. The display in the instrument cluster shows
i Be sure to observe the instructions in the the present selector lever position or the cur-
"Tow-starting and towing away" section rent shift range:
(Y page 277). Ron vehicles with steering wheel buttons
(Y page 187)
Ron vehicles without steering wheel buttons
(Y page 182)

Automatic transmission 143
Selector lever positions Changing gear
B Park position The 5-speed automatic transmission adapts

to your individual driving style by continu-
This prevents the vehicle from roll- ously adjusting its shift points. These shift
ing away when stopped. Only move point adjustments take into account the cur-
Driving and parking

the selector lever to P if the vehicle rent operating and driving conditions. If the
is stationary. operating or driving conditions change, the
You can only remove the key when automatic transmission reacts by adjusting
the selector lever is in this position. the gearshift program.
The selector lever is locked in posi- When the selector lever is in position D, the
tion P if the key is removed. automatic transmission selects the individual
The parking lock should not be gears automatically. This depends on:
used as a brake when parking.
Rany restriction in the shift range
Always apply the parking brake as
(Y page 144)
well once you have parked the vehi-
cle. Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
C Reverse gear
Only move the selector lever to R
when the vehicle is stationary. Touchshift
A Neutral When the selector lever is in position D, you
No power is transmitted from the can perform gearshifts yourself.
engine to the drive wheels. Releas- X To shift down: press the selector lever to
ing the brakes will allow you to the left towards D–.
move the vehicle freely, e.g. by The automatic transmission shifts to the
pushing. next gear down, depending on the gear cur-
Do not move the selector lever to N rently engaged. The shift range is also
while driving. The automatic trans- restricted.
mission could otherwise be dam- i The automatic transmission does not shift
aged. down if you press the selector lever
If ASR is deactivated or ESP® has towards D– while traveling at too high a
malfunctioned: only move the speed. This protects the engine from over-
selector lever to N if the vehicle is revving.
in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy X To shift up: briefly press the selector lever
roads. to the right towards D+.
7 Drive The automatic transmission shifts to the
The automatic transmission next gear up, depending on the current
changes gear itself. All forward gearshift program. This also extends the
gears are available. shift range.
You can influence the gearshifts
and shift gears yourself or limit the
shift range.
Z
144 Automatic transmission
X To derestrict the shift range: press and Driving tips

hold the selector lever towards D+ until D
appears in the display again. Accelerator pedal position
The automatic transmission shifts from the Your style of driving influences how the auto-
current shift range directly to D. matic transmission shifts gear:
Driving and parking
X To select the optimum shift range: press

Rlittlethrottle: early upshifts
and hold the selector lever to the left
Rlots of throttle: later upshifts
towards D–.
The automatic transmission will shift to a
Kickdown
range which allows easy acceleration and
deceleration. To do this, the automatic Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
transmission will shift down one or more X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
gears.
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to the
next gear down, depending on the engine
Shift ranges speed.
When the selector lever is in position D you X Ease off on the accelerator pedal once the
can restrict or derestrict the shift range for desired speed is reached.
the automatic transmission. The automatic transmission shifts up again.
X To derestrict/restrict the shift range:
press the selector lever briefly to the right Maneuvering
towards D+ or left towards D–.
Maneuvering in a tight space:
The display shows the selected shift range.
The automatic transmission shifts only as X Control the vehicle's speed by braking
far as the relevant gear. carefully.
X Depress the accelerator pedal slightly and
i If the maximum engine speed for the
restricted shift range is reached and you evenly.
depress the accelerator pedal, the auto- i You can shift back and forth between
matic transmission will not shift up. drive position D and reverse gear R at low
Driving situations speeds without applying the brakes. This
can help you, for example when rapidly
5 Use the braking effect of the engine maneuvering the vehicle or rocking it out of
on steep downhill gradients and for snow or slush.
driving:
Ron steep mountain roads Towing a trailer
Rin mountainous terrain
X Drive at moderate engine speeds on steep
Rin arduous conditions uphill gradients.
4 Use the braking effect of the engine X Depending on the uphill or downhill gradi-
on extremely steep downhill gradient, shift down to a shift range adapted to
ents and long downhill stretches. the driving situation (Y page 144), even if
cruise control is activated.

Refueling 145
Problems with the transmission

The transmission mal- The transmission is losing oil.
functions when shifting X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe-
Driving and parking

gear. cialist workshop.
The acceleration char- The transmission is in emergency mode.

acteristics have deter- It is only possible to shift into second gear or reverse gear R.
iorated noticeably.
X Stop the vehicle.
The transmission does
X Depress the brake pedal.
not shift.
X Move the selector lever to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Depress the brake pedal.
X Move the selector lever to position D or R.
In position D, the transmission shifts into second gear; in posi-
tion R, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Releasing the parking lock manually X Push the implement in and simultaneously
move the selector lever out of position P.
In the event of a malfunction, it is possible to The selector lever lock is released. You can
manually release the selector lever from the now move the selector lever freely again
lock in parking position P, e.g. to have the until it is returned to position P.
vehicle towed away.
X Remove implement ;.
X Re-install cover :.
i The screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit

could function as the implement, for
instance (Y page 274).
Refueling
G WARNING
X Apply the parking brake.
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
X Remove cover :.
fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
X Slide implement ; as far as it will go into
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
the opening. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
Z
146 Refueling
engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating ! Do not switch on the ignition if you acci-
before refueling. dentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Other-
wise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify
G WARNING a qualified specialist workshop and have
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel tank and fuel lines drained com-
Driving and parking
There is a risk of injury. pletely.

You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing fuel system.
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
If you or others come into contact with fuel, paintwork.
observe the following:
! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from
using soap and water.
barrels or containers.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
system due to contaminated fuel.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay. Further information on fuel and on fuel grades
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- can be found in the "Technical data" section
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- (Y page 318).
ing.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
Refueling procedure
has come into contact with fuel.
G WARNING
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel.
When the engine is running, exhaust system
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire.
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline
with diesel fuel.
The fuel filler flap is on the left side of the
If fuels are handled improperly, they pose a vehicle behind the front door. It is only pos-
danger to persons and the environment. Do sible to open the fuel filler flap when the front
not allow fuels to run into the sewage system, door is open.
the surface waters, the ground water or into
the ground.
X Switch off the auxiliary heating system
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with (Y page 122).
a diesel engine. Even small amounts of gas- X Open the front left-hand door first, and then
oline will cause damage to the fuel system the fuel filler flap.
and engine. X Close all vehicle doors to prevent fuel
vapors from entering the vehicle.

Refueling 147
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counter-clockwise, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

remove it and let it hang from strap :.
X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank and refuel. H Environmental note
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-
Driving and parking

switches off. Fuel may otherwise leak out. sible manner.
X Replace tank filler cap ; on tank and turn
clockwise. ! Only use DEF in accordance with
You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap ISO 22241. Never mix DEF with additives or
is closed fully. thin it with tap water. The exhaust gas after-
X Open the front left-hand door first, and then treatment may otherwise be damaged.
close the filler flap. Observe the MB Specifications for Service
Products, Sheet 352.0.
Damage that results from the use of addi-
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank tives or tap water leads to the loss of the
If your vehicle is losing fuel, the fuel lines or
the fuel tank are defective. ! If DEF comes into contact with a painted
or aluminum surface, wash the surface off
immediately with plenty of water.
lock immediately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any cir- ! DEF is not a diesel additive and must not
cumstances. be mixed with fuel in the tank. Even small
amounts of DEF can cause engine damage.
Damage that results from the blending of
If the fuel tank has been run dry, after refuel- DEF will not be covered by the New Vehicle
ing carry out the following steps: Limited Warranty.
X Before starting the engine: switch on the The exhaust gas aftertreatment requires a
ignition three or four times. reducing agent, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF), in
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition order to function correctly.
lock (Y page 138). When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high
The % preglow indicator lamp in the outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may
instrument cluster lights up briefly. escape.
X Once the % preglow indicator lamp goes
Ammonia vapors have a pungent smell and
out, turn the key to position 3 in the ignition primarily cause irritation of the:
lock and release it as soon as the engine is
Rskin
running.
Rmucous membranes
You can start the diesel engine without pre-
Reyes
glow when the engine is warm.
You may experience a burning sensation in
your eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough-
ing and watering of the eyes.
Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Avoid contact
with DEF.
Do not allow DEF to come into direct contact
with your skin; it is hazardous to your health.
Z
148 Refueling
Rinse any affected areas off with plenty of Lockable filler cap
clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.
i If the DEF level has dropped below the
reserve range, add at least 2.0 US gal
(7.6 l) of DEF at the latest after receiving the
Driving and parking
second warning message (Y page 182).

i If you switch off the engine at a low out-
side temperature and add DEF, restart the
engine after refueling. If you leave the vehi-
cle parked without restarting the engine
and the DEF freezes in the DEF tank, the on-
board computer will only be able to register Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment
the new fill level after a defrosting period of
up to 60 minutes. During this time the
engine may only be operated in neutral.
You will find further information on DEF in the
"Service products" section (Y page 318).
Refueling procedure
DEF filler neck
Non-lockable DEF filler cap
X To open: switch off the ignition.

X Remove tool ? for unlocking tank filler
cap : from the footwell on the co-driver's
side (Y page 274).
X Pull cover = up, turn 90° and release.
X Insert tool ? into hole ; of tank filler
cap :.
X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and
Example: DEF filler cap in the engine compartment remove it. Make sure that tool ? remains
in tank filler cap : while doing so.
X To open: switch off the ignition.
X Open the hood (Y page 248). X To close: replace filler cap : and turn it
X Turn filler cap : counter-clockwise and
clockwise until closed.
remove it. X Pull tool ? out of tank filler cap : and
stow with the vehicle tool kit in the footwell
X To close: replace cap : on the filler neck on the co-driver's side.
and turn it clockwise.
X Pull cover = up over hole ; of tank filler
You will hear a click when cap : is fully cap :, turn and release.
closed.
X Turn tank filler cap :.
If tank filler cap : turns freely, the DEF
tank is closed.

Parking 149
Parking On vehicles with a battery isolating switch,

switch off the power supply if the vehicle is
Important safety notes to be out of use for a longer period of time.
G WARNING Always park your vehicle safely and according
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or to legal requirements and secure it against
Driving and parking

twigs may ignite if they come into contact with rolling away.
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust To ensure that the vehicle is properly secured
gas flow. There is a risk of fire. against rolling away unintentionally:
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rthe parking brake must be firmly applied
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- Rthe selector lever must be in position P and
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to the key must be removed from the ignition
park on dry grassland or harvested grain lock
fields.
Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the
front wheels must be turned towards the
G WARNING
curb
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
Rthe rear axle must be secured, e.g. with a
safety-relevant functions are only available
wheel chock, on steep uphill or downhill
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
gradients
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably Use the wheel chock (Y page 151) to do so.
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk If you leave the vehicle parked for more than
of an accident. three weeks:
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or
G WARNING Rswitch off the electrical system using the
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- battery main switch (Y page 137) and
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Rrelease the parking brake. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the condition of charge every three weeks, since
parking position P. standby power consumption can drain the
Rstart the engine. battery. If the battery voltage is lower than
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- 12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-
an accident and injury. tive discharging.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never ing and charging the batteries under "Bat-
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. tery“ (Y page 258). You can obtain informa-
tion about trickle chargers from a qualified
! A moving vehicle can lead to damage to specialist workshop.
the vehicle or damage to the drive train.
! When the vehicle is parked, always
remove the key to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
Z
150 Parking
Parking brake XTo apply the parking brake: pull brake

lever : up as far as the last possible
G WARNING detent.
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The c warning lamp in the instrument
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: cluster lights up if the engine is running.
Driving and parking
Rrelease the parking brake. i On vehicles with a folding brake lever, you
Rshift the automatic transmission out of the can then press lever : down to the stop.
parking position P. X To release the parking brake: on vehicles
Rstart the engine. with a folding brake lever, first pull brake
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- lever : up to the stop.
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of X Raise brake lever : slightly and press
an accident and injury. release knob ;.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Guide brake lever : down to the stop.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The c indicator lamp in the instrument
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. cluster goes out.
Exceptionally, if the service brake fails, the
G WARNING parking brake can be used to brake the vehi-
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking cle in an emergency.
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
X Emergency braking: press and hold
increased danger of skidding and accidents. release button ; and carefully apply brake
lever :.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
Switching off the engine
the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
! If the coolant temperature is very high,

e.g. after driving on hilly roads, leave the
The brake lamps are not illuminated when you engine running at idle speed for about
brake the vehicle using the parking brake. two minutes before turning it off.
As a rule, you may only apply the parking This allows the coolant temperature to
brake when the vehicle is stationary. return to normal.
X Stop the vehicle.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.

Driving tips 151
X Apply the parking brake. XTo remove the wheel chock on Cab
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition Chassis: pull the locking springs down and
lock and remove it. remove the wheel chock.
The immobilizer is activated. i When stowing the wheel chock, make
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling sure that it is secured in the retainer with
Driving and parking

away (Y page 149). the locking springs.
Wheel chock Parking the vehicle for a long period
Use the wheel chock or a similar object to If you park your vehicle for longer than
prevent the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. three weeks:
when parking or changing a wheel. Rconnect the batteries to a trickle charger or
Rdisconnect the vehicle's starter battery or
Rswitch off the electrical system using the
battery main switch (Y page 137) and
Rdisconnect the vehicle's auxiliary battery
Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
condition of charge every three weeks, since
standby power consumption can drain the
battery. If the battery voltage is lower than
12.2 V, the battery must be charged. Other-
wise, the battery may be damaged by exhaus-
Wheel chock in the load/passenger compartment tive discharging.
Be sure to observe the notes on disconnect-
X To remove the wheel chock on Cargo
ing and charging the batteries under "Bat-
Vans/Passenger Vans: pull restraining
tery“ (Y page 258). You can obtain informa-
cable : down a little and remove it from
tion about trickle chargers from a qualified
retainer ;.
X Remove the chock.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
i When stowing the wheel chock, make 6 weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
sure that restraining cable : is holding it result of lack of use. In this event, consult a
securely in retainer ;. qualified specialist workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
G WARNING
The driver's attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
Wheel chock to the rear of the chassis on the left ommend that you pull over to a safe location
side of the vehicle (example)
and stop before placing or taking a telephone
Z
152 Driving tips
call. If you choose to use the telephone while Fuel consumption also increases when driv-
driving, please use the hands-free device and ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in
only use the telephone when road, weather mountainous terrain.
and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Overrun cutoff
Driving and parking
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you are in overrun mode and take your foot
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph off the accelerator pedal, the fuel supply is cut
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers off when the engine speed is out of the idle
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) speed control range.
every second.
Drinking and driving
G WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving, G WARNING
safety-relevant functions are only available Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, driving are very dangerous combinations.
for example, the power steering and the brake Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
boosting effect. You will require considerably affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk ment.
of an accident. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
Do not switch off the ignition while driving. dent are greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
! Always observe the ground clearance of Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
the vehicle and avoid obstacles. On vehi- anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
cles with a step, ground clearance is further ing drugs.
restricted. Obstacles can damage the vehi-
cle. Emission control
If you must drive over obstacles, drive espe-
cially slowly and carefully. If necessary, G WARNING
have another person direct you. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
Drive sensibly – save fuel these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
In order to save fuel, observe the following
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
tips:
out sufficient ventilation.
X The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure. Certain engine systems are designed to keep
X Remove unnecessary loads. the level of poisonous substances in exhaust
X Remove roof carriers when they are not
fumes within legal limits.
needed. These systems only work optimally if they are
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
maintained exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Any work on
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
the engine should therefore be carried out by
X Have all maintenance work carried out as qualified and authorized technicians at a
indicated by the service intervals in the Sprinter dealer.
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
The engine settings must not be changed
interval display.
under any circumstances. In addition, all spe-

Driving tips 153
cific maintenance work must be carried out at You can permanently limit the maximum
regular intervals and in accordance with the speed of your vehicle to 55 mph (90 km/h),
service requirements of the dealer listed here 60 mph (100 km/h) or 75 mph (120 km/h).
on the inside title page. Details can be found We recommend that you use an authorized
in the Maintenance Booklet. Sprinter Dealer for the programming of the
Driving and parking

maximum speed.
Before overtaking, take into consideration
Short journey that the engine speed limiter prevents the
! If the vehicle is predominantly used for speed increasing beyond the programmed
short-distance driving or is stationary for maximum speed.
long periods, this could lead to a malfunc-
tion in the automatic cleaning function for
the diesel particle filter. This can lead to Driving abroad
blockage of the diesel particle filter. This
Service
can also result in fuel collecting in the
engine oil and cause engine failure. An extensive network of authorized Sprinter
Therefore, if you mainly drive short distances, Dealers is also at your disposal when you are
drive on a highway or an inter-urban road for traveling abroad. Nevertheless, please bear in
20 minutes every 300 miles (500 km). This mind that service facilities or replacement
facilitates the diesel particle filter's burn-off parts may not always be immediately availa-
process. ble. You can obtain a list of workshops at any
Speed limiter Fuel
G WARNING In some countries, only fuels with a higher

sulfur content are available.
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage.
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There Information on fuel (Y page 318).
is a risk of accident.
Low-beam headlamps
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the If you are traveling in countries where vehi-
tire load rating and speed rating required for cles are driven on the opposite side of the
your vehicle. road to that in which the vehicle is registered,
you will need to:
As the driver, you must find out about the
Rhave the halogen headlamps partially
maximum speed of the vehicle and the result-
ing permissible maximum speed of the tires masked
(tire and tire pressure). In particular, also Rhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps set to sym-
observe the tire approval regulations for each metrical low beam
country. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic and no
You must not exceed the speed limit for the longer illuminates the edge of the road to the
tires listed in the tire pressure tables. You can same height and distance.
find information on tire pressures in the Have the headlamps masked or adjusted at a
"Wheels and tires" section (Y page 288). qualified specialist workshop before you
cross the border, but as close to it as possi-
ble.
Z
154 Driving tips
When you return from your journey, and as Downhill gradients

close to the border as possible, you will need
to: ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
Rremove the adhesive surfaces from your the brake pads.
halogen headlamps and clean the glass of
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
Driving and parking
the headlamps if necessary

should change down to shift range 2 or 1
Rhave the Bi-Xenon headlamps reset to
in good time. This should be observed in par-
asymmetrical low beam at a qualified spe- ticular when driving with a laden vehicle and
cialist workshop when towing a trailer.
i You must also change the shift range in
Transport by rail good time when cruise control is switched
on.
Transporting your vehicle by rail may be sub-
ject to certain restrictions or require special You thereby make use of the braking effect of
measures to be taken in some countries due the engine and do not have to brake as often
to varying tunnel heights and loading stand- to maintain the speed. This relieves the load
ards. on the service brake and prevents the brakes
You can obtain further information from any from overheating and wearing too quickly.
authorized Sprinter dealer.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNING
Braking
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
Important safety notes driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
G WARNING cause the braking system to fail. There is a
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in risk of an accident.
an attempt to increase the engine's braking Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
There is an increased danger of skidding and pedal at the same time.
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
ing on a slippery road surface. results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
G WARNING If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
driving, the braking system can overheat. This Drive on for a short while. The brakes are
increases the stopping distance and can even cooled down more quickly in the airflow.
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident. Wet road surfaces
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
If you have been driving for a long time in
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
heavy rain without braking, there may be a
pedal at the same time.
delayed response when you first apply the
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly brakes. This may also occur after driving
results in excessive and premature wear to through a car wash or deep water.
the brake pads.

Driving tips 155
You must depress the brake pedal more 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed of
firmly. Maintain a longer distance to the vehi- 12 mph (20 km/h).
cle in front. The brake lamps are not illuminated when you
While paying attention to the traffic condi- brake the vehicle using the parking brake.
tions, you should brake the vehicle firmly
Driving and parking

after driving on a wet road surface or through
a car wash. This heats the brake discs, so that Driving in wet conditions
they dry more quickly, which protects them
against corrosion. Hydroplaning
G WARNING
Limited braking performance on salt- There is a danger of hydroplaning occurring,
treated roads even if you are driving slowly and your tires
When driving on salted roads, salt may start have sufficient tread depth, depending on the
to build up on the brake disks and brake pads. depth of water on the road. There is a risk of
This can increase braking distances consid- an accident.
erably. For this reason, avoid tire ruts and brake care-
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in fully.
front.
Therefore, in heavy rain or other conditions in
To remove any build up of salt that may have
which hydroplaning can occur, drive as fol-
formed:
lows:
X Apply the brakes at the start of the journey, Rreduce your speed
occasionally during journey and at the end
Ravoid tire ruts
of the journey. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so. Rapply the brakes with care
Parking brake Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.
G WARNING
Check the depth of any water before driving
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking through it. Drive slowly through standing
brake, the braking distance is considerably water. Otherwise, water may enter the
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
increased danger of skidding and accidents. This can damage the electronic compo-
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- nents in the engine or the automatic trans-
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not mission. Water can also be drawn in by the
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the engine's air suction nozzles and this can
wheels lock, release the parking brake until cause engine damage.
the wheels begin turning again.
If you have to drive on stretches of road on
When driving on wet roads or dirt-covered which water has collected, please bear in
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt may get into mind that:
the parking brake. This causes corrosion and Rthe water level of standing water should not
a reduction of braking force. be above the lower edge of the front
In order to prevent this, drive with the parking bumper
brake lightly applied from time to time. When Rdo not drive faster than walking speed
doing so, drive for a distance of approximately
Z
156 Driving tips
Driving in winter Do not shift down for additional engine brak-

ing on a slippery road surface.
General notes
G WARNING G WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in The outside temperature indicator is not
Driving and parking
an attempt to increase the engine's braking designed to serve as an ice-warning device

effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
There is an increased danger of skidding and Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
accidents. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
Do not shift down for additional engine brak- face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
ing on a slippery road surface. especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission

G DANGER
may roll only briefly in the neutral position
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate N. Prolonged rolling of the wheels, e.g.
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases when being towed, will result in transmis-
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the sion damage.
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
fatal injury. stopped when moving at low speed:
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating X Shift the transmission to neutral position
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area N.
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To X Try to maintain control of the vehicle using
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a corrective steering.
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
Drive particularly carefully on slippery roads.
facing into the wind.
Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise con-
specialist workshop in good time at the onset trol.
of winter. You can find further information on winter
tires and snow chains in the "Winter opera-
i Do not cover the radiator, e.g. with a win- tion" section (Y page 286).
ter cover. The measurements of the on-
board diagnostic system may otherwise
return inaccurate values. Some of these Driving off-road
values are legally prescribed and must
therefore always be exact. Important safety notes
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" G WARNING
section (Y page 286).
If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
Slippery road surfaces
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
G WARNING risk of an accident.
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Always drive on a steep incline in the line of
an attempt to increase the engine's braking fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. vehicle.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.

Driving tips 157
G WARNING total brake failure, also as a result of

When driving off-road, your body is subject to increased wear. The braking characteristics
forces from all directions, due to the uneven will vary depending on the material that has
surface. You could be thrown from your seat, got into the system. Clean the brakes after
for instance. There is a risk of injury. driving off-road. If you then notice reduced
Driving and parking

braking performance or hear scraping noises,
Always wear a seat belt, even when driving off-
have the brake system checked at a qualified
road.
specialist workshop. Adjust your driving style
to the changed braking characteristics.
G WARNING
Driving off-road or on construction sites
If you drive over obstacles or in ruts, the steer-
increases the possibility of vehicle damage
ing wheel may jerk out of your grip, causing
which may in turn lead to the failure of certain
injury to your hands.
assemblies and systems. Adapt your driving
Always hold the steering wheel firmly with style to the off-road driving conditions. Drive
both hands. When driving over obstacles, you carefully. Have any vehicle damage rectified
must expect steering forces to increase at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as
briefly and suddenly. possible.
When driving on rough terrain, do not shift the
G WARNING transmission into the neutral position. You
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or could lose control when attempting to brake
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with the vehicle with the service brake. If your
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk vehicle cannot manage an uphill slope, drive
of fire. back down the slope in reverse gear.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads, When loading your vehicle for driving off-road
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In or on a construction site, keep the vehicle's
particular, remove parts of plants or other center of gravity as low as possible.
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a Checklist before driving off-road
X Check the fuel and DEF levels (Y page 181)
! When driving off-road or on unpaved sur- and top up (Y page 148).
faces, check the underside of the vehicle X Engine: check the oil level (Y page 250)
and the wheels and tires at regular inter- and add oil (Y page 252).
vals. In particular, remove any trapped for- Before driving up or down steep gradients,
eign objects, e.g. stones and branches. fill the oil to the maximum level.
Such foreign objects may:
i If you drive up or down steep gradients,
Rdamage the chassis, the fuel tank or the the 4 symbol may appear in the display.
brake system The engine operating safety is not put at
Rcause imbalances and thus vibrations risk if you have filled the engine oil to the
Rbe flung out when you continue driving maximum level before the journey.
If there is any damage, inform a qualified X Vehicle tool kit: check that the jack is
specialist workshop. working (Y page 274).
When driving off-road and on construction X Make sure that a lug wrench (Y page 274),
sites, sand, mud and water mixed with oil, for wooden underlay for the jack, a robust tow
example, may get into the brakes. This may
lead to a reduction in braking performance or
Z
158 Driving tips
cable and a folding spade are carried in the RWatch out for obstacles (e.g. rocks, holes,
vehicle. tree stumps and ruts).
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread RAvoid edges where the surface could crum-
depth (Y page 285) and tire pressure ble or break away.
(Y page 288).
Driving and parking
Checklist after driving off-road

Rules for driving off-road ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after
! Always bear the vehicle's ground clear- driving off-road, have the vehicle checked
ance in mind and avoid obstacles, e.g. deep immediately at a qualified specialist work-
ruts. shop.
Obstacles may damage the following parts Off-road driving places a higher demand on
of the vehicle: your vehicle than normal road operation.
Rthe chassis Check your vehicle after driving on rough ter-
rain. By doing so you will notice any damage in
Rthe drive train
good time and reduce the risk of an accident
Rthe fuel and supply tanks for yourself and other road users. Clean your
For this reason, you should always drive vehicle thoroughly before driving on public
slowly when driving off-road. If you have to roads.
drive over obstacles, have the co-driver Observe the following points after driving off-
direct you. road, on construction sites and before driving
i We recommend that you additionally on public roads:
carry a shovel and a recovery rope with X Activate ASR (Y page 58).
shackle in the vehicle. X Clean the headlamps and tail lamps and
REnsure that loads and items of luggage are check them for damage.
securely stowed or lashed down X Clean the front and rear license plates.
(Y page 240). X Clean the windshield, windows and exterior
RBefore driving off-road, stop the vehicle and mirrors.
shift to a low gear. X Clean the steps, door sills and grab han-
RIf the surface demands it, temporarily deac- dles.
tivate ASR when pulling away (Y page 58). This increases safety of footing.
ROnly drive off-road with the engine running X Clean the wheels/tires, wheel housings
and a gear engaged. and the underbody of the vehicle with a
RDrive slowly and smoothly. Walking pace is water jet.
necessary in many situations. This increases road grip, especially on wet
RAvoid spinning the drive wheels. road surfaces.
RMake sure that the wheels always remain in X Check the wheels/tires and wheel hous-
contact with the ground. ings for trapped foreign objects and
RDrive with extreme care over unknown ter- remove them.
rain where you can only see for a short dis- Trapped foreign objects can damage the
tance. As a precaution, get out of the vehi- wheels/tires and may be flung out from the
cle to take a look at the route to be taken in vehicle when you continue driving.
advance. X Check the underbody for trapped branches
RCheck the water depth before fording. or other parts of plants and remove them.
Trapped branches or other parts of plants
increase the risk of fire and can cause dam-

Driving systems 159
age to fuel lines, brake hoses and the rub- Important safety notes
ber bellows of axle joints and drive shafts.
Observe the notes on braking (Y page 154).
X Clean the brake disks, brake pads and axle
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you
joints, particularly after operation in sand,
are inattentive, cruise control can neither
mud, grit/gravel, water or similarly dirty
reduce the risk of an accident nor override the
Driving and parking

conditions.
laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take
X Check the entire floor assembly, the tires,
road, weather and traffic conditions into
wheels, bodywork structure, brakes, steer- account. Cruise control is only an aid. You are
ing, chassis and exhaust system for any responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
damage. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
X Check the service brake for operating time and for staying in lane.
safety, e.g. carry out a brake test. Do not use cruise control:
X If you notice strong vibrations after driving
Rin traffic conditions that are unsuitable for
off-road, check the wheels and drive train
driving at a constant speed, e.g. in heavy
for foreign objects again. Remove any for-
traffic, on winding roads or off-road.
eign objects which can lead to imbalances
Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating
and thus cause vibrations.
may cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle could then skid.
Driving systems Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow.
Cruise control If there is a change of drivers, make sure that
General notes you inform the new driver about the set cruise
speed.
Cruise control maintains the speed of the
vehicle for you. Cruise control lever
Use cruise control if road and traffic condi-
tions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period. You can set any
speed from 20 mph upwards in increments of
1 mph.
i If you have set km/h as the unit for the
digital speedometer (Y page 190), you can
set any speed from 30 km/h upwards in
increments of 1 km/h.
Cruise control should not be activated when
driving off-road or on construction sites. : To activate and store the current speed or
Cruise control may not be able to maintain the a higher speed
stored speed on uphill or downhill gradients. ; To activate at the last stored speed
If the gradient evens out and the vehicle's
= To activate and store the current speed or
speed does not fall below 20 mph (30 km/h),
a lower speed
the stored speed is resumed.
? To deactivate cruise control
The cruise control lever is the upper lever on
the left of the steering column.
Z
160 Driving systems
Activation conditions X Release the cruise control lever.

The current speed is stored.
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled: i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Rthe parking brake must be released. The depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel-
c indicator lamp in the instrument clus- erate briefly to overtake, for example,
Driving and parking
ter is off cruise control resumes the vehicle’s speed

Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph
to the last speed stored after you have fin-
(30 km/h) ished overtaking.
Rneither the brake or clutch pedal is
Deactivating cruise control
depressed
There are various ways to deactivate cruise
i Other drive and brake systems not descri-
control:
bed in this Operator's Manual, such as a
retarder, may affect cruise control. You can X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
find information on this in the separate wards ?.
operating instructions provided by the or
body manufacturer. X Apply the brakes.
Storing and maintaining the current The last speed set remains stored. The last
speed speed stored is deleted when you switch off
the engine.
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed Cruise control is deactivated automatically
above 20 mph (30 km/h). when:
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up :
Ryou apply the brakes
or down =.
Ryou apply the parking brake and the c
X Release the accelerator pedal.
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
Cruise control is activated. The current lights up
speed is stored.
Ryou are driving slower than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
Setting the speed
Ryou shift the automatic transmission to
It may be a moment before the vehicle starts neutral position N while the vehicle is in
to accelerate or brake to the set speed. Take motion
this delay into account when setting the RESP® or ASR intervenes
speed. Rthere is a malfunction in the ESP®, ASR or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever up :
ABS system
to increase the speed or down = to reduce
the speed.
The last stored speed increases or decrea-
ses in 1 mph increments (1 km/h incre-
ments).
or
X Press and hold the cruise control lever
up : or down = until the desired speed
has been reached.

Driving systems 161
Problems with cruise control

On vehicles with steer- The display shows a high-priority message. Thus a change in speed
ing wheel buttons, the is not possible.
Driving and parking

speed cannot be set X Proceed as instructed by the message in the display.
when cruise control is X
Deactivate cruise control
activated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
General notes warning function.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST comprises
the distance warning function and adaptive Operation
Brake Assist. The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with
Distance warning function a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such
a collision. If the distance warning function
Important safety notes detects that there is a risk of a collision, you
i Note the section on 'Important safety will be warned visually and acoustically. With-
notes' (Y page 57). out your intervention, the distance warning
function cannot prevent a collision.
G WARNING The distance warning function will issue a
The distance warning function does not react: warning at speeds of around 20 mph
Rto people or animals (30 km/h) or more if:
Rto oncoming vehicles Ryou approach a vehicle ahead of you very
Rto crossing traffic quickly. You will then hear an intermittent
Rwhen cornering warning tone and the Ä warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes.
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations. X Brake immediately in order to increase the
There is a risk of an accident. distance from the vehicle in front.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- or
uation and be ready to brake. X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
G WARNING If you want the distance warning function to
The distance warning function cannot always assist you, the function must be activated and
clearly identify objects and complex traffic operational.
situations. Due to the nature of the system, particularly
In such cases, the distance warning function complicated driving conditions may cause the
may: system to display an unnecessary warning.
Rgive an unnecessary warning With the help of the radar sensor system, the
Rnot give a warning distance warning function can detect obsta-
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Z
162 Driving systems
Up to a speed of about 45 mph (70 km/h), the cluster lights up and the Distance Warn‐
distance warning function can also react to ing Deactivated message appears.
stationary obstacles, such as stopped or X To activate: press the æ button again
parked vehicles. (Y page 37).
If you approach an obstacle and the distance Vehicles without steering wheel but-
Driving and parking
warning function detects a risk of a collision, tons: the Ä warning lamp in the instru-
the system will alert you both visually and ment cluster goes out and the ON message
acoustically. flashes.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
be impaired in the case of: the Ä warning lamp in the instrument
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else cluster goes out and the Distance Warn‐
covering the sensors ing Activated message appears in the
Rit is snowing or raining heavily
multifunction display.
Rthere is interference from other radar sour-
ces Adaptive Brake Assist
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
example in parking garages tion for driving safety systems (Y page 57).
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
G WARNING
motorbike
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
Following damage to the front end of the vehi- tions.
cle, have the configuration and operation of In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- Rintervene unnecessarily
sions at slow speeds where there is no visible Rnot intervene
damage to the front of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Activating/deactivating the distance Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
warning function uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
When you switch on the engine, the distance
warning function switches on after a few sec-
G WARNING
onds.
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
X To deactivate: press the æ button
Rto people or animals
(Y page 37).
Vehicles without steering wheel but- Rto oncoming vehicles
tons: the Ä warning lamp in the instru- Rto crossing traffic
ment cluster lights up and the OFF message Rto stationary obstacles
flashes. Rwhen cornering
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
the Ä warning lamp in the instrument intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.

Driving systems 163
Adaptive Brake Assist aids you when braking Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
during hazardous situations at speeds above cle, have the configuration and operation of
20 mph (30 km/h). With the help of Adaptive the radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-
Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-
detect obstacles that are in the path of your sions at slow speeds where there is no visible
Driving and parking

vehicle for an extended period of time. damage to the front of the vehicle.
When you approach an obstacle and adaptive
Brake Assist detects that there is a risk of a
collision, adaptive Brake Assist calculates the Lane Tracking package
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. Blind Spot Assist
Should you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-
tive Brake Assist will automatically increase General notes
the braking force to the calculated level. Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the to monitor the areas on both sides of your
emergency braking situation is over. vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
ABS prevents the wheels from locking. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
The brakes function as usual again if: display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the moni-
Ryou release the brake pedal tored area. If you then switch on the corre-
Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision sponding turn signal to change lane, you will
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your also receive an optical and audible collision
vehicle warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. uses sensors in the rear bumper and behind
Up to the maximum vehicle speed, adaptive the protective strips of the B-pillars.
Brake Assist can react to moving obstacles Important safety notes
that have already been recognized as such at
least once over the period of observation. G WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react to sta- Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
tionary obstacles. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
In particular, the detection of obstacles can placing them in the blind spot area
be impaired if: Rvehicles which approach with a large speed
Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else differential and overtake your vehicle
covering the sensors As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
Rit is snowing or raining heavily warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
Rthere is interference from other radar sour- an accident.
ces Always observe the traffic conditions care-
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
example in parking garages
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
motorbike attentive driving.
i USA only:
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the This device has been approved by the FCC
full brake boosting effect with the help of BAS as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
remains available. sensor is intended for use in an automotive
Z
164 Driving systems
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or and behind the protective strips of the B-pil-
altering of the device will void any warran- lars.
ties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
approved way. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
Driving and parking
Any unauthorized modification to this driving in the middle of their lane. This may be
device could void the user’s authority to the case if the vehicles are driving on the inner
operate the equipment. side of their lane.
Monitoring range of the sensors Due to the nature of the system:
Ra clear warning situation may not occur.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired in the case of: The yellow indicator lamp on the relevant
side of the vehicle will then light up.
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-
Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-
ing the sensors
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
lane borders.
snow
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
Rnarrow and short vehicles, e.g. motorcy-
alongside particularly long vehicles, for
cles or bicycles example trucks, for a prolonged time.
Rvery wide lanes
The four sensors of Blind Spot Assist are inte-
Rnarrow lanes grated into the rear bumper and behind the
Rvehicles not driving in the middle of their protective strips of the B-pillars. Make sure
lane that the bumper and protective stripping are
Rbarriers or other road boundaries free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not sensors. The radar sensors must not be cov-
indicated. ered, for example by cycle racks or overhang-
ing loads.
Have the function of the radar sensors
checked at a qualified specialist workshop:
Rafter a severe impact
Rafter damage to the bumper
Rafter damage to the protective strips of the
B-pillars
Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work
properly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area approx-

imately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and
approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft (3.5 m)
each side of it. For this purpose, Blind Spot
Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper

Driving systems 165
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist

i Blind Spot Assist is activated when you
switch on the ignition.
lock.
Driving and parking

Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
X
To deactivate: press the button in
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp the center console (Y page 37).
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir-
If yellow indicator lamp : lights up: ror : first flashes and then lights up con-
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph tinuously.
(30 km/h) X
RBlind Spot Assist is deactivated
To activate: press the button in the
center console again (Y page 37).
RBlind Spot Assist is malfunctioning
The yellow indicator lamp in exterior mir-
Rthere is no clear warning, depending on the
ror : flashes initially. If you exceed
situation 20 mph (30 km/h) while driving, the yellow
Blind Spot Assist is active from a speed of indicator lamp in exterior mirror : goes
20 mph (30 km/h). If a vehicle is detected in out.
the blind spot monitoring range, red warning
lamp : on the corresponding side lights up. Towing a trailer
This warning occurs when a vehicle enters the If you attach a trailer, make sure that you have
blind spot monitoring range from behind or correctly established the electrical connec-
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, tion. This can be accomplished by checking
the warning only occurs if the difference in the trailer lighting. Blind Spot Assist is deac-
speed is less than 14 mph (22 km/h). tivated as a result. The indicator lamp in the
Yellow indicator lamp : goes out if reverse exterior mirrors lights up yellow.
gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist is then On vehicles with steering wheel buttons, the
deactivated. Blind Spot Assist Deactivated mes-
The brightness of the indicator/warning sage also appears in the display.
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light. Lane Keeping Assist
Collision warning General notes
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the front of your vehicle by means of a camera at
corresponding turn signal, a double warning the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
tone sounds once. Red warning lamp : detects lane markings on the road and warns
flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec- you before you leave your lane unintention-
ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing of ally.
red warning lamp :. There are no further
warning tones.
Z
166 Driving systems
The system may be impaired or may not func-

tion if:
Rif the vehicle is incorrectly loaded
(Y page 240)
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-
Driving and parking
cient illumination of the road, or due to

snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflection from other vehicles
(e.g. if the road surface is wet)
: Lane Keeping Assist camera Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
Lane Keeping Assist supports you from or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
speeds of approximately 40 mph(60 km/h). vicinity of the camera
Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are
Important safety notes present for one lane, e.g. in a construction
G WARNING area
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
recognize lane markings. covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Rgive an unnecessary warning small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rnot give a warning
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
Always pay particular attention to the traffic merge
situation and stay in lane, in particular if Rthe road is narrow and winding
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
Rthere are highly variable shade conditions
on the road
G WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not A warning may be given if a front wheel
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is passes over a lane marking. In addition, a
a risk of an accident. warning tone sounds and the Ã indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
ing Assist. Assist
Lane Keeping Assist is automatically activa-
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane ted when you start the engine.
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
X To deactivate: press the j button in
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the center console (Y page 37).
road, weather or traffic conditions. Lane On vehicles without steering wheel but-
Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are respon- tons:
sible for the distance to the vehicle in front, OFF flashes briefly in the display and the
for vehicle speed, braking in good time and for Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
staying in your lane. ter flashes and then lights up continuously.
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- On vehicles with steering wheel but-
cle in its lane. tons:

Driving systems 167
The Lane Keep. Assist Deactivated Warnings are given later if:
message appears in the display and the Rtheroad has narrow lanes.
Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
ter flashes and then lights up continuously.
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated.
Driving and parking

X To activate: press the j button in the PARKTRONIC
center console again (Y page 37).
On vehicles without steering wheel but- General notes
tons: PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid. The
ON flashes briefly in the display and the system is equipped with ultrasonic sensors in
Ã indicator lamp in the instrument clus- the front and rear bumpers to monitor the
ter flashes and then goes out. area around your vehicle. PARKTRONIC indi-
On vehicles with steering wheel but- cates visually and audibly the distance
tons: between your vehicle and an object.
The Lane Keep. Assist Activated mes- Your vehicle features two separate sound
sage appears in the display and the Ã emitters with different frequencies for the
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster warning tones. The warning ranges in front of
flashes and then goes out. and behind the vehicle are indicated by dif-
Lane Keeping Assist is activated. ferent warning tones.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
A Lane Keeping Assist warning is suppressed
you:
if:
Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
Rrelease the parking brake and
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou have set the turn signal and a lane Rmove the selector lever to D, N or R
change is detected. In this case, the warn- PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
ings are suppressed for a certain period of 11 mph (18 km/h). PARKTRONIC is reactiva-
time. ted at speeds below 10 mph (16 km/h).
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown on vehi-
cles with an automatic transmission. Important safety notes
Ryou brake hard. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It cannot replace
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an your own awareness of the immediate sur-
obstacle or change lane quickly. roundings. You are responsible for safe
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. maneuvering, parking and pulling away. When
In order that you are warned only when nec- maneuvering, parking and pulling away, make
essary and in good time if you cross the lane sure that there are no persons, animals or
marking, the system recognizes certain con- objects in the maneuvering area.
ditions and warns you accordingly. ! Pay particular attention to obstacles
Lane Keeping Assist warns you earlier if: above or below the sensors when parking,
Ryou
such as flower pots or trailer towbars.
approach the outer lane marking on a
PARKTRONIC does not recognize such
bend.
objects when they are in the immediate
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a free-
vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage
way. the vehicle or objects.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Z
168 Driving systems
PARKTRONIC can suffer interference from: The sensors must be free of dirt, ice or slush.
Rultrasonic sources such as a truck's Otherwise, they cannot function correctly.
compressed-air brakes, an automatic car Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to
wash or a pneumatic drill scratch or damage them (Y page 268).
Rattachments to the vehicle, e.g. rear Front sensors
Driving and parking
mounted racks
Center Approx. 39 in
Rnumber plates (vehicle license plates)
(100 cm)
that are not affixed flat against the
bumper Corners Approx. 26 in
Rdirty or icy sensors (65 cm)
Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the Rear sensors
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
the bumper, not the ball coupling. Center Approx. 71 in
(180 cm)
Range of the sensors Corners Approx. 39 in
PARKTRONIC does not account for obstacles (100 cm)
that are:
Rbeneath its detection range, e.g. persons, Minimum distance
animals or objects
Center Approx. 12 in
Rabove its detection range, e.g. overhanging
(30 cm)
loads, overhangs or truck loading ramps
Front corner sen- Approx. 10 in
sors (25 cm)
Rear corner sensors Approx. 12 in
(30 cm)
If an obstacle is within this range, all seg-

ments of the warning displays light up and you
hear a warning tone. If the distance between
the vehicle and the obstacle falls below the
minimum range, it is possible that the dis-
tance may no longer be displayed.

Driving systems 169
Warning displays Selector lever Monitoring

position
D Front area
R or N Front and rear area
Driving and parking

P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
Warning display, front area
Rsixthsegment, an intermittent warning
tone sounds for approximately 2 seconds.
Rseventh segment, a continuous warning
tone sounds. This indicates that you have
now reached the minimum distance.
Roll-back warning
PARKTRONIC automatically monitors the
area behind the vehicle if the vehicle begins to
roll backwards without reverse gear engaged,
e.g. after stopping on an uphill gradient.
Warning display for the left-hand rear area in the
left-hand exterior mirror If PARKTRONIC recognizes an obstacle at a
: Warning segments for the left front area distance of at most 31 in (80 cm), all the seg-
; Warning segments for the right front area
ments in the warning displays light up. A con-
tinuous warning tone also sounds as the vehi-
= Operational readiness symbol for the
cle approaches the obstacle and for a further
front area
2 seconds after the vehicle has come to a
? Warning display segments halt.
A Operational readiness symbol for the rear
area Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensor and the obstacle.
The warning display is divided into five yellow
and two red segments for each side of the
vehicle. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
indicator segments = and A are lit.
There is a malfunction if only the red seg-
ments of the warning display light up
(Y page 171).
The position of the gear lever determines
whether the front and/or rear area is moni-
tored.
Z
170 Driving systems
X Press the f button.

If PARKTRONIC is deactivated, the indica-
tor lamp in the switch lights up.
Towing a trailer
Driving and parking
PARKTRONIC detects a coupled trailer if your

vehicle is equipped with the corresponding
electrical installations for trailer towing.
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer. If you use
an adapter for the socket, remove it from the
socket after detaching the trailer. Otherwise,
PARKTRONIC remains deactivated for the
rear area.
Remove a detachable trailer coupling if it is no
longer required. PARKTRONIC measures the
minimum detection range to an obstacle from
the bumper, not the ball coupling.

Driving systems 171
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking

warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.
A warning tone also
sounds for approx-
imately 2 seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds.
The indicator lamp of
the f button lights
up and the red seg-
ments in the
PARKTRONIC warning
display go out.
The PARKTRONIC The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or iced up.
warning displays X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 268).
implausible distances. X
Turn the key to position 2 again in the ignition lock.
For example, all the
segments may be lit The license plate or other parts attached near the sensors may not
even though there is no be secured correctly.
obstacle present. X Check the license plate and attachment parts near the sensors
for correct seating.
An external radio or ultrasonic source may be causing interfer-

ence.
X Check PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Rear view camera Only use the image from the rear view cam-
era as a guide. You may otherwise damage
Important safety notes your vehicle and/or the object.
! Objects that are not at ground level The rear view camera is only an aid. It cannot
appear further away than they actually are, replace your own awareness of the immedi-
for example: ate surroundings. You are responsible for
Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind
safe maneuvering, parking and pulling away.
When maneuvering, parking and pulling away,
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
make sure that there are no persons, animals
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch or objects in the maneuvering area.
Rthe tail-end of a truck The rear view camera is a visual parking aid.
Rslanted posts Information on operation can be found in the
separate Audio 15 supplement.
Z
172 Working mode
The camera is in the middle of the roof above Working mode

the high-mounted brake lamp (Y page 269).
The rear view camera may show obstacles in ADR (working speed governor)
perspectival distortion, incorrectly or not at General notes
all. The rear view camera cannot display all
Driving and parking
objects located very near and/or under the When activated, ADR automatically increases
rear bumper. It does not warn you of a colli- the engine speed to a preset speed or a speed
sion, persons or objects. you have set.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a i After a cold start, the idling speed of the
mirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror or engine is increased automatically. If the
the exterior mirrors. preset working speed is lower than the
The function of the rear view camera may be increased idling speed, the working speed
partially or completely impaired in the follow- is only reached once the engine has com-
ing circumstances: pleted the warm-up phase.
Rit is raining very heavily or snowing, or it is It is only possible to activate ADR with the
foggy. vehicle stationary and the parking brake
Rthe parking space is located in a very dark
applied.
place. The selector lever of the automatic trans-
Rthe camera is exposed to very strong white
mission must be in position P.
light. White stripes may appear on the dis-
play. Activating/deactivating ADR
Rthe surrounding area is illuminated with flu-
orescent light. The display may flicker.
Rif the temperature changes very quickly, for
example if you drive into a heated garage in
the winter.
Rambient temperatures are very high.
Rthe camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Rthe rear of the vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have the position and setting
checked at a specialist workshop.
The rear view camera is activated when you X To activate: press upper section : of the
engage reverse gear R. E switch while the engine is running.
You can find information on cleaning the cam- The indicator lamp in the switch comes on.
era in the "Maintenance and care" section The K indicator lamp in the instrument
(Y page 269). cluster lights up or the display shows the
following message: Operating speed
governor active.
active
X To deactivate: press lower section ; of
the E switch while the engine is run-
ning.
The indicator lamp in the switch goes out.

Towing a trailer 173
ADR is automatically deactivated if: on the trailer tow hitch. This can cause dam-
Ryou release the parking brake. age to the vehicle and the trailer may come
Rthe brake pedal is depressed. loose during the journey. The handling may be
impaired and the rear axle may be overloaded.
Rthe vehicle moves.
This may lead to an accident involving serious
Rthe control unit detects a malfunction.
Driving and parking

or even fatal injury.
Therefore note the following:
Setting the working speed
ROnly install a ball coupling that is approved
for your vehicle.
RBefore the journey, make sure that the ball
coupling is correctly installed and secured.
To do this, observe the operating instruc-
tions of the ball coupling manufacturer.
RDo not make any modifications to the ball
coupling or the trailer tow hitch.
You must observe the operating instructions
of the trailer tow hitch or ball coupling manu-
facturer.
X Activate ADR.
X To increase: press the E button.
G WARNING
If the ball coupling is not correctly installed
X To decrease: press the F button.
and secured, it could come loose while driving
and endanger other road users. There is a risk
of an accident and injury.
Towing a trailer
Install and secure the ball coupling as descri-
Notes on trailer towing bed in the ball coupling manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions. Make sure that the ball
Important safety notes coupling is correctly installed and secured
before every journey.
G WARNING
Installing an unsuitable ball coupling may G WARNING
result in overloading of the trailer tow hitch
When the vehicle/trailer combination begins
and the rear axle. This applies especially if the
to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-
ball coupling in question is longer or angled
cle/trailer combination could even rollover.
differently. This could seriously impair the
driving characteristics and the trailer can
come loose. There is a risk of an accident. On no account should you attempt to
straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination
You should only ever install a ball coupling
by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle
that has the permissible dimensions and that
speed and do not countersteer. Apply the
is designed to meet your trailer-towing
brake as necessary.
requirements. Do not modify the ball coupling
or the trailer tow hitch. Always observe the operating instructions
provided by the manufacturers of the trailer
G WARNING coupling and the ball coupling.
If you use a ball coupling that is not approved Couple and decouple the trailer carefully.
for your vehicle, it may cause excessive strain When backing up the towing vehicle, make
Z
174 Towing a trailer
sure nobody is standing between the vehicle If you require any further explanation of the
and the trailer. information contained in the Operator's Man-
A trailer which is incorrectly coupled to the ual, please contact an authorized Sprinter
towing vehicle could break away. A correctly dealer.
coupled trailer must be positioned horizon-
Driving and parking
tally behind the towing vehicle. General notes

Ensure that the following weights are not RObserve the legally prescribed maximum
exceeded: speed for vehicle/trailer combinations in
Rthe permissible noseweight the relevant country, state or Canadian
Rthe permissible trailer load province. Before setting off, check the vehi-
Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
cle documents of the your trailer to find out
the permissible maximum speed.
vehicle
Rthe permissible gross weight of both the
This reduces the risk of accidents.
RInstall only an approved trailer coupling on
towing vehicle and the trailer
Rthe permissible gross combination weight
your vehicle. Only use a ball coupling that is
approved for your vehicle and Sprinter
The applicable permissible values that may trailer tow hitch. More information on the
not be exceeded can be found: availability, mounting and installation of the
Rin your vehicle documents trailer electrics is available at any qualified
Ron the type plates for the trailer tow hitch specialist workshop.
Ron the type plates for the trailer RThe turn signals on the trailer are only guar-
Ron the vehicle identification plate

anteed to function when incandescent
(Y page 316). bulbs are used. You can obtain more infor-
mation about installing the trailer electrics
Where the values differ, the lowest is valid. at any qualified specialist workshop.
You will find values approved by the manu- RThe trailer coupling is one of the most
facturer on the identification plates and those important vehicle parts with regard to road
for the towing vehicle in the "Permissible safety. The notes on operation, care and
trailer loads and trailer drawbar noseweights" maintenance issued by the manufacturer
section (Y page 177). should be observed.
Your vehicle behaves differently with a trailer RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suita-
than without one. ble for installing detachable trailer cou-
The vehicle/trailer combination: plings.
Ris heavier RDo not attach rented trailer tow hitches or
Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi- other detachable trailer tow hitches to the
ent-climbing capability bumper.
Rhas an increased braking distance RMinimize the risk of damage to the ball cou-
Ris more susceptible to strong crosswinds pling. If you do not require the ball coupling,
Rrequires more sensitive steering
remove it from the ball coupling recess.
Rhas a larger turning circle
Weight information can be found in the “Per-
missible trailer and drawbar noseweights”
This may impair the handling characteristics. section (Y page 177).
When towing a trailer, always adjust your
speed to suit the road and weather condi- i The height of the ball neck changes
tions. Drive carefully. Maintain a safe dis- according to the load on the vehicle. If this
tance.

is case, use a trailer with a height-adjusta- overrun. Then, increase the brake force
ble trailer drawbar. quickly.
RThe figures for the gradient climbing capa-
Driving tips bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ When driving in mountainous areas, note
Driving and parking

trailer combination depends on the type of that the power output of the engine, and
trailer. Before setting off, check the vehicle with it its gradient climbing capability,
documents of the your trailer to find out the decrease with increasing altitude.
permissible maximum speed. Observe the
legally prescribed maximum speed for vehi-
Coupling up a trailer
cle/trailer combinations in the relevant coun-
try, state or Canadian province. ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system
characteristics will be different in comparison of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equip-
to when driving without a trailer and it will ped with an anti-lock brake system. Doing
consume more fuel. so will result in a loss of function of the
On long, steep downhill slopes you must brake systems of both the vehicle and the
select shift range 3, 2 or 1 in good time. trailer.
i This also applies if cruise control is acti-

vated.
This enables you to utilize the engine's brak-
ing effect and you do not need to brake so
heavily to keep the correct speed, which pro-
tects the brake system and prevents the
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly. If you need to brake additionally, to
not depress the brake pedal constantly, but
periodically.
Trailer coupled ready for use
Driving tips X Make sure the selector lever of the auto-
If the trailer begins to swing from side to side: matic transmission is in position P.
X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle.
X Do not accelerate.
X Close all doors.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Position the trailer horizontally behind your
X Brake if necessary.
vehicle.
i You can reduce the risk of the trailer
i The height of the ball neck changes
swinging and rocking by retrofitting anti-
according to the load on the vehicle. In this
roll bars or trailer stability programs. More
case, use a trailer with a height-adjustable
information is available from your author-
trailer drawbar.
ized Sprinter Dealer.
RMaintain a greater distance than you would X Couple the trailer.
when driving without towing a trailer. X Establish all electrical and other connec-
RAvoid sudden braking. Apply the brakes tions to the trailer. When doing so, hook the
gently at first to allow the trailer brake to breakaway cable of the trailer into eye-
let : on the ball coupling.
Z
X Remove the objects that are preventing the and get used to the new handling charac-
trailer from rolling, e.g. wheel chocks. teristics.
X Release the trailer parking brake. RBefore driving, check:
- that the trailer tow hitch and ball cou-
i The subharness of the vehicle has a cable
pling are secure
connection to the brake lamp indicator
Driving and parking
- that the safety switch for a braked trailer

lamp.
is functioning properly
Observe the maximum permissible trailer - that the safety chains are secure and not
dimensions (width and length).
damaged
Most federal states and all Canadian provin- - that the electrical connections are
ces require by law:
secure
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle - that the lights are working
and the trailer. The chains should be cross- - that the wheels are in good order and the
wound under the trailer drawbar. They must
tire pressure is correct
be fastened to the vehicle's trailer cou-
RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an
pling, not to the bumper or the axle.
unobstructed view of the rear section of the
Leave enough slack in the chains. This
trailer.
allows you to drive round tight corners.
RIf the trailer has electronically controlled
Ra separate brake system for certain types
brakes, pull the vehicle/trailer combina-
of trailer.
tion away carefully. Brake manually using
Ra safety switch for braked trailers. Find out
the brake controller and check that the
the specific requirements according to the brakes are working.
applicable laws.
RSecure the load on the trailer according to
If the trailer detaches from the towing vehi- the applicable specifications and current
cle, the safety switch applies the trailer's standards on securing loads (Y page 242).
brakes.
RWhen driving with a trailer, check at regular
intervals that the load is secured and that
the brakes and lights are working.
Towing a trailer
RBear in mind that the handling will be less
There are numerous legal requirements con- stable when towing a trailer than when driv-
cerning the towing of a trailer, e.g. speed ing without one. Avoid sudden steering
restrictions. Make sure your vehicle/trailer movements.
combination complies with local laws. This RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier,
not only means where you live, but also any- accelerates more slowly and has a
where you are driving to. Information is avail- decreased gradient climbing capability and
able from the police and local authorities. a longer braking distance.
Observe the following when towing a trailer: It is more susceptible to crosswinds and
RPractice driving around bends, stopping requires cautious steering.
and backing up at a place where there is no RIf possible, do not brake suddenly, but
traffic. This enables you to gain experience rather moderately at first so that the trailer
can activate its brakes. Then increase the
force on the brake pedal.
RIf the automatic transmission repeatedly
shifts between gears when driving on

inclines, restrict the shift range. Select shift X Apply the parking brake of the trailer.
range 4, 3, 2 or 1. X In addition, secure the trailer against rolling
Driving in a low gear and at a low speed away with a wheel chock or similar object.
reduces the risk of damaging the engine. X Remove the trailer cable and safety chains
RWhen driving on a downhill gradient, shift to and decouple the trailer.
Driving and parking

a low gear and take advantage of the
engine's braking effect.
Avoid continuous brake application as this Permissible trailer loads and trailer
may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if drawbar noseweights
installed, the trailer brakes.
Weight information
RIf the coolant temperature increases dra-
matically while the air-conditioning system ! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehi-
is switched on, switch off the air-condition- cle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the per-
ing system. missible gross combination weight is less
Coolant heat can also be dissipated by than the total of the permissible gross vehi-
switching the airflow and the temperature cle weight and the permissible trailer load.
of the heater/air conditioning to the maxi- Exceeding the permissible gross combina-
mum level. Open the windows if necessary. tion weight can lead to damage to the driv-
RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention
etrain, to the transmission or to the trailer
to the extended length of your vehicle/ tow hitch.
trailer combination. If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the
Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer relevant value for the permissible gross
combination you need an additional dis- vehicle weight or the permissible trailer
tance before you can return to your original load is therefore lower. In this case, the
lane. trailer or the vehicle may only be partially
loaded.
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is calculated by
Uncoupling a trailer adding the weight of the trailer to the weight
of the load and equipment.
G WARNING
The maximum gross vehicle weight is vehicle-
If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun specific and equipment-dependent: 5,000 lbs
brake engaged, you could trap your hand (2,268 kg) or 7,500 lbs (3,402 kg).
between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.
The maximum permissible trailer drawbar
There is a risk of injury.
noseweight on the ball coupling is 500 lbs
Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brake (227 kg) or 750 lbs (340 kg). The actual nose-
is engaged. weight may not exceed the value given on the
identification plates of the trailer tow hitch or
! Do not disconnect a trailer with an
the trailer. If the values vary, the lowest value
engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your
always applies.
vehicle could be damaged by the rebound-
ing of the overrun brake. The gross combination weight rating (GCWR)
is calculated by adding the gross weight of the
X Make sure the selector lever of the auto-
trailer to the gross vehicle weight including a
matic transmission is in position P. driver's weight of approximately 150 lbs
X Apply the parking brake of the vehicle. (68 kg). The permissible Gross Combination
X Close all doors. Weight Rating is vehicle-specific and depends
on the equipment level.
Z
When driving with a trailer, you should not (GAWR), the gross trailer weight (GTW), the
exceed the permitted Gross Combination gross combination weight rating (GCWR)
Weight Rating (GCWR). and the noseweight of the trailer drawbar
The permissible values, which must not be (TWR).
exceeded, can be found in your vehicle docu-
Driving and parking
ments and on the trailer tow hitch type plates

for the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316). Trailer power supply
The basic values approved by the manufac- ! Incorrect wiring of the connector plug
turer can also be found in the "Technical data" could, under certain circumstances, cause
section (Y page 328). If the values vary, the malfunctions in the vehicle's other elec-
lowest value always applies. tronic systems. We therefore recommend
having the connector plug wired at a quali-
Loading a trailer fied specialist workshop.
! Utilize the maximum permissible nose- ! You can connect accessories with a max-
weight as fully as possible. Do not allow the imum power consumption of 240 W to the
weight to fall below the minimum permis- permanent power supply.
sible noseweight, otherwise the trailer may You must not charge a trailer battery using
come loose. the power supply.
RYou must distribute the load on the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with various
and trailer so that the permitted maximum electrical installations for trailer towing.
values for the gross vehicle weight (GVWR), Depending on your trailer, you may need an
gross trailer weight (GTW) and gross com- adapter to connect the electrical system of
bined weight (GCWR) as well as permitted the trailer with that of the vehicle.
gross axle loads (GAWR) and noseweight
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped
(TWR) of your vehicle are not exceeded.
at the factory with a permanent power supply.
RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball
The permanent power supply is on the trailer
coupling (TWR) to the rear axle load. This
socket pin assignment 4.
will prevent you from exceeding the per-
missible gross axle weight (GAWR). Note that the permanent power supply of the
RAdd the drawbar noseweight on the ball
trailer is not switched off when the on-board
voltage is low. This can completely discharge
coupling (TWR) to the vehicle payload. This
the starter battery of your vehicle.
will prevent you from exceeding the per-
missible gross vehicle weight (GVWR). The turn signals on the trailer are only guar-
anteed to function when incandescent bulbs
Checking the vehicle and trailer weight are used.
Further information on the electrical equip-
RMake sure the weights of the towing vehicle
ment currently installed on your vehicle and
and the trailer comply with the maximum on installing trailer electrics can be obtained
permissible values. Have the vehicle/ at any qualified specialist workshop.
trailer combination weighed on a calibrated
weighbridge. The vehicle/trailer combina-
tion consists of the towing vehicle including
the driver, passengers and load, as well as
the loaded trailer.
RCheck the maximum permissible gross axle
weight rating of the front and rear axles

179
On-board computer and displays

Important safety notes ..................... 180
Instrument cluster ............................ 180
On-board computer (vehicles with-
out steering wheel buttons) ............ 182
On-board computer (vehicles with
steering wheel buttons) ................... 184
Display messages ............................. 197
Indicator and warning lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 217

Useful information You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
This Operator's Manual describes all models when operating the on-board computer.
as well as standard and optional equipment of The on-board computer display only shows
your vehicle that were available at the time of messages and warnings from certain sys-
going to print. Country-specific variations are tems. You should therefore make sure your
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be vehicle is operating safely at all times. If the
equipped with all of the described functions. operating safety of your vehicle is impaired,
This also applies to systems and functions stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying
relevant to safety. attention to road and traffic conditions. Then
Read the information on qualified specialist consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Instrument cluster
Important safety notes Overview
G WARNING
If you are driving and reach through the steer-
ing wheel to operate the adjustment knob,
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Only operate the adjustment knobs when the
vehicle is stationary. Do not reach through the
steering wheel when driving.
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic : Instrument cluster on vehicles without
situation permits. If you are not sure that this steering wheel buttons
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention ; Instrument cluster in vehicles with steer-
to traffic conditions and operate the equip- ing-wheel buttons
ment when the vehicle is stationary. = Adjustment buttons f/g
? Reset button 9
G WARNING A Service button Ë (engine oil level check)
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
B Menu button 4
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The You will find a full overview of the instrument
operating safety of your vehicle may be cluster in the "At a glance" section
impaired. There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 34).
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.

Instrument cluster 181
The display in the instrument cluster is acti- On vehicles without steering wheel buttons

vated when you: (Y page 182) and on vehicles with steering
Ropen the driver's door wheel buttons (Y page 187), the outside tem-
perature display is in the display.
Rturn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
Rpress the 9 reset button
played after a short delay.
Rswitch on the lights
The display switches off automatically after
approximately 30 seconds if: Speedometer
Rthe key is in position 0 in the ignition lock. The speed can also be shown in the display.
Rthe vehicle lighting is not switched on. You can find information on the digital speed-
ometer for vehicles without steering wheel
buttons under (Y page 182) and for vehicles
Instrument lighting with steering wheel buttons under
(Y page 187).
When the lights are switched on, you can
adjust the brightness of the instrument clus- i In some countries, a warning sounds
ter lighting using the f and g buttons. when the vehicle reaches the maximum
X To brighten: press the f button. speed limit, e.g. at 75 mph (120 km/h).
X To dim: press the g button.
i Vehicles with automatic headlamp mode: Trip odometer

the instrument lighting also adapts to auto- X To reset: make sure that the display is
matic headlamp mode. showing the trip odometer if you have a
vehicle with steering wheel buttons
(Y page 187).
Tachometer X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as trip odometer is reset to 0.0
0.0.
this could damage the engine.
Fuel gauge
Avoid driving at high engine speeds. This
unnecessarily increases the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and harms the environment as
a result of increased emissions.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the

engine's overrevving range.
To protect the engine, the fuel supply is inter-
rupted when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature
: Fuel gage on vehicles without steering
You should pay special attention to road con- wheel buttons
ditions when temperatures are around the ; Fuel gage on vehicles with steering wheel
freezing point. buttons
Z
182 On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons)
= Fuel filler flap location indicator t: the Further information on DEF consumption can
fuel filler flap is on the left-hand side. Fuel be found in the "Service products and filling
filler flap location indicator u: the fuel capacity" section (Y page 320).
filler flap is on the right-hand side
? Reserve fuel warning lamp (Y page 224)
On-board computer (vehicles without
steering wheel buttons)
DEF gauge Operating the on-board computer
Vehicles without steering wheel but- General notes
tons
The on-board computer is activated as soon
If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
(5.5 l), the å indicator lamp lights up and lock.
the ¯ dEF Chk display message appears.
The on-board computer shows vehicle infor-
If the supply of DEF falls below the reserve mation and settings in the display.
range of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the å indicator
lamp lights up and the ¯ StArtS RExx You can control the display and the settings in
the on-board computer using the adjustment
display message appears. In the display, xx
buttons on the instrument cluster.
corresponds to the number of possible
remaining engine starts (1616 to 0 ).
Standard display
When the number of remaining engine starts
is 0 the engine management prevents the
vehicle being driven at a speed exceeding
5 mph (8 km/h). The multifunction display
shows the StArtS IdLE message and you
hear a warning tone sequence.
Further information on DEF consumption can
be found in the "Service products and filling
capacity" section (Y page 320). : Odometer
; Trip odometer
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons = Clock
? Outside temperature or digital speedom-
If the supply of DEF is less than 1.5 US gal
eter
(5.5 l), the Check Diesel Exhaust Fluid
A Fuel gage (Y page 181)
See Operator's Manual message is shown
in the display. B Selector lever position or current shift
If the DEF supply falls below the reserve range range with automatic transmission
of 0.8 US gal (3.0 l), the å XX starts (Y page 142)
remaining message is displayed. In the dis- X To call up the standard display: turn the
play, XX corresponds to the number of possi- key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
ble remaining engine starts (1616 to 0 ). X Press the 4 menu button for longer than
When the number of remaining engine starts 1 second.
is 0 the engine management prevents the The information shown in the display
vehicle from being driven at a speed exceed- changes from the outside temperature to
ing 5 mph (8 km/h). The multifunction display the digital speedometer.
shows the Idle Mode message and you hear
a warning tone sequence.

On-board computer (vehicles without steering wheel buttons) 183
Menus in the on-board computer Activating/deactivating Highbeam

Assist
Overview
If you wish to exit a menu and go to the stand- lock.
ard display: X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until
X Press the 4 menu button for longer than the _ indicator lamp flashes and the on
1 second. or OFF message appears in the display.
or X Use the f or g button to switch High-
X Do not press any button for 10 seconds. beam Assist on/off.
The display accepts the changed settings.
Using the f, g, 4 or 9 adjustment but- Switching the daytime running lamps
tons, you can select the following functions: on/off
RCalling up the service due date If you switch the daytime running lamps on on,
(Y page 258) the daytime running lamps will automatically
RChecking the oil level (Y page 250) light up when the engine is running.
RChecking the DEF supply (Y page 182) For safety reasons, it is only possible to
RPreselecting/setting the auxiliary heating
change this setting when the vehicle is sta-
switch-on time (Y page 124) tionary. The factory setting is on in countries
in which daytime running lamp mode or day-
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 291)
time running lamps are mandatory.
RSetting the time (Y page 183)
RActivating/deactivating Highbeam Assist
lock.
(Y page 192)
X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until
RSetting the daytime running lamps
the L indicator lamp flashes and the on
(Y page 92) or OFF message appears in the display.
X Press the f or g button to activate or
Setting the time
deactivate the daytime running lamps.
lock. i USA only:
X Press the 4 menu button repeatedly until
If you turn the light switch to T or L,
the hours figure flashes. the corresponding light switches on. If you
turn the light switch to Ã, the daytime
X Press the f or g button to set the hour.
running lamps remain switched on.
X Press the 9 reset button.
Canada only:
The minute display flashes.
If you turn the light switch to L, the low-
X Press the f or g button to set the minute.
beam headlamps switch on. If you turn the
i If you keep the f or g button pressed, light switch to T or Ã, the daytime
the value will change continuously. running lamps remain switched on.
Z
184 On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons)
On-board computer (vehicles with ; W and X

steering wheel buttons)
RSelects submenus
Operating the on-board computer RChanges values
RAdjusts the volume
Overview
Using the telephone
6 Accepts a call
~ Ends a call
= Scrolls from one menu to another

V Forwards
U Back
Scrolls within a menu
9 Forwards
: Back
Controls
You can think of the order of the menus and of
the functions within a menu as a circle:
X To activate the on-board computer: turn X Press the V or U button repeatedly.
the key to position 1 in the ignition lock. The menus are displayed one after the
The on-board computer shows vehicle infor- other.
mation and settings in the display. X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly.
You can control the display and the settings in The functions in the menu/submenu are
the on-board computer with the buttons on displayed one after the other.
the steering wheel. Several functions are combined thematically
: Display in the menus.
The display changes when you press one of
On-board computer operation the buttons on the steering wheel. You can
use a function to call up information or to
change the settings for the vehicle.
For example, the AUDIO menu has functions
for controlling the radio or CD player.
Unlike in other menus, you will find submenus
in the Settings menu. For information on
how to use these submenus, see the "Set-
tings menu" section (Y page 188) .
The number of menus depends on your vehi-
cle's equipment.
i Operation of the audio equipment using
the steering wheel buttons and making set-
tings using the AUDIO menu only function

On-board computer (vehicles with steering wheel buttons) 185
with Sprinter audio equipment. If you are

using audio equipment from another man-
ufacturer, the described functions may be
restricted or not available at all.
Z
Menu overview
Diagrams
This is what the displays look like when you scroll through the menus.
Generic terms Operation

The illustration shows the menus on a vehicle
? Settings menu (Y page 188)
with Audio 15.
On Sound 5/Audio 20, the on-board com- A Trip computer menu (Y page 195)
puter always shows the AUDIO and TEL (tele-
B Telephone menu (Y page 196)
phone) menus in English. This is the case even
if a different language is selected for the dis-
play. i The generic terms in the tabular overview
should make orientation easier for you.
Operation However, they are not always shown on the
: Operation menu (Y page 186) display.
RStandard display
RCalling up the service due date Operation menu
(Y page 258)
RTire pressure monitor Overview
(Y page 291) You can select the following functions in the
RChecking the engine oil level Operation menu by pressing the 9
(Y page 250) or : button on the steering wheel:
; Audio menu (Y page 187)
= Message memory menu
(Y page 198)

RDisplaying the trip odometer and odometer Using the steering wheel buttons

(standard display) (Y page 187) X Press the V or U button repeatedly
RDisplaying the coolant temperature until the standard display is shown.
(Y page 187) X Press the 9 or : button to select the
RCalling up the service due date coolant temperature.
(Y page 258)
The temperature displayed may climb to
RTire pressure monitor (Y page 291)
250 ‡ (120 †) when the vehicle is being
RChecking the oil level (Y page 250) driven in normal conditions and if the coolant
contains the correct concentration of corro-
Standard display sion inhibitor and antifreeze. At high outside
temperatures and when driving in mountain-
ous terrain, the coolant temperature may rise
to the end of the scale.
Audio menu
General notes
Use the functions in the Audio menu to oper-
ate the audio equipment when switched on.
i Operation of the audio equipment using
: Odometer
the steering wheel buttons and making set-
; Trip odometer tings using the AUDIO menu only function
= Outside temperature or digital speedom- with Sprinter audio equipment. If you are
eter using audio equipment from another man-
? Clock ufacturer, the described functions may be
A Selector lever position or current shift restricted or not available at all.
range (Y page 142) If no audio equipment is switched on, you will
In the basic setting, the odometer and the trip see the message AUDIO off. off
odometer are shown in the upper part of the
display. This is referred to as the standard Selecting a radio station
display.
Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the V or U button repeatedly
until the standard display is shown.
Displaying the coolant temperature

: Reception frequency
; Waveband or waveband with memory pre-
set number
Z
Using the steering wheel buttons RInstrument cluster (Y page 189)

X Switch on the audio equipment (see the - Units and language settings
separate operating instructions). - Status bar settings
X Press the V or U button repeatedly RTime(Y page 191)
until the station selected appears in the RLighting (Y page 192)
display. - Switching surround lighting on/off
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
- Switching the daytime running lamps
desired station. on/off
i You can only store new stations on the - Setting the exterior lighting delayed
audio system itself. See the separate oper- switch-off
ating instructions. - Activating/deactivating Highbeam
You can also operate the audio equipment Assist
in the same way as usual. RVehicle
- Setting the radio station selection
Operating the CD player - Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity
RStationary heating or auxiliary heating
(Y page 124)
RConvenience (Y page 194)
- Key-dependent settings
i For safety reasons, it is not possible to

reset all of the functions while the vehicle is
: Current CD (with CD changer) in motion. For example, in the Lighting
; Current track submenu, the Daytime runn. lamps
function remains unchanged.
X Switch on the audio equipment and select Resetting all settings
the CD player (see the separate operating
instructions).
until the settings for the current CD appear
in the display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
CD track.
Settings menu
When the Settings message is displayed,
Settings menu you can reset all functions of the submenu to
Introduction the factory settings.
In the Settings menu, the following options

and submenus are available:
RResetting all settings
RResetting the functions of a submenu

Using the steering wheel buttons Selecting submenus

until the Settings menu appears in the
display.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button for
You will see a message in the display
prompting you to press the 9 reset button
again to confirm. You will see the collection of submenus.
X Press the 9 reset button again. There are more submenus than can be dis-
The functions in all submenus are reset to played at the same time.
the factory settings. Using the steering wheel buttons
i If you want to retain the settings, do not X Press the V or U button repeatedly
press the 9 reset button a second time. until the Settings menu appears in the
The Settings menu appears again after display.
approximately 5 seconds. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection.
Resetting the functions of a submenu X Press the W or X button to select a
You can individually reset the functions of submenu.

each submenu to the factory settings. The submenu currently selected is high-
lighted.
X Press the 9 button to select the func-
X Press the V or U button repeatedly tion within a submenu.
until the Settings menu appears in the X Change the setting by pressing the W or
display. X button.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The changed setting is saved.
menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select a Instrument cluster submenu
submenu.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button for Selecting the unit for temperature
You will see a message in the display
prompting you to press the 9 reset button
again to confirm.
X Press the 9 reset button again.
All functions in the submenu are reset to
the factory settings.
i If you want to retain the settings, do not
press the 9 reset button a second time. X Press the V or U button repeatedly
The Settings menu appears again after until the Settings menu appears in the
approximately 5 seconds. display.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
menu selection.
Z
X Press the W or X button to select the Using the steering wheel buttons
Inst. cluster submenu. X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the 9 button to select the Tem‐ until the Settings menu appears in the
perat. function. display.
The selection marker is on the current set- X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
ting. menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select the
unit for all messages in the display: °C Inst. cluster submenu.
(degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahren-
X Press the 9 button to select the Trip
heit).
function.
Selecting the unit for the digital speed- The selection marker is on the current set-
ometer ting.
unit for all messages in the display: km
(kilometers) or miles .
Selecting the language

display.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- The selected range of languages shown is just
menu selection. an example. The range of languages available
X Press the W or X button to select the is specific to each country.
Inst. cluster submenu. Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the 9 button to select the Dig.
speedo. function.
The selection marker is on the current set-
display.
ting.
menu selection.
unit for the digital speedometer: km/h or
mph .
Inst. cluster submenu.
Selecting the unit for distance X Press the 9 button to select the Lan‐
guage function.
ting.
X Press the W or X button to set the
language for all messages.

Selecting the display for the status bar X Press the 9 button to select the Tire

pres. function.
ting.
unit for the tire pressure in the display:
bar or psipsi.
Using the steering wheel buttons Clock/Date submenu

X Press the V or U button repeatedly Setting the time
display.
menu selection.
Inst. cluster submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the
Select disp. function. Using the steering wheel buttons
ting. X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the W or X button to select
display.
whether to display the outside temperature
or the speed (digital speedometer).
The selected display is then shown perma- menu selection.
nently in the lower part of the display. X Press the W or X button to select the
Clock/Date submenu.
Selecting the unit for the tire pressure X Press the 9 button to select Set
clock Hours or Minutes .
values.
Selecting the time format

display.
menu selection. Using the steering wheel buttons
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the V or U button repeatedly
Inst. cluster submenu. until the Settings menu appears in the
display.
menu selection.
Z
X Press the W or X button to select the Switching the daytime running lamps on/
Clock/Date submenu. off
X Press the 9 button to select the
12/24 h function.
ting.
12 h or 24 h clock format.
Lighting submenu If you switch the daytime running lamps func-

tion to On
On, the daytime running lamps will
Activating/deactivating Highbeam Assist automatically light up when the engine is run-
ning.
For safety reasons, it is only possible to
change this setting when the vehicle is sta-
tionary. The factory setting is On in countries
in which daytime running lamp mode or day-
time running lamps are mandatory .
Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the V or U button repeatedly
X Press the V or U button repeatedly until the Settings menu appears in the
until the Settings menu appears in the display.
display. X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the 9 button to switch to the submenu selection.
menu selection. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the W or X button to select the Lighting submenu.
Lighting submenu. X Press the 9 button to select the Day‐
X Press the 9 button to select the High‐ time runn. lamps function.
beam Assist function. The selection marker is on the current set-
The selection marker is on the current setting.
ting. X Press the W or X button to switch
X Press the W or X button to switch the daytime running lamps On or Off
Off.
Highbeam Assist On or Off . i If you turn the light switch to T or
i For safety reasons, it is not possible to L, the corresponding lamp switches on.
reset the Highbeam Assist function to the If you turn the light switch to Ã, the
factory settings during a journey. You will daytime running lamps remain switched
see the following message in the display: on.
Setting only possible at stand‐
i For safety reasons, it is not possible to
still.
still
reset the Daytime runn. lamps function
For further information about Highbeam to the factory setting while the vehicle is in
Assist, see (Y page 96). motion. You will see the following message
in the display: Setting only possible
at standstill.
standstill

Switching surround lighting on or off In the Headlamps submenu, you can set

whether and for how long you wish the exte-
rior lighting to remain on after closing the
doors.
display.
Using the steering wheel buttons X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
X Press the V or U button repeatedly menu selection.
until the Settings menu appears in the X Press the W or X button to select the
display. Lighting submenu.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- X Press the 9 button to select the Head‐
menu selection. lamps function.
X Press the W or X button to select the The selection marker is on the current set-
Lighting submenu. ting.
X Press the 9 button to select the Loc. X Press the W or X button to select
lighting function. whether and for how long you wish the
The selection marker is on the current set- exterior lighting to remain on.
ting. If you have set the delayed switch-off and
X Press the W or X button to switch switch off the engine, the following remain lit:
the surround lighting On or Off .
Rthe parking lamps
If you switch the surround lighting to On
On, the Rthe tail lamps
following lamps light up in the dark after you
Rthe license plate lamps
have unlocked the vehicle using the key:
Rthe fog lamps
Rthe parking lamps
Rthe tail lamps i You can reactivate this function by open-
Rthe license plate lamps ing a door within 10 minutes.
Rthe fog lamps If, after switching off the engine, you do not
open a door or you close an open door, the
The surround lighting automatically switches
exterior lighting switches off after
off after 40 seconds or if you:
60 seconds.
Ropen the driver's door
Rinsert the key into the ignition lock Vehicle submenu
Rlock the vehicle using the key
Setting the windshield wiper sensitivity
Setting the exterior lighting delayed
switch-off
You can use the Wipe sensor function to set

the sensitivity of the rain/ light sensor.
Z
Using the steering wheel buttons For further information about Blind Spot
X Press the V or U button repeatedly Assist; see (Y page 163).

display. Heating submenu
Selecting the switch-on time for the aux-
menu selection. iliary heating
Vehicle submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Wipe
sensor function.
ting.
X Press the W or X button to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain/light sensor. Using the steering wheel buttons
The levels are graded as follows: X Press the V or U button repeatedly
RLevel 1 high sensitivity – wiping begins
1: until the Settings menu appears in the
even in light rain display.
RLevel 2:2 moderate sensitivity X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub-
RLevel 3:3 low sensitivity – wiping only menu selection.

begins in heavy rain X Press the W or X button to select the
Heating submenu.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
X Press the 9 button to switch to the
Aux. heat. submenu selection
(Y page 124).
ting.
desired switch-on time.
Use the Timer off setting to deactivate
Using the steering wheel buttons automatic switch-on.
X Press the V or U button repeatedly X Press button V.
until the Settings menu appears in the The switch-on time is selected.
display.
X Press the 9 button to switch to the sub- Convenience submenu
menu selection.
Vehicle submenu.
X Press the 9 button to select the Blind
Spot Assist function.
ting.
X Press the W or X button to switch The Key function allows you to define whether
Blind Spot Assist On or Off . settings for some submenus are stored with a
key dependence.

This function pertains to the Inst. cluster = Average speed

(instrument cluster) menu, the Lighting ? Average fuel consumption
menu and the Vehicle menu.
X Press the V or U button to select
X Press the V or U button repeatedly After start.
start
or
display.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
After reset.
reset
menu selection.
X Press the W or X button to select the The values in the After start submenu
Convenience submenu. refer to the start of the journey. The values in
X Press the 9 button to select the Key
the After reset submenu are calculated
from the last time the trip computer was
function.
reset.
ting. The After start trip computer function is
X Press the W or X button to activate
automatically reset if:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
or deactivate key dependency.
than 4 hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
Trip computer menu R9,999 miles have been exceeded.

The After reset trip computer is automati-
General notes
cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
You can call up or reset statistical data for the 99,999 miles.
vehicle in the Trip computer menu.
i If you turn the key to position 0 in the
i When you call up the trip computer again, ignition lock or remove it, all the values are
it displays the last function called up. reset after approximately four hours.
The units of the statistical information dis- The values will not be reset if you turn the
played are set permanently for each spe- key back to position 1 or 2 during this time.
cific country, and are therefore independ-
ent of the units selected in the Settings Calling up the range
menu.
Trip computer "After start" or "After X Press the V or U button to select
reset" After start.
start
X Press the 9 or : button to select
Range.
Range
The approximate distance which can be
covered with the tank's current contents
and your current style of driving is shown.
i If there is only a small amount of fuel left
in the fuel tank, the 7 Please refuel
Example: "After start" trip computer message is shown instead of the range.
: Distance
; Time
Z
Resetting the trip computer X Press the V or U button on the steer-

ing wheel to select the TEL menu.
X When Please enter PIN: appears in the
X Press the V or U button to select display, enter the PIN using the mobile
After start.
start phone or audio equipment.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the The mobile phone will search for a network.
function you would like to reset. The display remains blank during this time.
X Press and hold the 9 reset button until the You will see the mobile phone operational
values are reset to "0". readiness display once the mobile phone
has found a network.
Telephone menu i You can obtain further information about

suitable mobile phones and connecting
Introduction mobile phones via Bluetooth® at any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G WARNING
If you operate information systems and com- i If the mobile phone operational readiness
munication equipment integrated in the vehi- symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside of
cle while driving, you will be distracted from the transmission and reception range.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Accepting a call
Only operate the equipment when the traffic X Press the 6 button on the steering
situation permits. If you are not sure that this wheel to accept an incoming call.
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention The display shows the call duration.
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary. Rejecting or ending a call
You must observe the legal requirements of X Press ~ button on the steering wheel to
the country in which you are currently driving reject or end a call.
when operating a mobile phone in the vehicle. The caller then hears the engaged tone.
If it is permitted to operate a mobile phone The display shows the mobile phone opera-
while the vehicle is in motion, only operate it tional readiness symbol again.
when road and traffic conditions permit.
If you have connected a mobile phone to the Dialing a number from the phone book
Sprinter hands-free system, you can operate
it using the functions in the TEL menu. You can enter new telephone numbers into
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the sep-
the phone book via the mobile phone (see the
arate operating instructions). separate operating instructions). If your
mobile phone is able to receive calls, you can
X Switch on the audio equipment (see the
search for and dial a number from the phone
separate operating instructions). book.
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection
between the mobile phone and the audio
equipment (see the separate operating
instructions).

Display messages 197
Using the steering wheel buttons Using the steering wheel buttons

X Use the V or U button to select the X Use the V or U button to select the
TEL menu. TEL menu.
The display shows the mobile phone opera- The display shows the mobile phone opera-
tional readiness symbol. tional readiness symbol.
X Press the 9 or : button to switch to X Press the 6 button.
the phone book. The display shows the most recently dialed
The on-board computer reads the phone numbers or names in the redial memory.
book stored on the SIM card or in the X Press the 9 or : button to select the
mobile phone. This may take more than a desired name or number.
minute. X To start dialing: press the 6 button.
When the message is no longer displayed, The on-board computer dials the corre-
reading has ended. sponding phone number.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the When a connection is established, the
desired name. name of the other person and/or the call
or duration appear in the display.
X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold or
the 9 or : button longer than 1 sec- X To exit the redial memory: press the
ond. ~ button.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
Using the steering wheel buttons Display messages
X To start dialing: press the 6 button. Notes on display messages
The on-board computer dials the corre-
sponding phone number. Important safety notes
When a connection is established, the G WARNING
name of the other person and/or the call
No information will be displayed if either the
duration appear in the display.
instrument cluster or the display is inopera-
X To exit the phone book: press the ~
tive.
button.
As a result, you will not be able to see warning
and indicator lamps or information about the
Redialing driving conditions, such as speed or outside
The on-board computer saves the last names temperature. Driving characteristics may be
or numbers dialed in the redial memory. impaired. Adjust your driving style and vehicle
speed accordingly.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
G WARNING
If service work is not carried out correctly, the
operating safety of your vehicle may be affec-
ted. This could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and cause an accident. More-
over, the safety systems may no longer be
Z
198 Display messages
able to protect you or others as they are Message memory

designed to do.
The on-board computer only records and
Always have service work carried out at a shows malfunctions and warnings from cer-
qualified specialist workshop. tain systems. Therefore, make sure that your
vehicle is safe to use. You could otherwise
i If you turn the key to position 2 in the cause an accident by driving an unsafe vehi-
ignition, a display check is performed. All cle.
warning/indicator lamps (except the turn
The on-board computer stores certain display
signal indicator lamps) and the display are
messages. In the Message memory menu,
activated. Before starting the journey,
check that the warning and indicator lamps you can call up stored display messages.
are operating correctly. Using the steering wheel buttons
Vehicles without steering wheel but- until the number of stored display mes-
tons sages, e.g. 2 messages
messages, appears in the dis-
Warnings, malfunctions or additional infor- play.
mation may also be shown in the display. The If no malfunctions have occurred, the No
following tables show all the display mes- messages message appears.
sages. A warning tone sounds with certain X Scroll through the stored display messages
display messages. with the 9 or : button.
X To exit the message memory menu:
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons press the V or U button.
The on-board computer shows warnings, mal- When you switch off the ignition, all display
functions or additional information in the dis- messages are deleted from the message
play. A warning tone sounds with certain dis- memory. You can only remove the key when it
play messages. Display messages of a high is in the basic position.
priority are shown in red.
Please respond in accordance with the dis-
play messages and follow the additional
notes in this Operator's Manual.
You can hide low-priority display messages by
pressing the V, U, 9 or : but-
ton on the steering wheel or the 9 reset but-
ton.
You cannot hide display messages of the
highest priority. These messages will con-
tinue to be shown in the display until their
cause has been eliminated.
The on-board computer stores certain display
messages in the message memory
(Y page 198).

Display messages on vehicles without steering wheel buttons

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is
also displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a
NO TPMS The NO message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message is

also displayed after 30 seconds.
The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
wheels because:
Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units
has been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have wheels with suitable wheel electronics units installed at a

— — TPMS The — — message is displayed for 30 seconds. The TPMS message

is also displayed after 30 seconds.
The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures
of the individual tires differ significantly.
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary
(Y page 291).
Z

Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ã indicator lamp also flashes and
then lights up constantly.
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
RThe camera's functionality is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by
dirt or snow.
RThe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
X Stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away (Y page 149).
X Clean the windshield (Y page 267), particularly in the camera's
field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is
operational again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¯ In addition, the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp and the

yellow å DEF indicator lamp light up and a warning tone
dEF Chk sounds.
The DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or is not compli-
ant with ISO 22241.
After the first message and under normal operating conditions,
you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then a
warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started
another 10 times.
X Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist
workshop as soon as possible.


¯ In addition, the yellow å DEF indicator lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds.
dEF Chk The DEF supply has dropped below 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
After the message appears for the first time, and under normal
driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx-
imately 1000 miles (1600 km).
After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warning
tone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be started
another 16 times.
X Add DEF (Y page 147).
The å DEF indicator lamp disappears after no more than
20 seconds after the vehicle has stopped or you have switched
on the ignition or started the engine after refueling.

warning tone sequence sounds.
StArtS RExx After the message appears for the first time, the engine can only be
started another 10 times.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (1010 to 0) is shown in the
message every time the engine is started. When the number of
remaining engine starts is 0 the engine management prevents the
vehicle being driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h). The
Idle Mode message appears in the multifunction display.
ant with ISO 22241.
The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission

relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can
damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z


warning tone sequence sounds.
StArtS RExx The DEF supply has dropped below the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve
mark.
After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF
supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). The
engine can then only be started another 16 times.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (16 16 to 1) is shown in the
message every time the engine is started.
X Add at least 2.0 US gal (7.6 l) of DEF (Y page 147).
¯ If the message StArtS IdLE is displayed, you cannot drive the

vehicle at a speed exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h).
StArtS IdLE
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the _ indicator lamp also flashes and
then goes out.
Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily not operational or
Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
Possible causes are:
fog.

field of vision.
If the _ indicator lamp goes out, Highbeam Assist is opera-
tional again.
If the problem persists, visit a qualified specialist workshop.


Blind_Err flashes for 5 seconds, the yellow indicator lamps flash in the exte-
rior mirrors and then light up constantly.
Blind Spot Assist is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Err flashes for 5 seconds, the Ä indicator lamp also flashes and
then lights up constantly.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
Z
Display messages on vehicles with steering wheel buttons

Safety systems

ABS ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunction. ESP®, ASR and
Visit workshop BAS, as well as cruise control, have also been deactivated as a
result.
G WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The
braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Drive on with care.
ABS ABS is temporarily unavailable or is deactivated due to undervolt-

Unavailable age. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also
unavailable as a result.
The battery may not be being charged.
G WARNING
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired. The
braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
X Drive for a short distance at a speed of more than 13 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:


: ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
The engine power output may be reduced.
Visit workshop
G WARNING
: BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without
electronic support.
The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situa-
tions.
: ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Unavailable
G WARNING
tions. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
Brake wear Visit
workshop
Z

b There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
Brake fluid Visit G WARNING

workshop Braking performance can be impaired.
X Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir
(Y page 254).
If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark:
X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
If the brake fluid is above the MIN mark:

b EBD has been deactivated due to undervoltage.

Brake force distri‐
bution G WARNING
The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
X Do not drive on.
b EBD has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Brake force distri‐ G WARNING

bution Visit work‐ The rear wheels could lock when you apply the brakes. The braking
shop distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
X Do not drive on.


ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to a malfunction. As a result,
Visit workshop cruise control has also been deactivated.
Engine power output may be reduced.
G WARNING
ESP ESP® has been deactivated due to undervoltage. As a result, cruise

Unavailable control has also been deactivated.
G WARNING
X Consult a qualified specialized workshop as soon as possible.
c Additionally, a warning tone sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.
Parking brake
X Release the parking brake (Y page 150).
Release brake
7 The belt system has malfunctioned.
Seatbelt sys. G WARNING

Visit workshop In the event of an accident or a rapid deceleration, the seat belts
either cannot protect you as intended.
6 The restraint system is faulty.
Restraint system G WARNING

Visit workshop If the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual systems could
be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in the
event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
Z
Lights
b The left-hand low beam is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam left
(Y page 100).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
b The right-hand low-beam headlamp is faulty3.

X Halogen headlamps: replace the bulb as soon as possible
Low beam right
(Y page 100).
X Bi-Xenon headlamps: consult a qualified specialist workshop
as soon as possible.
b The left-hand cornering light is faulty3.

X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 100).
Cornering lt. left
b The right-hand cornering light is faulty3.

Cornering lt. right
b The automatic headlamp feature is active: the light switch is in the

Ã position and you have forgotten to remove the key.
Lights on auto‐
matic. Remove key
b The left-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) or
Turn signal left
rear (Y page 103) indicator lamp.
b The right-hand turn signal is faulty.

X Change the bulb as soon as possible in the front (Y page 102) or
Turn signal right
rear (Y page 103) indicator lamp.
b The left brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp left
b The right brake lamp is faulty3.

Brake lamp right
3 Depending on the equipment, the bulb-failure indicator may not be featured for any lamps other than the turn
signals.


b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty3. This display message will
only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Third brake lamp
b The left high-beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam left
b The right high-beam headlamp is faulty3.

High beam right
b A license plate lamp is faulty3.

License plate lamp
b You have forgotten to switch off the lights when leaving the vehi-
cle.
Switch off lights
X Turn the light switch to $.
b The left-hand front fog lamp is faulty.3

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
Foglamp front left
cialist workshop.
b The right-hand front fog lamp is faulty3.

X Have the bulb replaced as soon as possible at a qualified spe-
Foglamp front right
cialist workshop.
b The rear foglamp is faulty3.

Rear foglamp
b The front left parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
left
b The front right parking lamp/standing lamp is faulty3.

Parking lamp front
right
b A reversing lamp is faulty3.

Reverse lamp
signals.
Z

b The left-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp left
b The right-hand tail lamp is faulty.3

Tail lamp right
b A perimeter lamp is faulty.3

Perim. lamps
Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is faulty.
inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Highbeam Assist Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.

temporarily Possible causes are:
unavailable
fog.

field of vision.
If the malfunction has been rectified, the Highbeam Assist
Now Available message appears.
signals.

Engine

Exhaust Filter: The automatic regeneration of the diesel particle filter is not suf-
Drive at high ficient or has malfunctioned.
engine speed. See X Drive at an engine speed of above 2000 rpm until the display
Oper. Manual message disappears.
If the display message does not go out after approximately
20 minutes, have the malfunction rectified immediately at a
Check Diesel The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below
Exhaust Fluid See 1.5 US gal (5.5 l).
Operator's Manual After the message appears for the first time, and under normal
driving conditions, the remaining DEF supply will last for approx-
imately 1000 miles (1600 km).
After that, the 0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark is reached. A warning
tone sequence sounds and the engine can then only be started
another 16 times.
X Add DEF supply (Y page 147).
After topping up, the system check takes approximately
20 seconds. The display message then disappears.
Check Diesel If the yellow ; Check Engine indicator lamp lights up as well,
Exhaust Fluid See the DEF reducing agent is contaminated, diluted or not compliant
Operator's Manual with ISO 22241.
After the first message and under normal operating conditions,
you can drive on for up to approximately 50 miles (80 km). Then a
warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started
another 10 times.
Have the DEF tank cleaned and refilled at a qualified specialist
å The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply has dropped below the
0.8 US gal (3.0 l) reserve mark.
XX starts remaining After the message appears for the first time, the remaining DEF
supply will last for approximately 1000 miles (1600 km). The
engine can then only be started another 16 times.
The number of remaining engine starts XX (1616 to 0) is shown in the
message every time the engine is started.
The display message disappears no more than 20 seconds after
the vehicle has stopped or you have switched on the ignition or
started the engine after refueling.
Z

å The vehicle cannot be driven at a speed exceeding 5 mph

(8 km/h).
Idle Mode
ant with ISO 22241.
workshop immediately.
The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission

relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can
damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
? The coolant temperature is too high.

If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads,
Coolant Stop, turn the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is
engine off switched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for
example, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message
continues to be shown.
* The coolant level is too low.

Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine
Coolant Check level could overheat and be damaged.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 325).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
7 The fuel level has fallen into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145).
Reserve fuel Drive
to a filling stat.
: The water that has collected in the water separator has reached
the maximum level.
Water in fuel
X Drain the water separator (Y page 255).
Visit workshop


4 The oil level is too low.
X Check the oil level the next time you refuel (Y page 250), and
Engine oil Add 1.0
add oil.
quart(Canada: 1.0
liter)
4 You want to check the engine oil level even though the engine is
still running.
Engine oil level
X Switch off the engine.
Not when eng. run‐
X Check the oil level (Y page 250).
ning
4 You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging
the engine or catalytic converter.
Engine oil level
X Check the oil level (Y page 250).
Reduce oil level
X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted at the
next qualified specialist workshop.
X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified at the
next qualified specialist workshop.
4 There is not enough or no oil in the engine. There is a danger of

engine damage.
Engine oil level
Stop, turn engine
off
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).
X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a
4 There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.

X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
Oil sensor Visit
workshop.
workshop
Z
Driving systems

Cruise control Cruise control has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
Visit workshop X Have cruise control checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Lane Keep. Assist and the Ã indicator lamp lights up.

Temporarily Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Unavailable Possible causes are:
RThere are no lane markings present.
fog.
RThe camera cannot recognize the road markings:
- It is too dark.
- The lane markings are worn or are covered, for example, by
dirt or snow.

field of vision.
If the Ã indicator lamp goes out, Lane Keeping Assist is
operational again.
Lane Keep. Assist Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is faulty.

Inoperative X Have Blind Spot Assist checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is faulty.

tion Assist Inoper‐ X Have COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST checked at a qualified
ative specialist workshop.


Recognition by the radar sensor system can be impaired in the
case of:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors
Rit is snowing or raining heavily
Rthere is interference from other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking
garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike
X Clean the radar sensor system area.
Intervention The d indicator lamp also flashes in the instrument cluster.

Crosswind Assist Crosswind Assist has intervened perceptibly.
Tires

Tire pres. Adjust The pressure is insufficient in one or more tires, or the pressures
pres. of the individual tires differ significantly.
O X Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity and correct it if
necessary (Y page 291).
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.

monitor inopera‐ X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a
tive qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pres. The tire pressure monitor function is temporarily unavailable due
monitor currently to radio interference or undervoltage.
unavailable X Once the causes have been remedied, the tire pressure monitor
is automatically activated.
Tire pres.- The tire pressure monitor is not receiving signals from one or more
monitor inopera‐ wheels because:
tive No wheel sen‐ Ra wheel has been replaced with the spare wheel without wheel
sors electronics.
Rthe maximum temperature on one of the wheel electronics units
has been exceeded.
Rthe wheel electronics are malfunctioning.
X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a

Z

Check tire(s) The pressure of one or more tires has dropped significantly. If the
tire pressure monitor has detected the affected wheel, the wheel
O position is also displayed.
X Check the tires.
X Repair or change the wheel if necessary (Y page 305).
X Check the tire pressure and correct it if necessary
(Y page 291).
The display message disappears automatically after driving for a
few minutes with the corrected tire pressure.
Warning Tire defect One or more tires is losing air rapidly. If the tire pressure monitor
has detected the affected wheel, the wheel position is also dis-
O played.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers, paying attention to the traffic conditions as you do
so.
X Repair or change the wheel (Y page 305).
Vehicle
# The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective

alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
Battery/Alterna‐
tor Visit workshop
X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult a
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
÷ The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not

at all.
Electrical Step
X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
X Open or close the sliding door again.
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push
the step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remind
the passengers that the step is missing.

Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster 217

1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though the hood is
not closed.
Hood open
X Close the hood.
9 You have not yet entered your PIN in the mobile phone.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
Please enter PIN:
1 You are already driving at walking pace, even though not all the
doors are closed.
Doors open
X Close the doors.
¦ The washer fluid level is too low.

X Add washer fluid (Y page 255).
Check wash. fluid
level
Key
+ The key is no longer working.

Replace key Visit
workshop
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster
When switching on the ignition, some systems carry out a self-test. Some indicator and warn-
ing lamps may temporarily turn on or start to flash. This is not an indication of any problem.
Only when these indicator and warning lights turn on or start flashing after the engine has
started or during the journey has a malfunction occurred.
Z
218 Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster

d The yellow ASR/ G WARNING

ESP® warning
ESP® or ASR is intervening because at least one of the wheels has
lamp flashes
reached its tire grip limit.
while the vehicle
is in motion. Cruise control is deactivated for the duration of the intervention.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and traffic conditions.
Do not use too much throttle.
X Drive slowly.
d The yellow ASR/ ASR is deactivated.

ESP® warning
G WARNING
lamp is lit while
the engine is The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
running. There is an increased risk of skidding and accidents.
X Activate ASR again. Exceptions (Y page 58).
h!:b EBD is malfunctioning or deactivated due to undervoltage or mal-

The yellow ESP®, ABS function.
and ASR/BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged.
lamps and the red
G WARNING
brake system indicator
lamp are lit while the The rear wheels could lock sooner than expected when you apply
engine is running. the brakes. The braking distance can increase in emergency brak-
ing situations.
X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-
sages in the display (Y page 197).
X Do not drive on.


b The red brake There is insufficient brake fluid in the expansion tank.
system indicator
lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is Braking performance can be impaired.
running. There is a risk of an accident.
X Check the brake fluid level in the expansion tank (Y page 254).
X If the brake fluid is below the MIN mark: do not drive on!
X Do not add brake fluid. This does not solve the problem.
b When towing a G WARNING

trailer: the red
The brake force booster in the trailer is faulty.
brake system
indicator lamp is The driving and braking characteristics of your vehicle could
lit while the change. There is a risk of the trailer overbraking and of you losing
engine is run- control over the truck/trailer combination.
ning. There is a risk of an accident.
Additionally, a X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: also observe the mes-
warning tone sages in the display (Y page 197).
sounds. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
X Do not drive on.
: The yellow ASR/ ASR has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

BAS indicator The engine power output may be reduced.
lamp is lit while
the engine is G WARNING
running. The driven wheels can spin when accelerating.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Z

: The yellow ASR/ BAS has been deactivated due to a malfunction.

BAS indicator
lamp is lit while G WARNING
the engine is The brake system continues to function normally, but without
running. electronic support.
tions.
: The yellow ASR/ ASR and BAS have been deactivated due to undervoltage.
BAS indicator The battery may not be being charged.
lamp is lit while
the engine is G WARNING
running. The brake system is still available with the normal braking effect.
tions.


! The yellow ABS ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction or is temporarily unavail-
indicator lamp is able. ESP®, ASR and BAS, as well as cruise control, are also
lit while the unavailable as a result.
engine is run- Self-diagnosis may not be complete, or the battery may not be
ning. charging.
G WARNING
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock, e.g. if the
brakes are applied with maximum force.
This causes steerability and braking to be greatly impaired.
tions.
X Drive a short distance at a speed above 13 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
indicator lamp goes out.
If the indicator lamp does not go out:
å The yellow DEF The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or the current
indicator lamp is Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) supply is limiting the vehicle range.
lit while the X Observe the messages in the display.
engine is run-
ning.
h The yellow ESP® ESP® is deactivated due to undervoltage or a malfunction. As a

indicator lamp is result, cruise control has also been deactivated.
lit while the Engine power output may be reduced.
engine is run- The battery may not be being charged.
ning.
G WARNING
Z

6 The red warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned.

lamp does not
go out approx- G WARNING
imately If the restraint systems are malfunctioning, individual systems
4 seconds after could be triggered inadvertently or might not be triggered at all in
the ignition is the event of an accident.
switched on, or There is an increased risk of injury and accidents.
it lights up again. X Drive on with care.
# The red battery The battery is not being charged. Possible causes are a defective
indicator lamp is alternator or a torn poly-V-belt.
lit while the X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
engine is run- and traffic conditions.
ning. X Check the poly-V-belt.
X If the poly-V-belt is torn: do not continue driving. Consult the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible by a qualified specialist workshop.
# The red battery The battery is faulty.

indicator lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
lit while the and traffic conditions.
engine is run- X Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
ning.
# The yellow brake The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
pad wear indica-
tor lamp is lit G WARNING
after the engine Braking performance can be impaired.
is started or There is a risk of an accident.
while the vehicle X Have the brake pads/linings replaced as soon as possible at a
is in motion. qualified specialist workshop.
4 The yellow The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
engine oil level X Check the engine for oil loss.
warning lamp is X
If oil loss is detected: consult a qualified specialist workshop
lit after the
immediately.
engine is started
or while the vehi- X If no oil loss is detected: check the oil level and add engine oil
cle is in motion. (Y page 251).


4 The yellow On vehicles with a diesel engine, the oil level display additionally
engine oil level appears in the display, e.g. – 2.0 qts (Canada: – 2.0 ltr).ltr
warning lamp There is not enough or no oil in the engine.
flashes and the There is a danger of engine damage.
warning buzzer
sounds after the
engine is started and traffic conditions.
or while the vehi- X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).
cle is in motion. X If the engine oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified
X If the engine oil level is too low: have the vehicle towed to a
4 The yellow The engine oil level is above the maximum level.
engine oil level There is a risk of damaging the engine or catalytic converter.
warning lamp X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick (Y page 251).
lights up and the
warning buzzer X If the oil level is too high: have the engine oil extracted as soon
sounds after the as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
engine is started X If the oil level is correct: have the malfunction rectified as soon
or while the vehi- as possible at a qualified specialist workshop.
cle is in motion.
4 On vehicles with There is a malfunction in the engine oil level display.

a diesel engine, X Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist
the yellow workshop.
engine oil level
warning lamp
lights up repeat-
edly during the
journey.
% The yellow cool- The coolant level is too low.

ant level warning Never run the engine if the coolant level is too low. The engine
lamp lights up could overheat and be damaged.
while the engine X
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
is running.
X Switch off the engine and let it cool down.
X Add coolant and be sure to observe the warning notes
(Y page 253).
X If you need to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling
system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z

? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.

warning lamp is X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road
lit while the and traffic conditions.
engine is run- X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
ning.
? The red coolant The coolant temperature is too high.

warning lamp is If the vehicle is stopped after being subjected to extreme loads,
lit while the the coolant warning lamp may come on when the ignition is
engine is run- switched on or the engine is restarted. Such loads can be, for
ning. example, driving in mountainous terrain or driving with a trailer.
X Run the engine for approximately 1 minute at idling speed.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop if the display message
continues to be shown.
7 The yellow The fuel filler cap is not closed.

| reserve fuel X Close the fuel filler cap.
warning lamp is You will hear a click when the fuel filler cap is closed fully.
on. At the same X
If the malfunction continues to be displayed, have it rectified
time, 0, appears
in the fuel tank
content display
while the engine
is running,
although there is
fuel in the fuel
tank.
; The yellow You have used up all fuel in the tank.

Check Engine The engine is running in emergency mode.
indicator lamp is X
Refuel at the nearest gas station (Y page 145).
lit up or flashes
while the engine X Bleed the fuel system (Y page 141).
is running. X Start the engine three to four times in succession after refueling.
Emergency running mode will be canceled. The vehicle does not
need to be checked.
; The yellow The injection control is malfunctioning.

Check Engine The engine is running in emergency mode.
indicator lamp is Engine power output may be reduced.
lit up or flashes
while the engine X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop as
is running. soon as possible.
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine
indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist
workshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.


; The yellow The exhaust gas aftertreatment is malfunctioning or an emission
Check Engine relevant malfunction has occurred. This malfunction or defect can
indicator lamp is damage the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
lit while the After the first message and under normal operating conditions,
engine is run- you can drive on for up to approximately 500 mi (800 km). Then a
ning. warning tone sequence sounds and the engine can only be started
another 16 times.
X Observe the messages in the display.
X Have the exhaust gas aftertreatment checked immediately at a
In some states it is legally prescribed that after the check engine
indicator lamp lights up you must contact a qualified specialist
workshop immediately. Observe the legal requirements.
% If you turn the At extremely low temperatures, the engine may not start.
key to position 2 There is a malfunction in the preglow system.
in the ignition X Have any malfunction rectified at a qualified specialist work-
lock, the yellow shop.
preglow indica-
tor lamp
remains lit for
approximately
1 minute. Or the
yellow preglow
indicator lamp
lights up for
approximately
1 minute while
the engine is
running.
È The yellow air fil- The service limit for the air filter has been reached. The air filter is
ter indicator dirty.
lamp is lit while X Have the air filter element replaced as soon as possible at a
the engine is qualified specialist workshop.
running.
Z

h The yellow tire G WARNING

pressure moni-
The tire pressure monitor indicates a rapid or severe loss of pres-
tor warning lamp
sure in at least one tire.
comes on.
X Stop the vehicle without making any extreme steering maneu-
vers or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions
while doing so.
X Check the tires and correct the tire pressure. If a tire continues
to lose pressure, it must be replaced. Replace damaged tires
immediately.
The warning light will go out after the flat tire has been rectified
and you have been driving for a few minutes.
h US vehicles The tire pressure monitor has malfunctioned.

only: X Have the tire pressure monitor and the wheels checked at a
The yellow tire qualified specialist workshop.
pressure moni-
tor warning lamp
flashes for
60 seconds and
then remains lit.
: The yellow water The water that has collected in the water separator of the fuel filter
separator indi- has reached the maximum level.
cator lamp is lit X Drain the water separator (Y page 255).
when the igni-
tion is switched
on.
¦ The yellow The water level is too low.

washer fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 255).
level indicator
lamp for the
windshield
washer/head-
lamp cleaning
system is lit
after the engine
is started or
while the vehicle
is in motion.


7 The red seat belt The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten your seat belt.
warning lamp X Fasten seat belt (Y page 45).
lights up contin-
uously or
flashes. A warn-
ing tone may
also sound.
b When the key is One of the exterior lighting bulbs is faulty, with the exception of the
turned to posi- perimeter lamps and the trailer lighting.
tion 2 in the igni-
i Depending on the equipment, the bulb failure indicator can fail
tion lock, the
for all lamps with the exception of the turn signal lamps.
yellow bulb
warning lamp X Replace the faulty bulb as soon as possible (Y page 99).
lights up.
1 The yellow "door The vehicle is moving without all doors or the hood being closed.
open" indicator X Close the doors or hood.
lamp is lit while
driving.
1 The yellow "door The electrical step has retracted or extended only partially or not
open" indicator at all.
lamp is lit. X Make sure there is sufficient free space for the electrical step.
X Open or close the sliding door again.
X If the electrical step still does not extend or retract fully, push
the step in manually (Y page 74). Before stepping out, remind
the passengers that the step is missing.
Z
228

229

Stowage spaces and stowage com-
partments .......................................... 230
Folding table in the twin co-driver's
seat .................................................... 234
Cup holder ......................................... 234
Bottle holder ...................................... 235
Ashtray .............................................. 235
Stowing and features

Cigarette lighter ................................ 235
12 V socket ....................................... 236
Mobile phone ..................................... 236
Additional communications equip-
ment ................................................... 237

230 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Useful information Glove box

relevant to safety.

Glove box (example: glove box with a lockable lid)
1 Unlocked
Stowage spaces and stowage com- 2 Locked
partments = Glove box handle
Important safety notes You can lock and unlock the glove box using
the mechanical or folding key.
G WARNING
X To open: unlock the glove box lid if neces-
If you do not correctly store objects in the
vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung sary.
around, thus striking vehicle occupants. X Pull glove box handle = in the direction of
There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- the arrow.
ing or abruptly changing directions.
RAlways store objects so that they cannot be
flung around in these or in similar situa-
tions.
RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage compartments, parcel
nets or stowage nets.
RClose lockable stowage compartments
while driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too ? Card holder
large in the trunk.
A Pen holder
In addition, observe the information in the X To close: fold the glove box up and press it
"Loading guidelines" section (Y page 240). until it engages.

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 231
Eyeglasses compartment in the over-

head control panel

Stowage space (example: co-driver's side)
X To open: briefly press cover :.

The eyeglasses compartment opens down-
wards.
X To close: press the eyeglasses compart-
ment into the overhead control panel until
it engages.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment equipped with smartphone
connections
Dashboard stowage compartments
= USB port
G WARNING ? 3.5 mm audio jack
Objects protruding from the stowage com- i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
partment above the co-driver front air bag USB port and an AUX-in connection is
could obstruct or even prevent deployment of installed in the stowage compartment. A
the co-driver front air bag. The co-driver front Media Interface is a universal interface for
air bag may then fail to provide the intended portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod®
protection. There is an increased risk of or MP3 player (see the separate audio sys-
injury. tem operating instructions).
Do not place any protruding objects in the
stowage compartment above the co-driver
front air bag.
! The right and left storage spaces may be

loaded with a maximum of 11 lb (5 kg) each.
Z
232 Stowage spaces and stowage compartments
Stowage compartment in the center On vehicles with a partition, stowage

console space : can only be loaded from the cargo
compartment.
Stowage space above the windshield

! The right and left stowage spaces may be
loaded with a maximum of 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
each.
Stowage compartment on the dashboard above

the center console (example with lid)
The stowage compartments on and in the
center console can be used to store small,
light objects.
X To open: pull release handle ;.
Lid : swings up.
X To close: close lid : and engage it.
Stowage compartment (example: driver's side)
: Stowage compartment
The lid of the stowage compartment must
remain closed while the vehicle is in motion
to ensure that stowed objects are con- Stowage compartment under the twin
tained safely. co-driver's seat
Stowage space above the headliner

! The entire stowage space may be loaded
with a maximum of 66 lb (30 kg).
Do not place high, bulky loads in the stow-
age space. You could otherwise damage
the headliner in the event of sharp braking.
Twin co-driver's seat (example: Cargo Van)

You can stow various articles in the stowage
compartment under the twin co-driver's seat.
X To fold a seat cushion forwards: lift the
seat cushion out of front anchorage :.
X Pull the seat cushion forwards slightly and
out of rear anchorage ;.
X Fold the rear edge of the seat cushion up.

Stowage spaces and stowage compartments 233
X To fold the seat cushion back: fold down X To fold up the rear bench seat: lift seat
the seat cushion by the rear edge. cushion : out of the front anchorage and
X Slide the seat cushion under the seat back- fold it upwards in the direction of the arrow.
rest into rear anchorage ;.
X Push down on the seat cushion at the front
until it engages in front anchorage :.
Stowage compartment under the rear

bench seat
G WARNING
Always secure the folded-up seat cushion
with the retainer loop. The seat cushion could
otherwise drop down unexpectedly and
thereby cause injury to yourself or others.
G WARNING
When folding down the seat cushion, make
sure that nobody can become trapped. Retainer loops ; are secured to the outer
head restraints.
! The retainer loop is neither a grab handle
X Attach retainer loop ; to hook = under-
for people to use nor a securing point for
loads. It may tear if used incorrectly. neath folded-up seat cushion :.
X To fold down the seat cushion: hold seat
cushion : and detach retainer loop ;
from hook =.
X Fold down seat cushion :.
The seat cushion engages automatically.
Paper holder
For vehicles with a crewcab, you can use the

stowage compartment under the rear bench
seat to safely store tools and other small
items. X To open: press the top of paper holder :.
Z
234 Cup holder
Folding table in the twin co-driver's you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
seat a risk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
G WARNING stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or tainers of the right size. Always close the con-
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip tainer, particularly if the liquid is hot.
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- ! Do not use the cup holder recesses as
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- ashtrays. This could damage the cup hold-
den change in direction. ers.

Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
Cup holders in the dashboard
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
Cup holder in dashboard stowage compartment

(example: right-hand side of vehicle)
X To fold down the folding table: pull fold- : Cup holder
ing table : forward by the tab. i If your vehicle is equipped with a twin co-
X Fold folding table : down in the direction driver's seat, you will find further cup hold-
of the arrow and onto the seat cushion. ers (Y page 234) in the folding table.
i The folding table is equipped with a pen
holder and cup holder.
Cup holders in the center console
Cup holder
G WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and Cup holders in the center console

Cigarette lighter 235
XTo open: pull out ashtray compartment : X Pull ashtray compartment : out by
by the recess. recess ;.
Clamping arm ; of the cup holder opens X To open: fold cover = upwards.
out fully. X To remove the insert: hold the ashtray by
i Vehicles with the non-smoking package the recesses on the left and right and pull
have an additional cup holder instead of the the insert out to empty it.
ashtray. X To replace the insert: press it down into
X Place the beverage container into the cup the holder as shown.
holder and push clamping arm ; against Make sure that the insert is inserted cor-

the container. rectly. Otherwise you will not be able to
X To close: push ashtray compartment : close ashtray compartment :.
into the center console until it engages.
Ashtrays in the passenger compart-

Bottle holder ment
Ashtrays on the left and right in the side trim panels

Bottle holders : in the front doors (example: co-
driver's door) X To open: fold out the ashtray.
X To remove the insert: press retaining
clip : down and remove the ashtray from
Ashtray the trim.
X To replace the insert: insert the ashtray
Ashtray in the center console
down into the trim and close it.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
Ashtray in the center console
Z
236 Mobile phone
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: The 12 V sockets for accessories are:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ron the lower section of the center console
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to (12 V, 25 A)
objects, for example Ron the inside of the driver's seat frame
There is a risk of fire and injury. (12 V, 15 A)

Rin the respective corner trim next to the
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is rear doors in the passenger compartment
out of reach of children. Never leave children (12 V, 15 A)
unsupervised in the vehicle. Rin the cargo compartment next to the left
rear door (12 V, 15 A)

You can use the 12 V sockets (15 A) for
accessories with a maximum power con-
sumption of 180 W. You can connect acces-
sories with a maximum power consumption
of 300 W to the 12 V socket (25 A) on the
lower section of the center console.
i The sockets are supplied with power even
when the key is removed from the ignition
lock. If accessories, e.g. a coolbox, remain
connected while the engine is not running,
X To use the cigarette lighter: turn the key the battery will discharge.
to position 1 in the ignition lock.
X Press in cigarette lighter :.
Mobile phone
The cigarette lighter will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot. Important safety notes
X Pull the cigarette lighter out of the socket
G WARNING
by its handle.
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
12 V socket
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driving
when operating mobile phones.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Socket on the lower section of the center console (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
: 12 V socket (25 A) covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.

Additional communications equipment 237
You and others can suffer health-related dam- Additional communications equip-
age through electromagnetic radiation. By ment
using an exterior antenna, a possible health
risk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis- Important safety notes
cussed in scientific circles, is taken into
G WARNING
account. Only have the exterior antenna
installed by a qualified specialist workshop. If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
We recommend the use of an approved exte-
rior antenna for operating the mobile phone.
Only in this way can optimal mobile phone

reception quality in the vehicle be ensured Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
and mutual interference between the vehicle is stationary.
electronics and mobile phones minimized.
You must observe the legal requirements for
Observe the legal requirements for each indi- the country in which you are currently driving
vidual country. when operating mobile communication
equipment.
Please remember, a navigation system does
Mobile phone pre-installation
not supply information on the load-bearing
The mobile phone pre-installation includes a capacity of bridges or the overhead clearance
hands-free system integrated into the vehi- of underpasses. The driver remains responsi-
cle. The microphone for the hands-free sys- ble for safety at all times.
tem is installed in the overhead control panel You and others can suffer health-related dam-
or in the overhead stowage compartment age through electromagnetic radiation. By
together with the front interior light. using an exterior antenna, a possible health
In order to use the hands-free system, you will risk caused by electromagnetic fields, as dis-
need a special bracket. The Sprinter acces- cussed in scientific circles, is taken into
sories include brackets for various mobile account. Only have the exterior antenna
phone models. installed by a qualified specialist workshop.
i Mobile phone brackets which are availa- You will find information on installing electri-
ble from various manufacturers on the cal or electronic equipment in the “Vehicle
open market are not compatible with the electronics” section (Y page 316).
Sprinter telephone system. You can recog-
nize suitable holders for your mobile phone
by the imprinted star and the B6 spare part Installation for PND mobile navigation
number on the back of the bracket. devices
Detailed instructions for use can be found in You can secure a personal navigation device
the operating instructions for the mobile (Personal Navigation Device PND) using a
phone bracket and in the separate operating commercially available adapter.
instructions for the mobile phone pre-instal-
lation.
i The mobile phone battery is charged
depending on the condition of charge and
the position of the key in the ignition lock.
The mobile phone display indicates the
charging process.
Z
238 Additional communications equipment
PND connector (on the side behind the instrument

cluster)
= USB port
? 3.5 mm audio jack for the PND audio sig-
nal (voice announcements)
X Connecting the PND: connect the PND
ports to the appropriate jacks in the vehi-
cle.
i You can also use USB port = and 3.5 mm
audio jack ? for external audio sources.
The voice announcements are heard through
the radio speakers when you start navigation.
The audio source played until this point is
then muted for the duration of the voice
announcements.
i If you use audio devices or personal nav-
igation devices which have been recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, you can use all
of the functions available, such as the mute
function.
You can obtain further information from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

239

Loading guidelines ............................ 240
Load distribution ............................... 242
Securing loads .................................. 242
Carrier systems ................................. 245
Transporting loads

240 Loading guidelines
Useful information them slipping or tipping over. If you remove a

rear bench seat, it is advisable to store it out-
This Operator's Manual describes all models side the vehicle.
your vehicle that were available at the time of G WARNING
going to print. Country-specific variations are When the permissible wheel loads, axle loads
possible. Note that your vehicle may not be and/or the maximum permissible gross vehi-
equipped with all of the described functions. cle weight are exceeded, driving safety is
This also applies to systems and functions compromised. The handling as well as steer-
relevant to safety. ing and braking characteristics may be signif-
Read the information on qualified specialist icantly impaired. Overloaded tires may over-
workshops (Y page 25). heat, causing them to burst. There is a risk of
an accident.
Transporting loads
When transporting a load, always observe the

Loading guidelines permissible wheel loads, axle loads and the
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
for the vehicle (including occupants).
G WARNING
As a result of improperly placed or unevenly G WARNING
distributed loads, the center of gravity of the When you load the roof, the center of gravity
load being transported may be too high or too of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
far back. This can significantly impair handling istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
as well as steering and braking characteris- load, the driving characteristics, as well as
tics. There is a risk of an accident. steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Always make sure that the center of gravity of There is a risk of an accident.
the load is: Never exceed the maximum roof load and
Rbetween
adjust your driving style.
the axles
and ! If you are using a roof carrier, observe the
Ras low as possible, near the rear axle. maximum roof load and maximum roof car-
rier load.
G WARNING You will find information about the maximum
When objects are unsecured or inadequately roof load in the "Technical data" section
secured, they can slip, turn over or be thrown (Y page 328) and information about roof car-
about, striking vehicle occupants. This also riers in the "Carrier systems" section
applies to: (Y page 245).
Rluggage or loads RDo not stack luggage or loads higher than
Ra rear bench seat which has been removed the backrests.
and is being transported in the vehicle in an RStow objects preferably in the cargo com-
exceptional case. partment.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the RWhen transporting luggage, always use the
event of braking maneuvers or abrupt cargo tie-down rings and a parcel net, if
changes in direction. present.
Always stow objects in such a way that they RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteners
cannot be tossed about. Before traveling, which are suitable for the weight and size of
secure objects, luggage or loads to prevent the load.

Loading guidelines 241
Always observe the operating instructions of X Tire pressure: check the tire pressure and
the respective manufacturer when using suit- correct if necessary (Y page 288).
able load securing aids or tie downs. In par- X Cargo compartment floor: clean the
ticular, the information on service life. cargo compartment floor.
Load securing aids and tie downs may not be The cargo compartment floor must be free
used, for example, if: from oil and dust, dry and swept clean to
Ridentification marks are missing or illegible prevent the load from slipping.
Rthere are yarn breakages, damage to bear- X Place non-slip mats (anti-slip mats) on the
ing seams or other signs of tearing cargo compartment floor if necessary.
Rthere are signs of shearing, deformation,
pinching or other damage
Rthere is damage to clamping or connecting During loading
elements
Transporting loads
! On passenger van versions with maxi-
Such load securing aids and tie downs are mum seating layout, the permissible rear
worn; they should not be used and must be axle load would be exceeded if the full pay-
replaced. If you use load securing aids or tie load were to be loaded in the cargo com-
downs which are worn, the load may not be partment.
sufficiently secured and could cause damage X Observe the gross axle weight rating and
to property. permissible gross vehicle weight for your
After an accident, the following must be vehicle.
checked at a specialist workshop: Take into account that your vehicle's curb
RCargo compartment floor weight is increased if accessories or
RLoad surface optional equipment are installed. The max-
imum payload is thus reduced.
RCargo tie-down rings
X Observe the notes on load distribution
RTie downs
(Y page 242).
Otherwise, the load may not be correctly The overall center of gravity of the load
secured the next time anything is stowed. should always be as low as possible, cen-
Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the tered and between the axles near the rear
load increases the risk of injury in the event of axle.
an accident. Observe the tips in the "Securing X Secure the load (Y page 242).
luggage/loads" (Y page 242) and "Load dis- Observe the legal requirements of the
tribution" (Y page 242) sections. country in which you are currently driving.
Before loading
Checks after loading
! The anti-slip mats cannot be used for
securing goods and must be replaced when G WARNING
they show signs of: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases, such as carbon monoxide. If the sliding
RPermanent deformation and crushing
door or rear door is open when the engine is
RCrack formation
running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
RCuts interior, especially during the journey. There
is a risk of poisoning.
Z
242 Securing loads
Always switch off the engine before opening Observe the following notes:
the sliding door or rear door. Never drive the RDo not stack loads higher than the upper
vehicle when the sliding door or rear door is edge of the backrests.
open. RTransport loads behind seats that are not
occupied.
X Securing loads: check that the load is
RIf the rear bench seat is not occupied, insert
secure before every journey and at regular
intervals during a long journey, and correct the seat belts crosswise into the buckle of
if necessary. the opposite seat belt.
X Doors: close the sliding doors and rear
doors. Securing loads
X Tire pressure: adjust the tire pressures
according to the vehicle load (Y page 288). Important safety notes
Transporting loads
X Driving style: adapt your driving style

G WARNING
according to the vehicle load.
If you attach the tie-down incorrectly when
securing the load, the following may occur in
the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-
Load distribution ing maneuvers or an accident:
General notes Rthe cargo tie-down rings may become
detached or the tie-down may tear if the
! Excessive loads on individual points of the
permissible load is exceeded
cargo floor or on the load surface impair
Rthe load may not be restrained.
vehicle handling characteristics and could
cause damage to the floor covering. This may cause the load to slip, tip over or be
tossed about, striking vehicle occupants.
The overall center of gravity of the load should
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
always be as low as possible, centered and
between the axles near the rear axle. Always tension the tie-downs in the proper
manner and only between the described
On Cargo Vans/Passenger Vans: cargo tie-down rings. Always use tie-downs
X Always transport loads in the cargo com- designed specifically for the loads.
partment.
X Always place the load against the backrests G WARNING
of the rear bench seat. You may not transport anyone in the cargo
X Move large and heavy loads as far towards compartment or on the load surface. Never let
the front of the vehicle as possible against more people ride in the vehicle than there are
the rear bench seat. Stow the load flush seat belts available. Make sure everyone rid-
with the rear bench seat. ing in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a
X Always additionally secure the load with separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for
suitable load-securing aids or tie downs. more than one person at a time.
! Observe the information on the maximum

loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
down points.
If you use several cargo tie-down points to
secure a load, you must always take the

Securing loads 243
maximum loading capacity of the weakest or cargo tie-down rings and the loading rails
cargo tie-down point into account. in the cargo compartment or on the cargo
If you brake hard, for example, the forces area.
acting could be up to several times the Only use tie downs, such as lashing rods or
weight force of the load. Always use multi- lashing nets and lashing straps, that have
ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis- been tested in accordance with current
tribute the force absorption. Load the standards (e.g. DIN EN).
anchorages evenly. Always use the cargo tie-down rings closest
Spread the load evenly between the cargo tie- to the load to secure it and pad sharp edges
down points or tie-down rings. for protection.
Please also refer to the notes about qualified Loads, and heavy loads in particular, should
specialist workshops (Y page 25). preferably be secured using the cargo tie-
Always observe the operating instructions or down rings.
Transporting loads
the notes of the lashing strap manufacturer i Tie downs tested in accordance with cur-
for the operation of the lashing strap. rent standards (e.g. DIN EN) are available at
Information about the maximum loading any qualified specialist workshop.
capacity of the cargo tie-down points can be
found in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 327).
As the driver, you are responsible for ensuring
that:
RThe applicable requirements and guide-
lines relating to load-securing practices
must be met.
If this is not the case, this may constitute a
punishable offense, depending on local leg-
islation and any ensuing consequences.
You should therefore observe the respec-
tive legal requirements for the relevant
country.
Make sure that the load is secure before every
journey and at regular intervals during a long Cargo tie-down point (example: Passenger Van)
journey. Correct an incorrectly or inade- : Cargo tie-down rings
quately secured load if necessary.
You can obtain information about securing
the load correctly from the manufacturer of
the load securing aids or tie down for securing
the load.
X Fill spaces between the load and the cargo
compartment walls or wheel housings
(form-locking). Use rigid load securing aids,
such as wedges, wooden fixings or pad-
ding.
X Attach secured and stabilized loads in all
directions. Use the cargo tie-down points
Z
244 Securing loads
Securing loads on the cargo compartment

floor by lashing them down is only recom-
mended for lightweight loads. Place non-slip
mats (anti-slip mats) under the load to
increase load security.
Installing/removing cargo tie-down

rings for the load rails
G WARNING
Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van without If the cargo tie-down ring is not properly
loading rails) installed, it may slip or become detached in
: Cargo tie-down rings the event of abrupt changes in direction, brak-
Transporting loads
ing maneuvers or an accident. This may cause

objects, luggage or the load to slip, tip over or
be tossed about, striking vehicle occupants.
Before using the cargo tie-down rings, always
make sure they are properly installed and
cannot be moved.
Cargo tie-down point (example: Cargo Van with

loading rails)
: Cargo tie-down rings
; Load rails XTo install: slide the cargo tie-down ring
through a recess in the loading rail close to
Secure loose loads with a tested lashing net
the load until locking mechanism :
or a tarpaulin.
engages in the recess.
X Always fasten the lashing net or tarpaulin to
i When you pull locking mechanism : up
all available cargo tie-down points. Make and out of the recess, the cargo tie-down
sure that the retaining hooks are secured ring is able to move within the loading rail.
against accidental opening. Make sure that locking mechanism : is
If your vehicle is equipped with loading always engaged in a recess.
rails ; in the floor, you can place lashing rods X Check the cargo tie-down ring for firm seat-
directly in front of and behind the load. The ing.
lashing rods directly absorb the potential
X To remove: pull locking mechanism : up
shifting forces.
and pull the cargo tie-down ring towards

Carrier systems 245
the locking mechanism and out of the load-

ing rail through a recess.
Carrier systems
Roof carrier
G WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof : Securing rails
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
It is possible to install a roof carrier if your
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Transporting loads
vehicle is equipped with securing rails on the
roof. Special mounting elements (grooved
Never exceed the maximum roof load and plates) are available as accessories.
These mounting elements are available at any
You can find information about the maximum authorized Sprinter Dealer.
roof load in the "Technical data" section
(Y page 328).
Ladder carrier
! Make sure that:
Rthe screws for the roof carrier are tight-
ened in the sliding blocks to a torque of
6.0 – 7.4 lb-ft (8 – 10 Nm)
Rthe bolts, when tightened, do not touch
the rails.
Rthe slot nuts are not located in the area of
the plastic caps.
Rthe slot nuts have the right cross-section.
Rthe mounting rails in the interior are free
of dirt. Example: ladder rack on Chassis Cab
Rthe screws are retightened evenly after : Front ladder rack
approximately 300 miles (500 km). ; Rear ladder rack
We recommend that you only use roof
Pay attention to the important safety notes in
racks tested and approved by Sprinter.
the "Loading guidelines" section
These help avoid vehicle damage.
(Y page 240).
! If you want to retrofit securing rails, have You can find information about the maximum
it done at a qualified specialist workshop. ladder rack load in the "Technical data" sec-
You could otherwise damage the vehicle. tion (Y page 245).
You will find information about cleaning and
care in the "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and
"Power washers" (Y page 266) sections.
Z
246

247

Engine compartment ........................ 248
Vehicle interior ................................. 256
Maintenance ...................................... 256
Battery ............................................... 258
Care .................................................... 265
Maintenance and care

248 Engine compartment
Useful information If you need to do any work inside the engine

compartment:
This Operator's Manual describes all models Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rremove jewelry and watches
This also applies to systems and functions Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
relevant to safety. ple, away from moving parts
workshops (Y page 25). G WARNING
The fuel injection system operates with a high
voltage. If you touch the live components, you
Engine compartment could receive an electric shock. There is a risk

of injury.
Hood
Never touch components of the fuel injection
Important safety notes system when the ignition is switched on.
G WARNING The live components of the fuel injection sys-

If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem are, for example, the injectors.
the vehicle is in motion and block your view. G WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
Never unlatch the hood while driving. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a
Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury.
heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and
compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the
or other service products. There is a risk of following.
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before If you have to carry out work in the engine
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the compartment, only touch the following com-
engine compartment, keep the hood closed ponents:
and contact the fire department. RHood
ROildipstick
G WARNING
REngine oil filler neck cap
The engine compartment contains moving
RWasher fluid reservoir cap
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start RCoolant expansion tank cap
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury. Opening the hood
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.

Engine compartment 249
X Swing the hood upwards until support strut

= engages and the hood is supported.
Closing the hood

G WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it could tip forward
during rapid deceleration of the vehicle and
hit persons or objects within its path. There is
a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, always make sure that the hood is
Hood release lever in the driver's footwell
closed and locked completely before driving
Observe the safety notes when you open the off.
hood.

X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as If the hood is not locked and you are already
possible on level ground. driving at walking pace:
X Switch off the engine. Rthe yellow 1 indicator lamp in the
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling instrument cluster goes on for vehicles
away. without steering-wheel buttons.
X Pull release handle : on the hood. Rthe 1 Hood open display appears for
The hood is released. vehicles with steering-wheel buttons.
! When you press the support strut back,
make sure that you do not press it against
the detent position and cause it to bend.
! Do not use your hands to push the hood
down. You could damage it otherwise.
X Lift the hood slightly.
X Press support strut = towards the back.
X Lower the hood and allow it to fall with
momentum from a height of approximately
1 ft (30 cm).
X Reach into the gap and push lever ; on the The hood locks audibly.
hood catch up. X Check that the hood is correctly locked.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. If the hood is not cor-
rectly engaged, open the hood again. Let
the hood fall with a little more momentum.
Z
Overview of the engine compartment Checking the oil level shown in the dis-
play
If at extremely low temperatures no engine oil
level is displayed after 5 minutes, repeat the
engine oil level check after another
5 minutes.
If an oil level reading is still not displayed,
check the engine oil level with the dipstick
(Y page 251). Have the engine oil level
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Only check the oil level when the engine is at
normal operating temperature.
Example: engine
: Coolant expansion tank cap X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
(Y page 253) X Switch off the engine.

; DEF filler neck cap4 (Y page 148) X Wait 5 minutes.
= Engine oil filler neck cap (Y page 250) X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
? Brake fluid expansion tank cap lock.
(Y page 254) The display is activated.
A Washer fluid reservoir cap (Y page 255) X Vehicles without steering wheel but-
Regularly check the fluid level and the assem- tons: press the 4 menu button on the
bly for leaks. If you detect fluid loss, e.g. oil instrument cluster (Y page 34) repeatedly
flecks on the vehicle parking space, consult a until the display shows the 1 symbol.
qualified specialist workshop immediately. The --:-- display message appears in the
display while the engine oil level measure-
ment is running.
Engine oil X Vehicles with steering wheel buttons:
press the Ë service button on the instru-
General notes ment cluster (Y page 34).
! Engine oil gets dirty in the course of oper- The 4 Engine oil level Measuring
ation and its quality and volume are gradu- in progress display message appears in
ally diminished. Regularly check the oil the display while the engine oil level meas-
level, and top up or have it replaced as nee- urement is in progress.
ded. Display message for vehicles without
Observe the information on engine oils and oil steering-wheel buttons: the display may
consumption in the "Technical data" section show the following messages after the engine
(Y page 322). oil level measurement.
You can check the oil level in the engine: 1 Action
Ron the display of the on-board computer
OK X Do not add oil.
Rwith the oil dipstick
4 For Cargo Van/Passenger Van only

– 1.0 qts X Add the amount of oil Observe X Repeat the engine oil
shown (Y page 252). wait. measurement after about
– 1.5 qts period 5 minutes if the engine is
X Check the engine oil level
– 2.0 qts again after a few minutes. at normal operating tem-
perature.
HI The oil level is too high. X Repeat the engine oil
X Have excess oil removed. measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is
not at normal operating
Measurement units in the display: temperature.
Rqts USA only
Rltr Canada only Engine X Switch off the engine
oil level when it is at normal oper-
Display message for vehicles with steer-
Not when ating temperature and
ing-wheel buttons: the display may show

eng. run‐ wait approximately
the following messages after the engine oil ning 5 minutes before measur-
level measurement. ing the engine oil level.
1 Action
Measurement units in the display:
Engine X Do not add oil.
oil level Rqts USA only
OK Rltr Canada only
Engine X Add the amount of oil

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
oil Add shown (Y page 252).
stick
1.0 quart X Check the engine oil level
Engine again after a few minutes.

oil Add
1.5 quarts
Engine
oil Add
2.0 quarts
Engine The oil level is too high.
oil level X Have excess oil removed.
Reduce
oil level Example: 4-cylinder diesel engine
Eng. oil X Turn the key to position 2
lev. Turn in the ignition lock.
ignition
on for
level
Z
OM651 4-cylinder diesel engine:

At outside temperatures between 32 ‡
(–0 †) and 86 ‡ (30 †), the oil level can be
checked when the engine is cold.
Measuring the engine oil when the engine is
cold is less precise than measuring when the
engine is at normal operating temperature.
When the appropriate warning is shown in the
display
X Add engine oil (Y page 252)
Example: 6-cylinder diesel engine
or
For vehicles with a red oil dipstick, only check X Have engine oil siphoned off.
the oil level when the engine is at normal
operating temperature:
Add engine oil
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
possible on level ground. G WARNING
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
away. ponents in the engine compartment, it may
X Switch off the engine. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Wait 5 minutes. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
For vehicles with a yellow oil dipstick, only thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
check the oil level when the engine is cold. ponents before starting the engine.
X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
possible on level ground. ! The alternator is located below the engine
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
oil filler neck. If engine oil spills onto the
away. alternator, there is a danger of alternator
damage. Be very careful when adding
X Open the hood (Y page 248). engine oil.
X Pull out oil dipstick :.
X Wipe oil dipstick : using a lint-free cloth.
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
X Insert oil dipstick : back into the guide
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
tube as far as it will go and remove it again. the environment.
If the level is between minimum mark =
and maximum mark ;, the oil level is cor- ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
rect. engine oil can result in damage to the
X If the oil level has dropped to or below min- engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
imum mark =, open cap ? and add excess engine oil siphoned off.
engine oil (Y page 252).
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
The difference in quantity between
This could damage the engine.
marks ; and = is approximately
2 US quarts (2 liters). X Open the hood (Y page 248).
X Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube as X Unscrew and remove cap ?.
far as it will go. X Add engine oil.

X Replace cap ? on the filler neck and G WARNING

tighten. If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
When doing so, make sure that the cap ponents in the engine compartment, it may
engages correctly. ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
X Check the oil level with the oil dipstick
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
(Y page 251) or on the display freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
(Y page 250). next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
X Close the hood. antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
Coolant ! Take care not to spill any coolant on pain-

ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage
G WARNING the paintwork.
The engine cooling system is pressurized, par-

ticularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
Only check the coolant level and/or fill the

coolant if the vehicle is on a level surface and
the engine has cooled down. The coolant tem- Example: cap and coolant expansion tank
perature must be below 122 ‡ (50 †).
Checking the coolant level
! Check the engine cooling and heating sys- X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
tem regularly for leaks. possible on level ground.
If a large quantity of coolant is lost, have the X Switch off the engine.
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
away.
G WARNING X Open the hood (Y page 248).
Coolant contains glycol and is therefore toxic. X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
Do not swallow the coolant. See a doctor clockwise to allow excess pressure to
immediately if you swallow coolant. escape.
Make sure that coolant does not come into X Turn cap : further and remove it.
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. In case of X Check the coolant level.
contact with eyes, rinse immediately with If the coolant reaches the maximum mark
plenty of clean water. Clean affected areas of on coolant expansion tank ;, there is
skin and clothing with soap and water imme- enough coolant in coolant expansion
diately. Change any affected clothing imme- tank ;.
diately.
Z
Adding coolant You should have the brake fluid renewed at

X If the coolant drops under the minimum the specified intervals.
mark on coolant expansion tank ;, add
coolant to the maximum mark. ! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and
Observe the information on coolant mix- rubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come
ture ratio and water quality in the "Techni- into contact with brake fluid, rinse with
cal data" section (Y page 325). To prevent water immediately.
damage to the engine cooling system, use Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 years at
only approved corrosion inhibitor/anti- a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the
freeze that comply with the Mercedes-Benz information on brake fluid in the "Technical
Specifications for Service Products. data" section (Y page 324).
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise to
tighten.
X Start the engine.
X After approximately 5 minutes, switch off

the engine and allow it to cool down.
X Check the coolant level again and add cool-
ant if necessary.
X Close the hood.
Brake fluid Check the brake fluid level regularly, e.g.

G WARNING weekly or when refueling.
Service products may be poisonous and haz- Checking the brake fluid level
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. X Stop your vehicle as far away from traffic as
Comply with instructions on the use, storage possible on level ground.
and disposal of service products on the labels X Switch off the engine.
of the respective original containers. Always X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
store service products sealed in their original away.
containers. Always keep service products out X Open the hood (Y page 248).
of the reach of children.
X Check the brake fluid level.
Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Also The brake fluid level is correct if the level is
observe the safety notes in the "Service prod- between the MIN mark and MAX mark on
ucts and capacities" section (Y page 318). brake fluid reservoir :.
X Close the hood.
G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture ! If the brake fluid level in the brake fluid
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of reservoir has fallen to the MIN mark or
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake below, check the brake system immedi-
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the ately for leaks. Also check the thickness of
brake system when the brakes are applied the brake linings. Visit a qualified specialist
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. workshop immediately.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not add brake fluid. This does not cor-
rect the malfunction.

Washer fluid Fuel system

G WARNING Draining the fuel filter
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
G WARNING
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
fire and injury. fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Make sure that no windshield washer con- Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
ignition and auxiliary heating before carrying
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for out work to the fuel system. Always wear pro-
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or tective gloves.
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the H Environmental note

headlamps. Dispose of the water-fuel mixture in an envi-
ronmentally responsible manner.
! When the : indicator lamp lights up,

drain the fuel filter with water separator
immediately. Otherwise, the engine may be
damaged.
Example: washer fluid reservoir

Add windshield washer concentrate to the
washer fluid all year round. Observe the infor-
mation on washer fluid in the "Technical data"
section (Y page 326).
Adding washer fluid
If the : indicator lamp in the instrument
X Mix the washer fluid to the appropriate mix- cluster goes on, drain fuel filter with water
ing ratio in a container beforehand. separator = immediately.
i We recommend that you have this main-
X Pull cap : on the washer fluid reservoir tenance work carried out at a qualified spe-
upwards at the tab. cialist workshop.
X Add the premixed washer fluid. X Park the vehicle safely and secure it from
X Press cap : onto the filler neck until it rolling away.
engages audibly. X Switch off the auxiliary heating system .
X Close the hood. X Switch off the engine.
X Place a suitable receptacle under drain
hose :.
Z
256 Maintenance

lock.
X Open drain plug ; immediately until the
water/fuel mixture flows out of drain
hose :.
X Screw in drain plug ; as soon as approx-
imately 0.2 US quarts(0.2 liters) of the
water/fuel mixture have been collected.
The electrical fuel pump automatically halts
the flow of the water/fuel mixture after
30 seconds. Filter magazine, located on the roof in the rear
X After draining, turn the key back to posi- compartment
tion 0 in the ignition lock. An increased amount of sand or dust may
X Dispose of the collected water/fuel mix- collect in the air filter of the rear-compart-
ture in an environmentally responsible ment air conditioning when you drive on dusty
manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist work- or sandy roads.
shop. X To remove the filter mat: carefully pry
X Check drain plug ;. The drain plug must cover : out of recesses ; and remove.
be closed. X Remove the filter mat from the air duct.
When the engine is running and drain
X To clean the filter mat: wash the dirty fil-
hose ; is open, fuel is lost through drain
hose :. ter mat with clear water.
X Leave the filter mat to dry.
i The filter mat must not be cleaned or dried
If the : indicator lamp does not go out in a machine.
after draining:
X To install the filter mat: insert the filter
X Drain the fuel filter again.
mat into the air duct.
X If the : indicator lamp does not go out
X Replace and engage cover :.
after draining for the second time, have the
cause checked immediately at a qualified
Maintenance
General notes
Vehicle interior
Air filter for the rear-compartment air Observe measures to protect the environ-
conditioning ment when working on the vehicle. You must
! Regularly check the air filters for visible observe the legal requirements when dispos-
dirt. Clean or replace a dirty filter mat. The ing of service products, e.g. engine oil. This
dirt may otherwise lead to damage to the also includes all components, e.g. filters,
air-conditioning system. which have come into contact with service
products. Any qualified specialist workshop
can provide information about this.
Dispose of empty containers, cleaning cloths
and care products in an environmentally

Maintenance 257
responsible manner. Comply with the instruc- i Observe the information on Sprinter orig-
tions for use of the care products. inal parts in the "Technical data" section
Do not run the engine for longer than neces- (Y page 27).
sary when the vehicle is stationary.
Before having maintenance and repairs per- Service interval display

formed, it is essential to read the materials
General notes
related to the maintenance and repairs:
Rthe applicable sections of the technical A service that is due is displayed in the service
documentation, e.g. the Operator's Manual interval display about 1 month in advance. A
and workshop information. message is then displayed while the vehicle is
in motion or when the ignition is switched on.
Rregulations such as industrial safety regu-
lations and accident prevention regula- i The service interval display does not pro-
tions. vide information about the engine oil level.

While working under the vehicle, you must The service interval display should there-
secure the vehicle on jack stands with suffi- fore not be confused with the 5 engine
cient load capacity. oil level display.
Never use the jack as a substitute. The vehi- The service due date is displayed in days or
cle's jack is intended only to raise the vehicle miles (kilometers), depending on the total
for a short time when changing a wheel. It is distance driven.
not suited for performing maintenance work The symbols or letters on the service display
under the vehicle. show the type of service that is due.
Please also refer to the notes about qualified ¯ or A for a minor service
specialist workshops (Y page 25). ° or B for a major service
The scope and regularity of the inspection
and maintenance work primarily depend on Service due date display
the often diverse operating conditions. Spe-
cialist knowledge beyond the scope of this Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
Operator's Manual is required when carrying following messages may be displayed.
out testing and maintenance work. This work R¯ Service A due in ... days
should only be carried out by trained staff.
R¯ Service A due in ... mi (km km)
The vehicle Maintenance Booklet describes
R¯ Service A Carry out now
the scope and frequency of maintenance
work and contains additional notes on the Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty and on service the following messages may be displayed.
products. R¯ for service A
Maintenance services must be carried out in R° for Service B
accordance with the provisions and recom- Additionally, you will see the remaining dis-
mendations in the Maintenance Booklet. Not tance in miles (mi
mi) or kilometers (km
km) or the
doing so could void the warranty claim and remaining time in days (d d).
lead to refusal of goodwill gestures after the
manufacturer has submitted a damage
report.
Z
258 Battery
Service due date has been exceeded work on the battery carried out at a qualified
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons: if
you have missed the service due date, one of G WARNING
the following messages appears in the display Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
and warning tone also sounds. can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
R¯ Service A overdue by ... days thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
R¯ Service A overdue by ... km (km
lead to function restrictions applying to
km)
safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons:
tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
if you have missed the service due date, the
(Electronic Stability Program). The operating
¯ or ° symbol for the service flashes
safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You
for 10 seconds after the ignition is switched
could lose control of the vehicle, for example:
on. A minus sign also appears in front of the
service due date. Rbraking
Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver

Calling up the service due date and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
lock.
The display is activated. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
Vehicles without steering wheel buttons immediately. Do not drive any further. You
X Press the 4 menu button on the instru- should have all work involving the battery car-
ment cluster repeatedly until the ¯ or ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
° symbol for the service appears in the
display. Further information can be found under "ABS"
Additionally, you will see the remaining dis- (Y page 57) and under "ESP®" (Y page 59).
tance in miles (mi
mi) or kilometers (km
km) or the G WARNING
remaining time in days (dd). Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
Vehicles with steering wheel buttons of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
X Press the V or U button on the steer-
explosion.
ing wheel until the standard display
(Y page 187) appears in the display. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
X Press the & or * button on the steer-
build-up.
ing wheel repeatedly until the service mes-
sage appears in the display, for example: The flammable gas mix is produced when the
R¯ Service A due in ... days battery is charged or when the vehicle is
R¯ Service A due in ... km (km km) jump-started.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery are electrostatically charged. Electro-
Battery static charging results, for example, from:
Important safety notes Rwearing synthetic clothing
Rfriction between clothing and the seat
Work on the battery, e.g. removing or instal-
ling, requires specialist knowledge and the
use of special tools. Therefore, always have

Battery 259
Rdragging or pushing the battery across car- and recycled to protect the
pet flooring or any other synthetic materi- environment.
als Dispose of batteries in an
Rrubbing the battery with cloths or towels. environmentally friendly
Comply with the following safety precautions manner. Take discharged
and take protective measures when handling batteries to a qualified spe-
batteries. cialist workshop or a special
Risk of explosion. Explosive oxy- collection point for used bat-
hydrogen is produced when batteries.
teries are being charged. Only
charge batteries in well-ventilated Observe the following notes:
areas. RRecharge the battery more frequently, if
Fire, open flames and smoking are you:
therefore prohibited when work- - predominantly drive short distances

ing on the battery. Avoid creating - predominantly drive at low outside tem-
sparks. peratures
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- - park the vehicle longer than
tact with the skin, eyes or clothing. three weeks
Wear acid-proof protective gloves. In order for the batteries to achieve their
If skin or clothes are splashed with maximum possible service life, they must
acid, neutralize the splashes always be sufficiently charged.
immediately with soapy water or
RWhen you park the vehicle, remove the key
an acid neutralizer, and then clean
if you do not require any electrical consum-
the affected areas with water.
ers. The vehicle will then use very little
Consult a doctor if necessary.
energy, thus conserving battery power.
Wear eye protection. When mixing
RWhen replacing a battery, only use batter-
water and acid, the liquid can
ies that are recommended for use in
splash into your eyes. Rinse acid
Sprinter vehicles.
splashes to the eyes immediately
RHave the battery removed at a qualified
with clean water and contact a
doctor immediately. specialist workshop.
RIf you leave your vehicle parked your vehi-
Keep children at a safe distance.
Children are not able to assess the cle longer than three weeks:
dangers posed by batteries and - consult a qualified specialist workshop
acid. or
When handling batteries, observe - switch off the power supply using the
the safety precautions and special battery main switch (Y page 137) or
protective measures contained in - disconnect the batteries (Y page 260).
this Operator's Manual. Otherwise, you need to check the battery's
condition of charge every three weeks,
since standby power consumption can
Batteries contain dangerous drain the battery. If the battery voltage is
substances. It is against the lower than 12.2 V, the battery must be
law to dispose of them with charged. Otherwise, the battery may be
the household rubbish. They damaged by exhaustive discharging.
Z
260 Battery
Be sure to observe the notes on charging X Remove floor covering :.

the batteries (Y page 263). X To install: place floor covering : in the
driver's footwell.
Installation locations X Slide floor covering : underneath the car-
rier of the accelerator pedal and align it at
Your vehicle may be equipped with three bat- the base of the driver's seat and at the door
teries, depending on the equipment version: sill.
Ra starter battery in the battery case in the Make sure that the floor covering does not
driver's footwell obstruct the accelerator pedal.
Radditional battery in the engine compart- X Put trim ; in place and screw screws =
ment back in.
Rauxiliary battery under the driver's seat
Have the auxiliary battery removed at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Disconnecting/connecting the

starter battery
Installing/removing the floor cover-
ing (starter battery) G WARNING
G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
tact with vehicle parts.
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
securely and as specified in order to ensure tery.

sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use RIt is important that you observe the descri-
loose floormats and do not place floormats on bed order of the battery terminals when
top of one another. connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
Disconnecting the starter battery

! Switch off the engine and remove the key
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
from the ignition lock before you loosen or
X To remove: remove screws = and take off
disconnect the terminal clamps. You may
trim ;.

Battery 261
otherwise destroy electronic components

such as the alternator.
Always disconnect the starter battery in the
battery case in the driver's footwell first.
! Always disconnect the battery in
the order described below. Never swap the
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
age the vehicle electronics.
If the vehicle is expected to be out of use for
over 3 weeks, disconnect the batteries. This
will prevent battery discharge caused by off- Starter battery in the driver's footwell
load current consumption. X First loosen and remove the negative ter-
minal clamp so that it is no longer in contact

with the terminal.
X Remove the cover from the positive termi-
nal.
X Loosen the positive terminal clamp and fold
it up to the side together with the pre-fuse
box.
Reconnecting the starter battery

! Always connect the battery in the order
Battery cover in the driver's footwell described below. Never swap the terminal
X Switch off all electrical consumers. clamps. You may otherwise damage the
X Switch off the engine and remove the key
vehicle electronics.
from the ignition lock. X Fold the positive terminal clamp with the
X Remove the floor covering in the driver's pre-fuse box down to the terminal.
footwell (Y page 260). X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
X Loosen screws ; and slide battery X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
The screws must protrude beyond the X Position battery cover : so that screws ;
larger recesses. are positioned over the large recesses.
X Remove battery cover : upwards.
X Slide battery cover : in the direction of
travel into the smaller recesses.
X Tighten screws ;.
X Install the floor covering in the driver's foot-
well (Y page 260).
Carry out the following work after connecting
the battery:
X Reset the side windows (Y page 79).
Z
262 Battery
Removing/installing the starter bat- X Pull retainer = upwards.

tery X Slide the battery from its anchorage in the
direction of travel.
Removing the starter battery
X Fold the bar of the battery upwards and
remove the battery from the battery case.
Installing the starter battery

X Insert the battery into the battery case.
X Fold down the bar of the battery.
X Slide the battery into its anchorage in the
opposite direction to the direction of travel.
X Insert retainer =.
X Tighten the bolts on retainer = which
holds the battery in place.

X Disconnect the battery (Y page 260).
X Attach breather hose with connector
X Pull breather hose with connector
bracket ; to connection : of the venti-
bracket ; from connection : on the
lation cover.
degassing cover.
X Connect the battery (Y page 260).
Disconnecting and connecting the

additional battery (engine compart-
ment)
G WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
X Loosen the bolts holding retainer =, which sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
prevents the battery from moving around. ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery.
RIt is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.

Battery 263
RItis particularly important to observe the Connecting the additional battery

described order when connecting and dis- ! Always connect the battery in the order
connecting the jumper cables. described below. Never swap the terminal
RNever connect or disconnect the battery clamps. You may otherwise damage the
terminals while the engine is running. vehicle electronics.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp.
Disconnecting the additional battery
X Attach the cover to the positive terminal.
! Switch off the engine and remove the key X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
from the ignition lock before you loosen or X Close the hood.
disconnect the terminal clamps. You may
otherwise destroy electronic components Carry out the following work after connecting
such as the alternator. the battery:
Always disconnect the starter battery in the X Reset the side windows (Y page 79).

battery case in the driver's footwell first.
! Always disconnect the battery in
Installing and removing the additional
the order described below. Never swap the
battery (engine compartment)
terminal clamps. You may otherwise dam-
age the vehicle electronics. Removing the additional battery
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 262).
X Loosen the bolts holding the retainer that
prevents the battery from moving around.
X Remove the battery holder and take out the
battery.
Installing the additional battery

X Insert the battery into the battery case.
X Insert the battery holder.
Additional battery in the engine compartment X Tighten the bolts holding the retainer that
X Switch off all electrical consumers. prevents the battery in the engine com-
X Switch off the engine and remove the key partment from moving around.
from the ignition lock. X Connect the battery (Y page 262).

X First loosen and remove the negative ter-
minal clamp so that it is no longer in contact Charging
with the terminal. G WARNING
X Remove the cover from the positive termi- A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
nal. tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
X Loosen and remove the positive terminal ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
clamp. can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
Z
264 Battery
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up the operating instructions for your charger
in the instrument cluster when temperatures before charging the battery.
are low, it is probably because the discharged The additional battery can not be charged
battery has frozen. Should this be the case, do from the jump-starting connection point.
not jump-start the vehicle or charge the bat- Recharge the battery more frequently if you
tery. The service life of a thawed battery may use the vehicle mainly for short trips and/or
be shorter. Start-up behavior may deterio- drive at low outside temperatures.
rate, in particular at low temperatures. Have
X Charge the battery. Observe the notes in
the thawed battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. the operating instructions for your battery
charger.
G WARNING X If necessary, install battery. Observe the
During charging and jump-starting, explosive notes on reconnecting the battery.
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion. i Recharge uninstalled, out of service bat-
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating teries every three months. This will counter
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient self-discharging and prevent battery dam-
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. age.
Do not lean over a battery.
Care
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. ! Dirty battery clamps and battery surfaces
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do cause leak currents which lead to the bat-
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over teries discharging.
the battery. Keep children away from batter- ! Do not use cleaning agents containing
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with fuel. Cleaning agents containing fuel cor-
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- rode the battery housing.
tion.
! If dirt gets into the battery cell, battery
! Only charge the installed battery with a self-discharge will increase and the battery
battery charger that has been tested and may be damaged.
approved by the distributor named on the The following points on battery care must be
inside of the front cover. This device allows observed:
the battery to be charged when it is instal-
X Regularly check the battery terminals and
led in the vehicle. The vehicle's electronics
may otherwise be damaged. the fastening of the negative cable to the
chassis to ensure that they are firmly
A battery charger unit specially adapted for seated.
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and X Always keep the battery terminals and bat-
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an tery surfaces clean and dry.
accessory. Only this device permits the
X Lightly grease the undersides of the battery
charging of the battery in its installed posi-
tion. Only charge the installed battery with a terminals with acid-resistant grease.
battery charger that has been tested and X Only clean the battery casing with a com-
approved by Mercedes-Benz, using the jump- mercially available cleaning product.

start connection point in the engine compart-
ment. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for information and availability. Read

Care 265
Care H Environmental note

Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
Notes on care
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
G WARNING ner.
If you use openings in the bodywork or
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
detachable parts as steps, you could:
retaining the quality in the long term.
Rslip and/or fall Use care products and cleaning agents rec-
Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to ommended and approved for Sprinter vehi-
fall. cles.
Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita-
ble ladder. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Automatic car wash
Rdry, rough or hard cloths G WARNING
Rabrasive cleaning agents Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
Rsolvents the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Rcleaning agents containing solvents After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
Do not scrub.
conditions until full braking power is restored.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or Automatic Car Wash as these use special
damage the surfaces and protective film. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel suitable for the size of the vehicle.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause Before washing the vehicle in an automatic
increased corrosion of the brake discs and car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you remove any additional antennas. Other-
should drive for a few minutes after clean- wise, the exterior mirror, antenna or the
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the vehicle itself could be damaged.
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
vehicle can then be parked. Make sure that the exterior mirrors are fully
folded out again and that any additional
H Environmental note antennas are re-installed when you leave
Only clean your vehicle at specially designed the automatic car wash.
wash bays. Dispose of empty containers and ! Make sure that:
used cleaning products in an environmentally
responsible manner. Rthe side windows and the roof are com-
pletely closed
Rthe climate control blower is switched off
Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position
0
Z
266 Care
The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Power washers

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car G WARNING
wash from the very start.
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
Wash off excess dirt before cleaning the vehi- blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
cle in an automatic car wash. to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
After putting the vehicle through an auto- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
matic car wash, wipe off wax from: edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Rthe rear view camera lens (Y page 269) Do not use power washers with circular jet
Rthe windshield nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
Rthe windshield wiper blades
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
This will prevent smears and reduce wiping
noises caused by residue on the wind- ! Under no circumstances use power wash-
shield. ers in the vehicle interior. The pressurized
water and associated spray produced by

Washing by hand the power washer could cause extensive
In some countries, washing by hand is only damage to the vehicle.
allowed at specially equipped washing bays. ! Observe the minimum distance to be
Observe the legal requirements of the coun- maintained between the nozzle of the
try you are currently in when washing by power washer and object to be cleaned, as
hand. outlined below:
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rapproximately 2.2 ft(70 cm) when using
vehicle in direct sunlight. round-jet nozzles
X Use a soft car sponge. Rapproximately 1 ft (30 cm) when using
X Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. a car sham- 25°flat-spray jets and dirt blasters
poo approved for use with Sprinter vehi- Keep the water jet moving while cleaning.
cles. To avoid causing damage, do not point the
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a water jet directly at:
gentle jet of water. Rdoor joints
X Do not point the water jet directly towards
Rbrake hoses
the air inlets.
Relectrical components
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
Relectrical connections
sponge frequently.
Rseals
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois. Rdrive train, especially not at the inter-
X Do not let the cleaning agents dry on the mediate bearing of the propeller shaft
paintwork. Rrear view camera (camera lens and
microphone opening on the bottom)
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as Keep a minimum distance of
soon as possible. 1.6 ft(50 cm).
Cleaning the engine

! Water must not enter intake or ventilation
openings. When cleaning with high pres-

Care 267
sure water or steam cleaners, the spray Always switch off the windshield wipers and
must not be aimed directly at electrical the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
components or the terminals of electrical wiper blades.
lines.
Preserve the engine after the engine has ! Do not fold the windshield wipers away
been cleaned. Protect the belt drive system from the windshield unless the hood is
from exposure to the preservative agent. closed. Otherwise, you could damage the
hood.
Also observe the information under "Power
washers" (Y page 266). ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
Cleaning the paintwork the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
! Do not affix: ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
Rstickers

vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
Rfilms
not touch the insides of the windows with
Rmagnetic plates or similar items hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise There is otherwise a risk of damaging the
damage the paintwork. windows.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected Before cleaning the windshield
by corrosion and damage caused by inade- X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
quate care cannot always be completely lock or remove it.
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
cialist workshop.
the windshield until you feel them engage.
X Remove impurities immediately, where Before switching the ignition on again, fold
possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. the windshield wipers back into position.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover
Cleaning the windows
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
off the treated areas afterwards. dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
agent that is recommended and approved
for Sprinter vehicles.
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
Exterior
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use any acidic or alkaline cleaning
Cleaning the windows agents. They can cause corrosion on the
wheel bolts (wheel nuts) or the retainer
G WARNING
springs for the wheel-balancing weights.
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of period straight after cleaning it, particularly
injury. after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
Z
268 Care
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you Cleaning the exterior lighting
should drive for a few minutes after clean-
ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
vehicle can then be parked.
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
If you clean the wheels with a power washer, the plastic light lenses.
observe the safety notes for the power
X Clean the plastic covers of the exterior
washer (Y page 266). You could otherwise
lighting with a damp sponge and a mild
damage the tires.
cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo for
Sprinter vehicles, or with cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the wiper blades
G WARNING Cleaning the mirror turn signal
You could become trapped by the windshield
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the

cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
injury.
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
Always switch off the windshield wipers and lenses of the mirror turn signals.
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
! Do not fold the windshield wipers away a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
from the windshield unless the hood is car shampoo or cleaning cloths.
closed. Otherwise, you could damage the
hood. Cleaning the sensors
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, ! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and
the wiper blade could be damaged. do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and damage the sensors.
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the If you clean the sensors with a power
graphite coating could be damaged. This washer or steam cleaner, observe the infor-
could cause wiper noise. mation provided by the manufacturer
regarding the distance to be maintained
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding between the vehicle and the nozzle of the
back. The windshield could be damaged if power washer.
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
lock or remove it.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield until you feel them engage.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
X Fold back the wiper arms before switching
on the ignition.
PARKTRONIC sensors (example: front bumper, left

side of vehicle)

Care 269
X Clean all sensors : in the front and rear Do not oil or grease the contact plates and
bumpers with water, shampoo and a soft contact pins.
cloth.
Steps
Cleaning the rear view camera
Cleaning the electrical step
! Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths and Clean the electrical step at least once a
do not scrub. Otherwise, you will scratch or month. Make sure that no dirt accumulates in
damage the lens of the rear-view camera. the housing or on the step.
If you clean the vehicle with a high-pressure X Extend the electrical step (Y page 73).
or steam cleaner, maintain a distance of at
X Close the sliding door until the door lock
least 1.650 cm from the rear-view camera.
engages.
Do not aim directly at the rear-view camera
The electrical step remains extended for
or at the microphone opening on the under-
cleaning.

side of the rear-view camera. You could
X Clean the electrical step and the housing
otherwise damage the rear-view camera.
with a power washer.
X After cleaning, spray the step guides on
each side with silicone spray when the
housing and electrical step are dry.
Do not use oil or grease as a lubricant.
X Retract the electrical step.
Access step in the bumper
Rear view camera in the middle of the roof above

the high-mounted brake lamp
: Camera lens
; Microphone openings
X Clean camera lens : with clean water and
a soft cloth.
Make sure that you do not apply any wax to
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If Example: access step in the bumper
necessary, remove the wax using water, Pay attention to the important safety notes in
shampoo and a soft cloth. the "Notes on care" (Y page 265) and "Power
washers" (Y page 266) sections.
Cleaning the sliding door
Keep step in the bumper : free from dirt,
X Remove foreign objects from the vicinity of such as:
the contact surfaces and contact pins of Rmud
the sliding door.
Rclay
X Clean the contact surfaces and contact
Rsnow
pins with a mild cleaning agent and a soft
cloth. Rice
Z
270 Care
X Clean access step in the bumper : with a X Switch off the audio equipment and let the
power washer. display cool down.
X Clean the display surface with a commer-
Cleaning the trailer tow hitch cially available microfiber cloth and cleaner
for TFT/LCD displays.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
power washer. Do not use solvents.
fiber cloth.
! Observe the notes on care in the Opera-
tor's Manual for the trailer tow hitch and Cleaning the plastic trim
the ball coupling manufacturer.
You can also have the maintenance work on G WARNING
the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car- Care products and cleaning agents containing
ried out by a qualified specialist workshop. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-

Interior ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
Cleaning with power washers agents to clean the cockpit.
! When using liquids to clean the vehicle
interior, observe the following points: ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
ces:
RUnder no circumstances use power
Rstickers
washers.
Rfilms
RMake sure that no fluids enter or remain
in gaps and cavities. Rscented oil bottles or similar items
REnsure sufficient ventilation when clean- You can otherwise damage the plastic.
ing. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
RMake sure that the vehicle interior is or sunscreen to come into contact with the
completely dry after cleaning. plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
Cleaning the display X Wipe the plastic trim and the cockpit with a
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
lowing: cloth.
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline X Heavy soiling: use a mild detergent or care
Rabrasive cleaning agents

products and cleaning agents recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Rcommercially-available household clean-
ing agents
Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-
These may damage the display surface. Do tor lever
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth.
ble damage to the display.
Cleaning the trim elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-

Care 271
ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of Cleaning the headliner

damaging the surface.
X Use a soft brush or dry shampoo to remove
X Wipe the trim elements with a damp, lint- heavy soiling.
free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care products and Cleaning the curtains
cleaning agents recommended and
approved for Sprinter vehicles. ! The curtains must not be washed. Wash-
ing could cause the curtains to shrink and
lose their fire-retardant properties. Always
Cleaning the seat covers
have the curtains dry-cleaned.
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean arti-
ficial leather covers. If used often, a micro-
fiber cloth can damage the cover.
! Clean:

Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois-
tened with a solution containing 1%
detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid.
Rcloth covers with a microfiber cloth mois-
tened with a solution containing 1%
detergent, e.g. dish washing liquid. Wipe
entire seat sections carefully to avoid
leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical

cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
Remove any stains or dirt immediately. This
will avoid residue or damage.
X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-
tion.
Z
272

273

Where will I find...? ........................... 274
Flat tire .............................................. 276
Jump-starting .................................... 276
Tow-starting and towing away ........ 277
Electrical fuses ................................. 280
Roadside Assistance

274 Where will I find...?
Useful information Unlocking and removing the cover

X Turn quick-release fastener : counter-
This Operator's Manual describes all models clockwise or clockwise 2.
as well as standard and optional equipment of X Slightly raise and pull out the cover.
relevant to safety.
Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit Removing the vehicle tool kit and the jack
Roadside Assistance
General notes X Remove vehicle tool kit A.

X Pull up quick-release lever = and unhook
The vehicle tool kit is in the stowage com-
the retaining strap of jack ?.
partment in the footwell on the co-driver's
X Lift jack ? upwards out of the holder.
side.
The vehicle tool kit consists of: i When stowing away the jack, place it in
the holder as shown in the illustration.
Ra towing eye Make sure that the retaining strap of the
Ra screwdriver with Torx, Phillips and slotted jack is hooked in and tensioned.
bits Inserting and engaging the cover
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel
bracket and a jack, the vehicle tool kit addi- X Slide in the cover and fold it down.
tionally contains: X Press down quick-release fastener : until
it engages.
Ra wheel wrench
Ra spanner
Ra pump lever rod
Stowage compartment in the co-driv-

er's footwell

Where will I find...? 275
Warning triangle and warning lamp Removing the warning triangle

Removing the warning lamp
Warning triangles at the back of the driver's seat

base
X Lift warning triangle : up and out of the
bracket.
Roadside Assistance
First-aid kit
Removing the first-aid kit
X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position

2.
The cover is unlocked.
X Lift up the cover.
X Take warning lamp = out of the retainer.
X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-
release fasteners to position 1.
The cover is locked.
X Turn the quick-release fasteners to position

2.
The cover is unlocked.
X Lift up the cover.

276 Jump-starting
X Take first-aid kit = out of the retainer. Jump-starting

X Fold the cover up and turn the quick-
release fasteners to position 1. Important safety notes
The cover is locked. G WARNING
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid During charging and jump-starting, explosive
kit at least once a year. Replace any expired gases can escape from the battery. There is a
or missing contents. risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
Fire extinguisher ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Removing the fire extinguisher Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
Roadside Assistance
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with

water and seek medical attention.
Do not use a rapid charging device to start the

vehicle. If your vehicle's battery is dis-
Fire extinguisher at the front of the base of the co- charged, the engine can be jump-started from
driver's seat another vehicle or from a donor battery using
jumper cables. For this purpose, the vehicle
X Pull tabs ; upwards.
has a jump-starting connection point in the
X Take fire extinguisher : out of its holder.
engine compartment.
Please read the instructions on fire extin- The additional battery in the engine compart-
guisher : carefully and familiarize yourself ment is not suitable for jump-starting opera-
with its operation. Have fire extinguisher : tions. If your vehicle requires jump-starting,
refilled after each use and checked every one or if you use it to jump-start another vehicle,
or two years. It may otherwise fail in an emer- use the jump-starting connection point in the
gency. engine compartment.
Observe the legal requirements for each indi- When jump-starting, observe the following
vidual country. points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles.
Flat tire If the other vehicle's battery is not acces-

sible, jump-start the vehicle using a donor
battery or a jump-starting device.
Information on breakdown assistance in the
RDo not start the engine if the battery is fro-
case of a flat tire can be found in the chapter
"Wheels and tires" (Y page 305). zen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from
batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

Tow-starting and towing away 277
ROnly use jumper cables that have a suffi- Tow-starting and towing away
cient cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps. Important safety notes
RIf the battery is fully discharged, attach the
G WARNING
battery of another vehicle for a few minutes
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
before attempting to start. This charges the
no longer available if:
empty battery a little.
Rthe engine is not running.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not
touch. Rthe brake system or the power steering is
Make sure that: malfunctioning.

Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
or the vehicle's electrical system.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamps do not
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
come into contact with other metal parts
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
while the jumper cables are connected to
the battery.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into con-
make sure that the steering moves freely.
tact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or
Roadside Assistance
the fan. These parts move when the engine
G WARNING
is started and while it is running.
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
i Jumper cables and further information steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
regarding jump starting can be obtained at is a risk of an accident.
any qualified specialist workshop. Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
Before connecting the jumper cables G WARNING

On vehicles with a battery main switch, check When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
whether the battery main switch is switched and its weight is greater than the permissible
on (Y page 137). gross weight of your vehicle, the:
X Apply the parking brake. Rthe towing eye could detach itself
X Move the selector lever of the automatic Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
transmission to position P. over.
X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. There is a risk of an accident.
audio equipment, blower. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition its weight should not be greater than the per-
lock and remove it (Y page 138). missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on the gross vehicle weight can
be found on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 316).
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
Z
278 Tow-starting and towing away
! Observe the following points when towing Installing/removing the towing eye
with a tow rope:
RSecure the tow rope on the same side on
both vehicles.
REnsure that the tow cable is not longer
than legally permitted. Mark the tow
cable in the middle, e.g. with a white
cloth (30 x 30 cm). This will make other
road users aware that the vehicle is being
towed.
ROnly secure the tow cable to the towing
eye.
The fixture for the front towing eye is located in the
RObserve the brake lamps of the towing
bumper.
vehicle while driving. Always maintain a
distance so that the tow rope does not
sag.
RDo not use steel cables or chains to tow
Roadside Assistance
your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-

age the vehicle.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, Rear towing eye under the bumper, attached to the
the vehicles could be damaged. chassis
When towing away, you must observe the Your vehicle may be equipped with rear tow-
legal requirements for the country in which ing eye ;. If you tow or tow-start a vehicle,
you are currently driving. attach the towing device to rear towing
It is preferable to have the vehicle transpor- eye ;.
ted on a transporter or trailer instead of tow- If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow
ing it. hitch, attach the towing device to the trailer
The automatic transmission selector lever tow hitch (Y page 173).
must be in the N position when towing the Installing the front towing eye
vehicle. X Take the towing eye and screwdriver from
The battery must be connected and charged. the vehicle tool kit (Y page 274).
Otherwise, you: X Press cover : and remove cover : from
Rcannot turn the key in the ignition lock to the opening.
position 2 You will see the fixture for the towing eye.
Rcannot move the selector lever to position X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
N on vehicles with automatic transmission stop.
Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the X Insert screwdriver into the towing eye and
automatic locking feature (Y page 71). You tighten it.
could otherwise lock yourself out of the vehi-
cle when pushing or towing away the vehicle.

Tow-starting and towing away 279
Removing the front towing eye If the front axle is damaged, raise the vehicle
X Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle at the front axle and if the rear axle is dam-
tool kit. aged, raise the vehicle at the rear axle.
X Insert the screwdriver into the towing eye
Towing
and turn the screwdriver counter-clock-
wise. If the front axle is raised, the vehicle may be
X Unscrew the towing eye. towed a maximum of 30 miles (50 km). For a
X Insert cover : with the lug at the bottom towing distance of over 30 miles (50 km), the
and press it in at the top until it engages. propeller shafts to the driven axles must be
removed.
X Place the towing eye and screwdriver back
in the vehicle tool kit. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
Towing away in the event of malfunc- depressed.
tions X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N.
With transmission damage
Roadside Assistance
! Always use new bolts when installing the X Release the parking brake.
propeller shafts. X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition
i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/ lock and leave it in this position.
removed by qualified, skilled personnel. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps
If the vehicle has transmission damage, have (Y page 95).
the propeller shaft removed before towing X If the front axle is raised, do not exceed the
away. towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) and the
towing distance of 30 miles (50 km).
Towing with the front or rear axle

raised Towing the vehicle with both axles on
the ground
General notes
! The ignition must be switched off if the
vehicle is being towed with the front or rear G WARNING
axle raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
and damage the brake system. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There
! Always use new bolts when installing the is a risk of an accident.
propeller shafts. Always switch off the ignition when towing the
vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.
i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/
removed by qualified, skilled personnel. ! Do not exceed a towing speed of 31 mph
Observe the following before towing a vehicle (50 km/h). You could otherwise damage
with a raised front or rear axle: the transmission.
Rthe information on towing in the event of ! Always use new bolts when installing the
malfunctions (Y page 279) and propeller shafts.
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 277).
Z
280 Electrical fuses
i Only have the propeller shafts fitted/ Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,
removed by qualified, skilled personnel. using the tracks it made when it became
Before towing the vehicle, observe the fol- stuck.
lowing:
Rthe information on towing in the event of Transporting the vehicle
malfunctions (Y page 279) and
Rthe important safety notes (Y page 277).
! You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise,
Towing
the vehicle could be damaged.
You may only tow the vehicle a maximum dis-
tance of 30 miles (50 km). For a towing dis-
tance of over 30 miles (50 km), the propeller Tow-starting (emergency engine
shafts to the driven axles must be removed. starting)
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Vehicles with automatic transmission
lock.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
Roadside Assistance
depressed. must not be tow-started. You could other-

wise damage the automatic transmission.
X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion N. You can find information on jump-starting
under "Jump-starting“ (Y page 276).
X Release the parking brake.
X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition Electrical fuses
lock.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps G WARNING
(Y page 95). If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
X Do not exceed the towing speed of 30 mph you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
(50 km/h) and the towing distance of age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
30 miles (50 km). This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
Recovering a vehicle that is stuck new fuses having the correct amperage.
! When recovering a vehicle that has
become stuck, pull it as smoothly and
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Sprinter vehicles and that have the
evenly as possible. Excessive tractive
required fuse rating for the systems con-
power could damage the vehicles.
cerned. Components or systems could oth-
If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or erwise be damaged.
muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the
The fuses in your vehicle switch off defective
utmost care. This is especially the case if the
power circuits. If a fuse blows, all the com-
vehicle is laden.
ponents on the circuit and their functions will
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a cease to operate.
trailer attached.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and fuse rating. Observe the infor-

Electrical fuses 281
mation about fuse rating in the fuse allocation

chart.
If a new fuse blows again, have the cause
determined and rectified at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The fuse allocation chart and other informa-
tion on the fuses can be found in the "Fuse
allocation chart" supplement.
Roadside Assistance
Z
282

283

Important safety notes ..................... 284
Operation ........................................... 284
Operation in winter ........................... 286
Tire pressure ..................................... 288
Loading the vehicle .......................... 295
What you should know about
wheels and tires ................................ 299
Flat tire .............................................. 305
Changing wheels ............................... 305
Wheel and tire combination ............. 311
Spare wheel ....................................... 312
Wheels and tires

284 Operation
Useful information Before purchasing and using non-approved

accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
This Operator's Manual describes all models shop and inquire about:
as well as standard and optional equipment of Rsuitability
your vehicle that were available at the time of Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
equipped with all of the described functions. Contact an authorized Sprinter dealer if you
This also applies to systems and functions require information on tested and recommen-
relevant to safety. ded wheels and tires for summer and winter
driving. Advice on purchasing and caring for
tires is also available there.
Information on tire and wheel dimensions and
types as well as the recommended tire pres-
Important safety notes sure for your vehicle can be found in the "Tire
pressure" section (Y page 294).
G Warning This data can also be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar.
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. Modifications to the brake system or wheels
There is a risk of an accident. are not permitted. The use of wheel spacers
or brake dust shields is not permitted. This
do not drive with a flat tire. Immediately
invalidates the general operating permit for
Wheels and tires
replace the flat tire with your spare wheel, or

the vehicle.
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
i Further information on wheels and tires
G WARNING can be obtained at any qualified specialist
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, workshop.
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent. Operation
Always replace wheels and tires with those Information for a journey
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part. If the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the pressures, and correct them, if necessary
correct: (Y page 288).
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
Rdesignation
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
Rmodel e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
When replacing tires, make sure to use the the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
correct: pect that a tire is defective, reduce your
Rdesignation speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon
as possible to check the wheels and tires for
Rmanufacturer
damage. Hidden tire damage could also be
Rmodel
causing the unusual handling characteristics.
If you find no signs of damage, have the tires
Accessories that are not approved for your
and wheels checked at a qualified specialist
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
workshop.
used correctly can impair operating safety.

Operation 285
When parking your vehicle, make sure that The service life of tires depends on various
the tires do not get deformed by the curb or factors, including the following:
other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over Rdriving style
curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try
Rtire pressure
to do so slowly and not at a sharp angle. Oth-
Rmileage
erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,
can get damaged.
Tire tread
Regular wheel and tire checks G WARNING
G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
Check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
damage regularly, i.e. at least every two ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
weeks, as well as after driving off-road or on should regularly check the tread depth and
rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a the condition of the tread across the entire
loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention width of all tires.
Wheels and tires

to damage such as: Minimum tire tread depth for:
Rcuts in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
Rpunctures RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
Rtears in the tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before
Rbulges on tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels tire tread depth is reached.
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 285). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
install anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved for your vehicle by dealers listed on
the inside of the front cover. Do not install any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marker : shows the location where the bar
monitor systems. indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires, into the tire tread.
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire Tread wear indicators (TWIs) are required by
pressure if necessary (Y page 288). law. Six indicators are positioned over the tire
tread. They are visible once the tread depth is
Z
286 Operation in winter
approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the M+S tires

case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced. G WARNING
Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and
Selecting, mounting and renewing the wheel to be replaced. When the spare
tires wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may
ROnly
be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-
mount tires and wheels of the same
dent.
type and make.
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
In order to reduce risks:
the wheels. Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for style and drive carefully.
the first 65 miles (100 km). Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
RDo not drive with tires which have too little that differs from the wheel to be replaced.
tread depth, as this significantly reduces Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). wheel to be replaced for a short time.
RReplace the tires after 6 years at the latest, Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
regardless of wear. This also applies to the Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
spare wheel. wheel that has been changed replaced at
the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
You must observe the correct wheel and
Wheels and tires
Operation in winter tire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

General notes
G WARNING
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
specialist workshop at the onset of winter. ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
Prior to the onset of winter, ensure that snow and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
chains are stowed in the vehicle a risk of an accident.
(Y page 287). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
Also observe the notes in the "Changing a (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
wheel" section (Y page 305).
Use winter tires or all-season tires at temper-
atures below 45 ‡ (+7 †). Both types of tire
Driving with summer tires are identified by the M+S marking.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-
cle to M+S tire. Using summer tires at very ditions.
cold temperatures could cause tears to form, Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-
thereby damaging the tires permanently. We tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-
cannot accept responsibility for this type of mally in winter. These tires have been devel-
damage. oped specifically for driving in snow.
For safe driving, use M+S tires of the same
make and tread pattern on all wheels.

Operation in winter 287
Always observe the maximum permissible Snow chains increase traction on roads in
speed specified for the M+S tires you have wintry conditions.
mounted. For reasons of safety we only recommend
If you mount M+S tires that have a lower max- using snow chains or traction aids that are
imum permissible speed than that of the vehi- approved for the Sprinter. The snow chains or
cle, affix a corresponding warning label in the traction aids must be of class U or meet the
driver's field of vision. You can obtain this at a SAE type U specification. Information on
qualified specialist workshop. snow chains is available at any qualified spe-
Once you have mounted the winter tires: cialist workshop.
When mounting snow chains, please bear the
X Check the tire pressure (Y page 288).
following points in mind:
X Reactivate the tire pressure moni-
RSnow chains cannot be mounted on all
tor* (Y page 293).
wheel/tire combinations. When mounting
the snow chains, note the permissible tire
and snow chain dimensions.
Snow chains
RMount snow chains only in pairs and only to
G WARNING the rear wheels. On vehicles with twin tires,
If you drive too fast with snow chains moun- mount the snow chains to the outer wheels.
ted, they may snap. As a result, you could Observe the manufacturer's mounting
injure others and damage the vehicle. There is instructions.
a risk of an accident. ROnly use snow chains when the road is cov-
Wheels and tires

Observe the maximum permissible speed for ered by a layer of snow. Remove the snow
operation with snow chains. chains as soon as possible when you come
to a road that is not snow-covered.
When driving with snow chains installed, do RThe use of snow chains may be restricted
not exceed the maximum permissible speed by local regulations. Observe the appropri-
of 30 mph (50 km/h). Observe the country- ate regulations before mounting snow
specific laws and regulations for operation chains.
with snow chains. RWhen driving with snow chains installed, do
! Check the snow chains for damage before not exceed the maximum permissible
mounting them. Damaged or worn snow speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
chains may snap and damage the following RCheck the tension of the chains after a dis-
components: tance of approximately 0.5 miles (1.0 km).
Rwheel You can deactivate ASR (Y page 58) when
Rwheel housing pulling away with snow chains mounted. This
allows the wheels to spin in a controlled man-
Rwheel suspension
ner, achieving an increased driving force (cut-
For this reason, you must use only snow ting action).
chains that are free of defects. Observe the
manufacturer's mounting instructions.
! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you
mount snow chains on steel wheels, you
may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub
caps from the relevant wheels before
mounting the snow chains.
* optional Z
288 Tire pressure
Tire pressure General notes

Tire pressure specifications You will find information on tire pressure for
the vehicle's factory-mounted tires on the
Important safety notes plates described here.
You will find a table of recommended tire
G WARNING
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
placard5 or on the tire pressure table on the
following risks:
B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load Further information on tire pressure can be
and vehicle speed increase. obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire Tire and Loading Information placard
traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
Rmonthly, at least
Wheels and tires
Rif the load changes

Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g. Tire and Loading Information placard5
off-road driving
The Tire and Loading Information placard is
If necessary, correct the tire pressure. on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-
cle (Y page 295).
i The specifications shown on the sample
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
Tire and Loading Information placard and
tains recommended tire pressures : for cold
tire pressure table are examples. Tire pres-
tires. Recommended tire pressures : are
sure data are vehicle-specific and may devi-
valid for the maximum permissible load and
ate from the data illustrated here. The tire
up to the maximum permissible speed of the
pressure data applicable to your vehicle
vehicle.
can be found on the Tire & Loading Infor-
mation placard or tire pressure plate of
your vehicle.
Check the tire pressure regularly, at least
every 14 days.
5 Only for vehicles with a gross vehicle weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

Tire pressure 289
Tire pressure plate The tire temperature and pressure increase

when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-
ent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sure when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours without direct sunlight on the
tires, and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tire pressure plate Tire temperature changes depending on the
ambient temperature, driving speed and tire
The tire pressure table is located on the
load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡
B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(10 †), the tire pressure changes by approx-
(Y page 295).
imately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this
The tire pressure table contains recommen- into account when checking the pressure of
ded tire pressures : for cold tires. Recom- warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it
mended tire pressures : apply to the maxi- is too low for the current operating condi-
mum permissible load and up to the maxi- tions. If you check the tire pressure when the
mum permissible speed of the vehicle. tires are warm, it results in a higher value than
Wheels and tires

when the tires are cold. This is normal. Do not
under any circumstances release the air in
Important notes on tire pressure order to adjust the pressure to the prescribed
G WARNING value for cold tires. The tire pressure would
otherwise be too low.
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire Observe the recommended tire pressures for
pressure that is too low may result in a tire cold tires:
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac-
RCheck the tire for foreign objects. ard6 on the B-pillar on the driver's side or
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on
valve is leaking. the driver's side of the vehicle
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
Underinflated tires:
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about G WARNING
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
pressure can be checked using the on-board
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
computer.
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
6 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).
Z
290 Tire pressure
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the pressures always observe the recommended
tires, including the spare wheel. tire pressure for your vehicle (Y page 288).
i The actual values for tires are specific to
Underinflated tires can:
each vehicle and may deviate from the val-
Rfail
from being overheated ues in the illustration.
Radversely affect handling
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Tire valve (snap-in valve)
G WARNING
Overinflated tires Tire valve that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by the distributor named on the inside
G WARNING
cover page may result in a loss of tire pres-
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
sure. This may affect road safety. There is a
because they are damaged more easily by
risk of an accident.
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can Only use tire valve that are approved for your
severely impair the braking properties and the vehicle by the distributor named on the inside
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an cover page. Always make sure you have the
accident. correct tire valve type for the tires on your
vehicle.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel. ! Do not screw additional weights (check
Wheels and tires
valves, etc.) onto the tire valves. The elec-

Overinflated tires can:
tronic components could thus be damaged.
Rincrease the braking distance
Only for vehicles without a tire pressure mon-
Radversely affect handling
itor:
Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Radversely affect ride comfort mends that you only use tire valves that have
Rbe more susceptible to damage been tested for use on your vehicle.
Maximum tire pressures

Checking the tire pressure manually
In order to determine and adjust the tire pres-
sures, proceed as follows:
X Remove the valve cap of the tire you wish to
check.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the loading
information table or the tire pressure table
: Maximum permitted tire pressure (exam- (Y page 288).
ple) X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire the recommended value.
inflation pressure. When adjusting the tire

Tire pressure 291
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
pressing down the metal pin in the valve. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, system is not operating properly. The TPMS
check the tire pressure again using the tire malfunction indicator is combined with the
pressure gauge. low tire pressure telltale. When the system
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will
X Repeat the steps for the other tires. flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
Tire pressure monitor cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal
G WARNING low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tions may occur for a variety of reasons,
should be checked at least once a month including the mounting of incompatible
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
the Tire and Loading Information placard on tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure function telltale after replacing one or more
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
vehicle has tires of a different size than the the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
Wheels and tires

size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
mation placard or the tire pressure label, you erly.
should determine the proper tire pressure for
those tires. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitor are
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has equipped with sensors in the wheels that
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring monitor the tire pressure of all four tires. The
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- tire pressure monitor monitors the pressure
sure telltale when one or more of your tires in all four tires; you set this pressure when you
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, activate the tire pressure monitor. The tire
when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, pressure monitor warns you when the pres-
you should stop and check your tires as soon sure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire
as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure monitor only functions if the corre-
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- sponding sensors are installed on all wheels.
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can You should always adjust the tire pressure
lead to tire failure. Underinflation also according to the vehicle load. Restart the tire
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and pressure monitor if you change the tire pres-
may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- sure.
ping ability. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you if
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute a tire pressure is incorrect. Observe the notes
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- on the recommended tire pressure
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire (Y page 288).
pressure, even if underinflation has not The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
reached the level to trigger illumination of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. follow-
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ing penetration by a foreign object. In this
USA only: event, brake the vehicle until it comes to a
Z
292 Tire pressure
standstill. Do not carry out any sudden steer- Checking the tire pressure electroni-
ing maneuvers. cally (vehicles with steering wheel but-
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow h tons)
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for
indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)
or pressure loss (Canada). Depending on how
the warning lamp flashes or lights up, an
underinflated tire or a malfunction in the tire
pressure monitor is displayed:
Rif the h warning lamp is lit continuously,
the tire pressure on one or more tires is Tire pressure display
significantly too low. The tire pressure mon- Using the steering wheel buttons
itor is not malfunctioning.
RUSA only: if the h warning lamp flashes
lock.
for 60 seconds and then remains lit con-
stantly, the tire pressure monitor is mal-
functioning. until the standard display is shown
(Y page 187).
Only vehicles with steering wheel buttons: the
X Press the 9 or : button repeatedly
on-board computer displays information on
tire pressure. After a few minutes of driving, until the current pressure of the individual
the current tire pressure of each tire is shown tires is shown in the display.
Wheels and tires
in the on-board computer. If the vehicle is parked for longer than

USA only: if the tire pressure monitor is mal- 20 minutes or you then drive at less than
functioning, it may be more than 10 minutes 18 mph (30 km/h), the Tire pres. dis‐
before the malfunction is shown. The h played after driving for several
tire pressure warning lamp flashes for minutes message appears.
60 seconds and then remains lit. When the i The tire pressure value shown in the dis-
malfunction has been rectified, the h tire play may differ from those measured at a
pressure warning lamp goes out after a few gas station using a pressure gage. The on-
minutes of driving. board computer will generally give you a
The tire pressure values indicated by the on- more exact value.
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gage. Tire pressure loss warning system
The tire pressures shown by the on-board
computer refer to those measured at sea Vehicles with steering wheel buttons
level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- If the tire pressure monitor detects a signifi-
ues indicated by a pressure gage are higher cant pressure loss on one or more tires, the
than those shown by the on-board computer. on-board computer displays a warning mes-
In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. sage. The h tire pressure loss warning
If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. wireless lamp in the instrument cluster (Y page 226)
headphones, two-way radios) is operated lights up.
inside the vehicle or in the vicinity of the vehi- The tire pressure is shown in 2 red rectangles.
cle, this can interfere with the operation of the The pressure of the tire concerned is shown in
tire pressure monitor. one of the two rectangles (Y page 197). Addi-
tionally, a warning tone sounds.

Tire pressure 293
Each tire that is affected by a significant loss the new reference values, provided that the
of pressure is highlighted in the pressure dis- tire pressure monitor considers them to be
play. plausible.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
X Press the g button or the 4 menu button
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, on the instrument cluster.
the currently set tire pressure are taken as The activation process is canceled auto-
reference values for monitoring. matically if 30 seconds elapse without
In most cases, the tire pressure monitor input.
detects the new reference values automati-
cally, e.g. after you have:
(vehicles with steering wheel buttons):
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged wheels or tires
lock.
Rinstalled new wheels or tires
X Press the V or U button on the steer-
However, you can also define reference val- ing wheel until the standard display
ues manually as described here. (Y page 187) appears in the display.
Before restarting the tire pressure moni- X Press the 9 or : button on the steer-
tor: ing wheel repeatedly until the current pres-
X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- sure of the individual tires is displayed or
mended on the Tire and Loading Informa- the display shows the following message:
Wheels and tires

tion placard or the tire pressure table on Tire pres. displayed after driving
the B-pillar on the driver's side for several minutes
(Y page 288). X Press the 9 reset button on the instru-
Observe the notes on tire pressure when ment cluster.

doing so (Y page 288). The display shows the following message:
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct Monitor current tire pressure?
on all four wheels. X Press the W button on the steering
wheel.
The display shows the following message:
(vehicles without steering wheel but-
tons): Tire pres. monitor reactivated
The tire pressure monitor activation proc-
ess has begun. The tire pressures meas-
lock. ured for the individual wheels are stored as
X Press the 4 menu button on the instru- the new reference values, provided that the
ment cluster repeatedly until the display tire pressure monitor considers them to be
shows the following message: plausible.
+CAL- TPMS
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X Press the f button on the instrument clus-
ter. X Press the X button on the steering
The display shows: wheel.
OK TPMS
The tire pressure monitor activation proc-
ess has begun. The tire pressures meas-
ured for the individual wheels are stored as
Z
294 Tire pressure
Tire pressure table

Front axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with
a permissible front axle load of 3970 lbs (1801 kg), 4080 lbs (1851 kg) or 4410 lbs (2000 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Front axle load
3970 lbs 4080 lbs 4410 lbs
(1801 kg) (1851 kg) (2000 kg)
205/75 R 16 C 110/108R — 400 kPa 420 kPa
6.5Jx16 ET627 (4.0 bar/58 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa

5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Half distance between centers:
4.94 in (125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.94 in (125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 320 kPa — —
Wheels and tires
6.5J x 16 (3.2 bar/47 psi)

Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)
235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 380 kPa 420 kPa
6,5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
Spare wheel, Vehicles with
Super Single tires.
7 Vehicles with Super Single tires.

Loading the vehicle 295
Rear axle tire pressure values: the following tire pressure values only apply to vehicles with
a permissible rear axle load of 5360 lbs (2431 kg), 7060 lbs (3202 kg) or 7720 lbs (3502 kg).
Tires/disc wheel Rear axle load
5360 lbs 7060 lbs 7720 lbs
(2431 kg) (3202 kg) (3502 kg)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112N — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.94 in (125.5 mm)
LT 215/85 R 16 115/112Q — 380 kPa 420 kPa
5.5Jx16 (3.8 bar/55 psi) (4.2 bar/61 psi)
4.94 in (125.5 mm)
LT 245/75 R 16 120/116N 480 kPa — —
6.5J x 16 (4.8 bar/
Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm) 70 psi)
285/65 R 16 C 128/126N (121 R) — 450 kPa —
Wheels and tires

285/65 R 16 C 128/126 N (123 (4.5 bar/65 psi)
R)8
8.5J x 16 ET 63
235/65 R 16 C 121N (118R) — 520 kPa —
6,5Jx16 (5.2 bar/75 psi)
Spare wheel, Vehicles with
Super Single tires.
Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by The Tire and Loading Information placard on the
exceeding the maximum load. driver’s door B-pillar
8 Super Single tires.
Z
296 Loading the vehicle
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle
the maximum possible load. weight rating
(1) Only for vehicles with a gross weight of
less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg):
Tire and Loading Information placard :
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Tire
and Loading Information placard :
shows the permissible number of occu-
pants and the maximum permissible load
of the vehicle. It also contains details of
the tire sizes and corresponding pres-
sures for tires mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is located
: Maximum number of seats
on the base of the driver's seat. The vehi-
cle identification plate informs you of the ; Maximum permissible gross vehicle
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up weight rating
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- X Specification for maximum gross vehicle
pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can weight ; is listed in the Tire and Loading
also find information about the maximum Information placard: "The gross weight of
Gross Axle Weight Rating on the front and occupants and luggage must not exceed
rear axle. XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
Wheels and tires
The maximum gross axle weight rating is The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
the maximum weight that can be carried cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
by one axle (front or rear axle). Do not applicable) must not exceed the specified
exceed the maximum gross vehicle value.
weight or the maximum gross axle weight
rating for the front or rear axle. i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard illustration are only an
example. The maximum permissible gross
Tire and Loading Information placard vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and
may differ from that which is illustrated.
General notes You can find the valid maximum permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight rating for your
Only vehicles with a gross weight of less than vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information
10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) have a Tire and Loading placard.
Information placard on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.

Loading the vehicle 297
Number of seats X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
150 pound passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 Ò 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
: Maximum number of seats luggage and cargo being loaded on the
; Maximum permissible gross vehicle vehicle. For reasons of safety, that weight
weight rating must not exceed the available cargo and
Maximum number of seats : determines the luggage cargo capacity calculated in step
maximum number of occupants allowed to 4.
travel in the vehicle. This information can be X Step 6 (if applicable): If you intend to tow
found on the Tire and Loading Information a trailer behind your vehicle, the load on the
placard. trailer is transferred to your vehicle. Please
consult the Tire and Loading Information
i The details on the Tire and Loading Infor- placard, to determine how this reduces the
Wheels and tires

mation placard illustration are only an
available cargo and luggage load capacity
example. The number of seats is vehicle-
of your vehicle.
specific and can differ from the details
shown. The number of seats in your vehicle
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard.
Determining the maximum load

Individual steps
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 in
accordance with the "National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be trav-
eling in your vehicle.
Z
298 Loading the vehicle
Example: Steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples of how to calculate total load and cargo capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard .
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1
occupants
Wheels and tires
Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
pants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants

What you should know about wheels and tires 299

Step 3 Permissible cargo 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
and trailer load/ (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
noseweight (maxi- Ò750 lbs Ò540 lbs Ò150 lbs (68 kg)
mum gross vehicle (340 kg) = (245 kg) = = 1350 lbs
weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) (612 kg)
the Tire and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all occu-
pants)
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 177).
Vehicle identification plate trailer load/noseweight is usually approx-

imately 10% of the gross weight of the trailer
Even if you have calculated the total cargo and its load.
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
Wheels and tires

weight rating are not exceeded. Details about What you should know about wheels
this can be found on the vehicle identification and tires
plate on the driver seat frame of your vehicle
(Y page 316). Tire labeling
Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of Overview
the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer
load/noseweight (if applicable) must not
exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per-
missible load that can be carried by one axle
(front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight
rating), have your loaded vehicle (including
driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if
applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle
weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross : DOT, Tire Identification Number
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, (Y page 302)
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the ; Maximum tire load (Y page 301)
load along with occupants and luggage. The
Z
300 What you should know about wheels and tires
= Maximum tire pressure (Y page 290) may not contain any letters or may contain
? Manufacturer one letter : that precedes the size descrip-
A Tire material (Y page 302) tion
B Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- If "LT" precedes the size description (as
city and speed index (Y page 300) shown above): these are light truck tires
according to U.S. manufacturing standards.
C Tire name
If "C" precedes the size description: these are
The markings described above are on the tire commercial motor vehicle tires according to
in addition to the tire name (sales designa- European manufacturing standards.
tion) and the manufacturer's name.
Tire width: tire width ; shows the nominal
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- tire width in millimeters.
ate from the data in the example. Aspect ratio: aspect ratio = is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
Tire size designation, load bearing index shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-
and speed index lated by dividing the tire width by the tire
height.
G WARNING
Tire code: tire code ? specifies the tire type.
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
"R" represents radial tires. "D" represents
city and the approved maximum speed could
diagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
tires.
is a risk of accident.
Rim diameter: rim diameter A is the diam-
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
Wheels and tires
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the

eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
your vehicle.
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index B
is a numerical code that specifies the maxi-
mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 295).
Example:
The load-bearing index 120 indicates a max-
imum load of 3,042 lb (1,380 kg) for the tire.
: Design standard If two load-bearing capacity indices are speci-
; Tire width fied (as shown above), the first number states
the load-bearing capacity for single tires, the
= Nominal aspect ratio in %
second number the load-bearing capacity for
? Tire code twin tires. For further information on the max-
A Rim diameter imum tire load in kilograms and pounds, see
B Load bearing index (Y page 301).
C Speed index For further information on the load-bearing
General: depending on the manufacturer's index, see "Load index" (Y page 301).
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall

Speed rating: speed rating C specifies the Load index

approved maximum speed of the tire.
Regardless of the speed index always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Index Speed rating
F up to 50 mph (80 km/h)
G up to 56 mph (90 km/h)
In addition to the load-bearing index, load rat-
J up to 62 mph (100 km/h) ing : may be imprinted after the letters that
K up to 68 mph (110 km/h) identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire
(Y page 300).
L up to 74 mph (120 km/h) RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
M up to 80 mph (130 km/h) example above), represents a standard

load (SL) tire
N up to 87 mph (140 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
P up to 93 mph (150 km/h) tire
Wheels and tires

RLight Load: represents a light load tire
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) RC, D, E: represents a load range that
R over 106 mph (170 km/h) depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
i Not all tires that have the M+S identifica- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
tion offer the driving characteristics of win- ate from the data in the example.
ter tires. In addition to the M+S marking,
winter tires also have the i snowflake Maximum tire load
symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this mark-
ing fulfill the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
regarding the tire traction on snow. They
have been especially developed for driving
on snow.
Further information on the reading of tire
information can be obtained at any qualified
Maximum tire load : is the maximum per-

missible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissi-
ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Z
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on Date of manufacture: date of manufacture

the driver's side (Y page 295). A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
i The actual values for tires are specific to
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
each vehicle and may deviate from the val-
for the first calendar week. Positions three
ues in the illustration.
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tire 2008.
manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
Wheels and tires
The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible This information describes the type of tire
for the purchaser to easily identify the affec- cord and the number of layers in sidewall :
ted tires. and under tire tread ;.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
cation code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? ate from the data in the example.
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definitions for tires and loading
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire structure and characteristics
of Transportation. Describes the number of layers or the number
Manufacturer identification code: manu- of rubber-coated belts in the tire tread and
facturer identification code ; provides the tire wall. These consist of steel, nylon,
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires polyester, and other materials.
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded Bar
tires have a code with four symbols. Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
Further information about retreaded tires per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals
(Y page 284). (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as a code to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Gross Axle Weight Rating can be found on the
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of vehicle identification plate on the driver seat
the United States Department of Transporta- frame (Y page 316).
tion. Speed index
Average weight of vehicle occupants The speed index is part of the tire identifica-
The number of occupants for which the vehi- tion. It specifies the speed range for which the
cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms tire is approved.
(150 lbs). GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GTW is the total of weight of a trailer and the
A uniform standard to grade the quality of weight of the load, accessories etc. on the
tires with regard to tread quality, traction and trailer.
temperature characteristics. The quality GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
grading assessment is made by the manufac-
turer following specifications from the U.S The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
government. The quality grade of a tire is of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-
gage and the drawbar noseweight if applica-
Recommended tire pressure ble. The gross vehicle weight may never
The recommended tire pressures are the exceed the gross vehicle weight rating
pressures specified for the tires mounted on (GVWR) specified on the vehicle identification
the vehicle at the factory. plate at the base of the driver's seat
Wheels and tires

(Y page 316).
The tire and load information table9 contains
the recommended tire pressures for cold GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
tires, the maximum permissible load and the The GVWR is the maximum permitted gross
maximum permissible vehicle speed. weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the
The tire pressure table contains the recom- vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
mended tire pressure for cold tires under var- fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight if
ious operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or applicable). The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
speed of the vehicle. is specified on the vehicle identification plate
Increased vehicle weight due to optional on the driver seat frame (Y page 316).
equipment Maximum weight of the laden vehicle
The combined weight of all standard and The maximum weight is the sum of:
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
regardless of whether it is actually installed
Rthe weight of the accessories
on the vehicle or not.
Rthe load limit
Wheel rim
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
The part of the wheel on which the tire is equipment
mounted.
Kilopascal (kPa)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa are the
GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rat- equivalent of 1 psi. Another tire pressure unit
ing. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
9 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4536 kg).
Z
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva- Cold tire pressure
lent of 1 bar. The tires are cold:
Load index Rif the vehicle has been parked for at least
In addition to the load bearing index, a load three hours without direct sunlight on the
index can be stamped onto the sidewall of the tires, and
tire. It specifies the load-bearing capacity of Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
the tire more precisely. than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Curb weight Tire tread
The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- The part of the tire that comes into contact
ment including the maximum filling capacity with the road.
of fuel, oil, and coolant. It also includes the
Tire bead
air-conditioning system and optional equip-
ment if these are installed on the vehicle, but The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
does not include passengers or luggage. securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
Maximum tire load coming loose from the wheel rim.
The maximum tire load in kilograms or
Sidewall
pounds is the maximum weight for which a
tire is approved. The part of the tire between the tread and the
tire bead.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Weight of optional extras
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one

tire. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
Maximum load on one tire parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated optional extras, such as high-performance
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle brakes, a roof rack or a high-performance
by two. battery, are not included in the curb weight
and the weight of the accessories.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Standard unit of measurement for tire pres- TIN (Tire Identification Number)
sure. A unique identification number which can be
used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires,
Aspect ratio for example for a product recall, and thus
Relationship between tire height and width in identify the purchasers. The TIN is composed
percent. of the manufacturer identification code, tire
size, tire model code and manufacturing date.
tire pressure
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward Load bearing index
force to every square inch of the tire's sur- The load bearing index (also load index) is a
face. Tire pressure is specified in pounds per code that contains the maximum load bearing
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. capacity of a tire.
Tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold. Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.

Changing wheels 305
TWR (permissible trailer drawbar load) Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
The TWR is the maximum permissible weight and tires are of the same dimensions.
that may act on the ball coupling of the trailer
tow hitch. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are loca-
Wear indicator ted in the wheel.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- Tire-mounting tools should not be used
tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is near the valve. This could damage the elec-
level with the bars, the wear limit of á in tronic components.
(1.6 mm) has been reached. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
Distribution of the vehicle occupants cialist workshop.
The distribution of vehicle occupants over Always observe the instructions and safety
designated seat positions in a vehicle. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(Y page 306).
Maximum permissible payload weight
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
Nominal load and goods/luggage load plus differ, depending on the operating conditions.
68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
seats in the vehicle. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
Flat tire
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
Wheels and tires

General notes can rotate the wheels according to the inter-
vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel, in your vehicle documents. If no warranty
the spare wheel is under the rear of the vehi- book is available, the tires should be rotated
cle (Y page 312). every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
Information about installing a wheel can be 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do
found in the "Wheel change" section not change the direction of rotation.
(Y page 306). Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
When you replace a tire, we recommend that the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
you also replace the tire valve. Please observe is rotated.
the safety-relevant information on tire valve Check the tire pressure and reactivate the tire
(Y page 290). pressure monitor if necessary.
Changing wheels
Rotating the wheels
G WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent. Diagram showing tire rotation for single and dual
tires
Z
306 Changing wheels
Single tires: if the tires are of identical X Turn the front wheels to the straight-ahead
dimensions, you can rotate both wheels on position.
both the front and rear axles so that the tires' X Move the selector lever of the automatic
original direction of rotation is maintained. On transmission to position P.
unidirectional tires, an arrow on the sidewall X Switch off the engine.
shows the prescribed direction of rotation of
X Passengers should leave the vehicle. Make
the tire.
sure that the passengers are not endan-
Twin rear tires: if the tires are of identical gered as they do so.
dimensions, you can rotate the wheels on the
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
front axle and the inner wheels on the rear
area while the wheel is being changed. Any-
axle in pairs such that the original direction of
one who is not directly assisting in the
tire rotation is retained. With unidirectional
wheel change should, for example, stand
tires, you may rotate the outside wheels at
behind the barrier.
the rear axle from one side to the other.
X Place the warning triangle or warning lamp
at a suitable distance.
Direction of rotation Observe legal requirements.
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk away.
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben- i Observe the safety notes on parking in the
efits if the correct direction of rotation is section on "Driving and parking"
observed. (Y page 149).
Wheels and tires
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates X On level terrain: place chocks or other
its correct direction of rotation. suitable objects under the front and rear of
You may mount a spare wheel against the the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
direction of rotation. Observe the time wheel to be changed.
restriction on use as well as the speed limi- X On slight inclines: place chocks or other
tation specified on the spare wheel. suitable objects under the wheels on the
front and rear axles opposite the wheel to
be changed.
Storing wheels X Take the vehicle tool kit and the jack from
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, the footwell on the co-driver's side
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the (Y page 274).
tires from contact with oil, grease and fuel. X Remove the spare wheel from the spare
wheel bracket (Y page 313). Observe the
safety notes in the "Spare wheel" section
Mounting a wheel (Y page 312).
Vehicle preparation X On wheels with wheel bolts, remove the
hub caps.
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic and on a level, firm and non-slip
surface.
X If your vehicle poses a risk to approaching
traffic, switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Apply the parking brake.

Changing wheels 307
Observe the following when raising the vehi-

cle:
RWhen raising the vehicle, only use the jack
which Mercedes-Benz has specifically
approved for your vehicle.
RThe vehicle's jack is intended only to raise
the vehicle for a short time when changing
a wheel. It is not suited for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and
X Assemble the lug wrench extension using downhill slopes.

the middle rod and the rod with the largest RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
diameter from the three-piece jack pump rolling away by applying the parking brake
lever. and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-
X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug gage the parking brake while the vehicle is
wrench extension as far as it will go onto raised.
the lug wrench. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the wheel non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
bolts/wheel nuts on the wheel to be large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
changed by about one full turn. Do not On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
unscrew the wheel bolts/nuts completely. must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Wheels and tires

RMake sure that the distance between the
Raising the vehicle underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 in(3 cm).
G WARNING RNever place your hands or feet under the
If you do not position the jack correctly at the raised vehicle.
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the RNever lie under the raised vehicle.
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RNever start the engine when the vehicle is
There is a risk of injury. raised.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- RNever open or close a door when the vehi-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack cle is raised.
must be positioned vertically, directly under
RMake sure that no persons are present in
the jacking point of the vehicle.
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
G WARNING ! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod
On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack could and the rod with the largest diameter as a
tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk lug wrench extension. Only slide the middle
of injury. rod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.
Do not change wheels on uphill or downhill The rods may otherwise bend and be dis-
gradients. Notify a qualified specialist work- torted to such an extent that they can no
shop. longer be used as a pump lever for the jack.
! Do not place the jack on the leaf spring or
! Only position the jack on the jacking the differential case.
points intended for this purpose. You could
otherwise damage the vehicle.
Z
308 Changing wheels
Hydraulic jack Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type

2500)
Preparing the hydraulic jack
X Insert the third rod of jack pump lever :
into the lug wrench extension.
Jack pump lever : is assembled.
X Close pressure release screw ;.
X To do this, use the flattened section on
pump lever : to turn pressure release
screw ; clockwise to the stop.
i Do not turn pressure release screw ;
Wheels and tires
more than 1 or 2 full turns. Hydraulic fluid

could otherwise escape.
Jacking point, rear axle (example: vehicle type
X Insert pump lever : into the recess on the 3500)
jack and secure by turning it clockwise. Jacking point at the rear axle on vehicle
X Place the jack vertically beneath the jack- types 2500 and 3500
ing points described below. X Place the jack under the longitudinal mem-
ber in front of the rear axle.
Jacking point, front axle

Jacking point at the front axle Jacking point, rear axle (example: Cab Chassis)
X Place the jack under the longitudinal mem- Jacking point at the rear axle on chassis
ber in front of the front axle. versions
X Place the jack next to the front leaf spring
support beneath the jacking point.

Changing wheels 309
Removing a wheel The handling characteristics of your vehicle

are affected when driving with a spare wheel
! Do not place the wheel bolts or the wheel installed. After changing a wheel, drive to the
nuts in sand or dirt. The threads of the
nearest specialist workshop and have the
wheel bolts and wheel nuts could otherwise
spare wheel replaced with a wheel and tire
be damaged when being tightened.
assembly that has a Super Single tire.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts or nuts.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
X On front wheels with wheel nuts, remove surfaces.
the wheel nut cover. X Unscrew the six adapter bolts on the spare
X Remove the wheel. wheel and remove the adapter.
X Tighten the adapter with the six adapter
Installing the adapter bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern through
the outer holes on the wheel hub.
G WARNING
X Tighten the six adapter bolts on the wheel
If you tighten the adapter bolts when the vehi- hub to a tightening torque of 177 lb-ft
cle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a
(240 Nm).
risk of injury.
X Push the wheel onto the adapter and attach
Make sure that the vehicle is properly pre-
it.
pared for a wheel change. Tighten the adapter
bolts with particular care and attention.
Mounting a new wheel
Always observe the instructions and safety
Wheels and tires

notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305). G WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
G WARNING wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
If you do not tighten the bolts of the adapter to bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
the specified tightening torque, the adapter lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
may come loose with the spare wheel. There accident.
is a risk of an accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
Tighten the bolts of the adapter to the speci- damage to the threads, contact a qualified
fied tightening torque. Have the spare wheel specialist workshop immediately. Have the
replaced with a complete wheel and an extra- damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
wide tire at a qualified specialist workshop replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
immediately.
G WARNING
! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
install the spare wheel, do not exceed the when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and over. There is a risk of injury.
do not drive further than 65 miles(100 km).
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
The transmission could otherwise be dam- when the vehicle is on the ground.
aged by the difference in wheel rotation
speeds. Always observe the instructions and safety
On vehicles with Super Single tires, you must notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 305).
attach the narrow spare wheel to the rear axle Only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts that have
by means of an adapter. The adapter is bolted been designed for the wheel and the vehicle.
to the spare wheel using the adapter bolts for For safety reasons, we recommend that you
transportation. only use wheel bolts or wheel nuts which have
Z
310 Changing wheels
been approved for Sprinter vehicles and the For wheels with wheel nuts:
respective wheel. X Front wheels with wheel nut covers: press
! For a steel wheel, only use the short wheel the wheel nut covers onto the wheel nuts.
bolts to mount the steel spare wheel. Using X Screw in the three wheel nuts over the fix-
other wheel bolts to mount the steel spare ing discs of the wheel nut cover.
wheel could damage the brake system. X Turn the wheel so that the wheel bolts are
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure in the middle of the holes.

monitor, electronic components are loca- X Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts.
ted in the wheel. X Slightly tighten all the wheel nuts.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used
near the valve. This could damage the elec- Lowering the vehicle
tronic components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- G WARNING
cialist workshop. The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
! Only use the jack pump lever middle rod

Wheels and tires
and the rod with the largest diameter as a

lug wrench extension. Only slide the middle
rod as far as it will go onto the lug wrench.
The rods may otherwise bend and be dis-
: Wheel bolt for alloy wheel torted to such an extent that they can no
; Wheel bolt for steel wheel longer be used as a pump lever for the jack.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact ! Vehicles with Super Single tires: if you
surfaces. install the spare wheel, do not exceed the
X Vehicles with Super Single tires: first attach maximum speed of 40 mph (60 km/h) and
the adapter for the narrow spare wheel to do not drive further than 65 miles(100 km).
the wheel hub (Y page 309). The transmission could otherwise be dam-
X Slide the new wheel onto the wheel hub or aged by the difference in wheel rotation
onto the adapter for the spare wheel and speeds.
push it on.
Wheels with centering by wheel bolts:
X Vehicles with alloy wheels: take the short
wheel bolts that secure the steel spare
wheel out of the vehicle tool kit.
X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them
lightly.

Wheel and tire combination 311
X Wheel with hub cap: position the opening

for the tire valve in the hub cap over the tire
valve.
X Push the edge of the hub cap with both
hands against the wheel until it clicks into
place. Make sure the hub cap retaining
catches engage on the steel wheel.
X Wheel with central hub cap: position the
retaining lugs of the central hub cap over
the wheel bolts.
Tightening torque pattern X Hit the middle of the hub cap to engage it on
:—B Wheel bolts or wheel nuts the wheel.

X Using the pump lever, slowly turn the low- X Secure the faulty wheel in the spare wheel
ering screw on the jack through approx- bracket (Y page 313).
imately one revolution and carefully lower X Vehicles with Super Single tires: transport
the vehicle (Y page 307). the defective rear wheel in the load area.
X Put the jack aside. The rear wheel is too large for the spare
X Pull the rod with the smallest diameter off
wheel bracket.
the pump lever. X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
The shortened pump lever serves as a lug ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
wrench extension. Observe the recommended tire pressure
Wheels and tires

X Starting with the middle rod, slide the lug (Y page 288).
wrench extension as far as it will go onto X Retighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts to
the lug wrench. the specified tightening torque after the
X Using the extended lug wrench, tighten the vehicle has been driven for 30 miles
wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in (50 km).
the sequence indicated (: to B). When using a wheel/spare wheel with a new
Tighten the wheel bolts to the following or newly painted wheel rim, have the wheel
tightening torques: bolts/nuts retightened again after approx-
RSteel wheel 177 lb-ft (240 Nm) imately 600 to 3,000 miles (1,000 to
5,000 km). Observe the specified tightening
RAlloy wheel 133 lb-ft (180 Nm)
torque.
Tighten the wheel nuts to a tightening tor-
que of 133 lb-ft (180 Nm). i Vehicles with the tire pressure monitor
system: all mounted wheels must be equip-
X Push the piston on the hydraulic jack in
ped with functioning sensors.
again and close the pressure release
screw.
X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle Wheel and tire combination
tools in the vehicle again.
i You can now install the hub caps on steel General notes
wheels with wheel bolts. The installing pro- ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
cedure depends on whether the hub cap ommended for Sprinter vehicles, since pre-
acts as a trim that covers the whole wheel, vious damage cannot always be detected
or just covers the center. on retreaded tires. We can therefore not
guarantee driving safety. Do not mount
Z
312 Spare wheel
used tires if you have no information about the wheel to be replaced. When the spare
their previous usage. wheel is mounted, driving characteristics may
The recommended tire pressures can be be severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-
found: dent.
Ron the Tire and Loading Information plac- In order to reduce risks:
ard10 on the B-pillar on the driver's side Ryou should therefore adapt your driving
Ron the tire pressure table on the B-pillar on style and drive carefully.
the driver's side Rnever mount more than one spare wheel
The recommended tire pressure can also be that differs from the wheel to be replaced.
found in the "Tire pressure table" section in Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from the
this Operator's Manual (Y page 294). The wheel to be replaced for a short time.
wheel/tire combination for your vehicle can Rdo not deactivate ESP®.
be found on the tire pressure table. Further Rhave a spare wheel that differs from the
information on wheel/tire combination can wheel that has been changed replaced at
be obtained at any qualified specialist work- the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
shop. You must observe the correct wheel and
Check tire pressures regularly and only when tire dimensions as well as the wheel type.
the tires are cold. Observe the notes on the
recommended tire pressure (Y page 288). When using a spare wheel of a different size,
Follow the maintenance recommendations in do not exceed the maximum speed of
the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your 80 km/h.
Wheels and tires
vehicle documents.
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle: General notes
Rwith tires of the same size across an axle ! Check the spare wheel regularly to see
(left/right) that it is secure and has the prescribed tire
Rwith the same type of tires on all wheels at
pressure.
a given time (summer tires, winter tires) The procedure for mounting the spare wheel
Tires that have been specially designed and is described in "Mounting a wheel"
approved for your vehicle are marked with (Y page 306).
MO or MO1 (Mercedes-Benz Original). You The following should be checked regularly,
can find this identification on the tires them- particularly prior to long journeys:
selves and in the following table. Rthe tire pressure of the spare wheel, which
i Not all wheel/tire combinations can be should then be corrected if necessary
installed at the factory in all countries. (Y page 288).
Rthe fastenings of the spare wheel bracket.
The spare wheel is located in a spare wheel
Spare wheel bracket under the rear of the vehicle.
Important safety notes Replace the tires after 6 years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
G WARNING spare wheel.
Wheel and tire dimensions as well as the type
of tire can vary between the spare wheel and
10 Only for vehicles with a gross weight of less than 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg).

Spare wheel 313
i If you have mounted a spare wheel, the X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and
tire pressure monitor (Y page 291) will not unhook left-hand retaining hook =.
function for this wheel. The spare wheel is X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and
not equipped with a sensor for monitoring slide it into sleeve ? on spare wheel
tire pressure. bracket A.
X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the
pump lever and unhook right-hand retain-
Removing and installing the spare ing hook =.
wheel
X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket A down
Cargo Van/Passenger Van to the ground.
X Lift spare wheel bracket A slightly and pull
the pump lever out of sleeve ?.
Wheels and tires

Bolt covers for the safety catches (example: Cargo
Van)
Removing Spare wheel in the spare wheel carrier
X Open the rear doors. X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel
X Place a screwdriver into recesses ; and beyond the rear edge of the spare wheel
then pry off covers :. carrier.
X Using the lug wrench from the vehicle tool X Carefully remove the spare wheel from
kit (Y page 274), unscrew the now visible spare wheel bracket A.
bolts counter-clockwise by approximately The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare
20 turns. wheel is removed, the center of gravity
changes due to the heavy weight of the
wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip
over.
Installing
X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare
wheel bracket A.
The spare wheel is heavy. When you place
the spare wheel onto spare wheel bracket
A, the center of gravity changes due to the
weight of the wheel. The spare wheel may
slip down or tip over.
Spare wheel carrier under the vehicle X Slide the pump lever for the jack into
sleeve ? on spare wheel bracket A.
Z
314 Spare wheel
X Raise spare wheel bracket A with the

pump lever and attach right-hand retaining
hook =.
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket A and
attach left-hand retaining hook =.
X Pull the pump lever out of sleeve ?.
X Using the lug wrench, tighten the retaining
hook bolts by turning them clockwise.
X Replace and engage covers :.
X Close the rear doors.
X Use the pump lever to lift the spare wheel
Cab Chassis version beyond the rear edge of spare wheel
bracket ?.
X Carefully remove the spare wheel from the
bracket.
The spare wheel is heavy. When the spare
wheel is removed, the center of gravity
changes due to the heavy weight of the
wheel. The spare wheel may slip down or tip
over.
Installing
Wheels and tires
X Carefully place the spare wheel onto spare

wheel bracket ?.
Removing The spare wheel is heavy. When you place
X Loosen fender nuts = manually and then the spare wheel onto spare wheel
remove them. bracket ?, the center of gravity changes
X Loosen nuts ; as far as the thread end. due to the weight of the wheel. The spare
X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
wheel may slip down or tip over.
unhook left-hand retaining hook :. X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the
X Assemble the pump lever for the jack and

pump lever and attach right-hand retaining
hook :.
slide it into the sleeve on the right-hand
side of spare wheel bracket ?. X Slightly raise spare wheel bracket ? and
X Raise spare wheel bracket ? with the

attach left-hand retaining hook :.
pump lever and unhook right-hand retain- X Pull the pump lever out.
ing hook :. X Tighten nuts ;.

X Slowly lower spare wheel bracket ? down X Put fender nuts = in place and tighten
to the ground. them.
X Lift spare wheel bracket ? slightly and pull
the pump lever out of the sleeve.

315
Vehicle electronics ........................... 316

Identification plates ......................... 316
Service products and capacities ..... 318
Vehicle data ....................................... 327
Technical data

316 Identification plates
Vehicle electronics For operation of mobile phones and two-way

radios, Mercedes Benz recommends connec-
Tampering with the engine electron- tion to an approved exterior antenna. This is
ics the only way to ensure optimum reception
quality inside the vehicle and to minimize
G WARNING
mutual interference between the vehicle elec-
Always have work on the engine electronics tronics, mobile phones and two-way radios.
and related components carried out at a quali-
The transmission output of the mobile phone
fied specialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehi-
or two-way radio may not exceed the follow-
cle's operating safety could be affected.
ing maximum transmission output (PEAK):
! Only have engine electronics and the cor- Frequency range Maximum trans-
responding parts, such as control units, mission output
sensors or connector leads, serviced in a (PEAK)
qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise,
the vehicle parts may wear more quickly. Shortwave 100 W
This can lead to loss of the New Vehicle (f < 50 MHz)
Limited Warranty.
4 m waveband 30 W
2 m waveband 50 W
Installing electrical or electronic
equipment Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W
G WARNING 70 cm waveband 35 W
You and others may damage your health due GSM/UMTS/LTE 10 W
to excessive electromagnetic radiation. By
using an external antenna, the possible health
Technical data
risks of electromagnetic fields, which are Identification plates

under discussion among the scientific com-
munity, should be largely prevented. Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
Therefore, only have the exterior antenna cle identification number (VIN)
installed at a qualified specialist workshop.
Electrical and electronic devices may have a

detrimental effect on both the comfort and
the operating safety of the vehicle. If equip-
ment of this kind is installed, its electromag-
netic compatibility must be checked and veri-
fied.
If these devices are linked to functions asso-
ciated with resistance to interference, they
must have type approval. This applies to the
device or its interfaces to the vehicle elec- Vehicle identification plate for vehicles or chassis
tronics, e.g. charging brackets. on the base of the driver's seat
A telephone or two-way radio to be installed in X Open the driver’s door.
the vehicle must be approved. Further infor- You will see vehicle identification plate :
mation can be obtained from any Sprinter with the vehicle identification number
Dealer.

Identification plates 317
(VIN), the paint code and the permissible

weight data.
Engine compartment
? VIN (stamped on the rear wall of the
engine compartment)
Example: vehicle identification plate (US vehicles)
A Engine number (stamped on the crank-
case)
B Emission Control Information and engine
oil11 instruction labels
Example: chassis identification plate (US vehicles)
Technical data
Example: Emission Control Information label
i Such data is vehicle-specific and may dif-
fer from that shown. Always observe the
specifications on your vehicle's identifica-
tion plate.
Example: chassis identification plate (vehicles for

Canada) Engine number
; VIN
The engine number is stamped on the crank-
= Paint code case. More information may be obtained at
any qualified specialist workshop.
11 Also observe the notes on engine oil for diesel engines in the "Technical data" section.
Z
318 Service products and capacities
Service products and capacities cause engine damage and must therefore not
be added to the service products.
Important safety notes The use of additives is always the responsi-
G WARNING bility of the vehicle operator. The use of addi-
tives may result in the restriction or loss of
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
your Limited Warranty entitlements.
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels Fuel
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original Important safety notes
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children. G WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling of
H Environmental note fuel creates a risk of fire and explosion.
Dispose of service products in an environ- Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creating
mentally responsible manner. sparks under all circumstances. Switch off the
engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating
Service products include the following: before refueling.
RFuels, e.g. diesel
RAdditives for the exhaust gas aftertreat-
G WARNING
ment, e.g. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
RLubricants, e.g. engine oil, transmission oil
You must make sure that fuel does not come
RCoolant
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
RBrake fluid
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
Technical data
RWasher fluid vapors. Keep fuel away from children.

RClimate control system refrigerants If you or others come into contact with fuel,
Approved service products comply with the observe the following:
highest quality standards and are listed in the RWash away fuel from skin immediately
MB Specifications for Service Products. Only using soap and water.
use service products approved for the vehi-
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
cle. This is an important condition for the war-
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
ranty.
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
You will recognize the approved service prod- out delay.
ucts by the inscription on the container: MB
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
Approval (e.g. MB Approval 228.5)
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
Other identifications and recommendations ing.
refer to quality level or a specification accord-
RImmediately change out of clothing which
ing to an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 228.5).
has come into contact with fuel.
They are therefore not necessarily approved.
Further information can be obtained at any When handling, storing and disposing of fuels,
qualified specialist workshop. please observe the relevant regulations.
Additives for approved service products are
neither required nor permitted. Approved fuel
additives are the exception. Additives can

Service products and capacities 319
Tank contents a diesel fuel with a sulfur content greater

than 15 ppm.
Depending on equipment, the total capacity
of the fuel tank may vary. ! Do not use the following:
RMarine diesel
Total capacity
RHeating oil
2500 Approx- RBio-diesel
3500 imately
RVegetable oil
26.4 US gal
RGasoline
(100 l)
RParaffin
RKerosene
of which reserve fuel
Do not mix such fuels with diesel fuel and
Models with a total capacity Approx- do not use any special additives. This can
of approximately imately otherwise lead to engine damage. This
26.4 US gal (100 l) 5.3 US gal does not include flow improver additives.
(20 l) For further information, see "Flow improv-
ers".
Diesel You will generally find information about the
fuel grade on the filling pump. If there is no
Fuel grade identification on the filling pump, consult a
G WARNING gas station attendant.
If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash For more information about refueling
point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. (Y page 145).
When the engine is running, exhaust system
Diesel at very low outside temperatures
Technical data
components could overheat without being
noticed. There is a risk of fire. G WARNING
Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline If you heat fuel system components, e.g. with
with diesel fuel. a hot-air gun or open flame, these compo-
nents could be damaged. This can cause fuel
! Filter the fuel before transferring it to the to escape and ignite. Depending on the type
vehicle if you are refueling the vehicle from of damage, fuel may also not escape until the
barrels or containers. engine is running. There is a risk of fire and
This will prevent malfunctions in the fuel explosion.
system due to contaminated fuel. Never heat fuel system components. Contact
a qualified specialist workshop to rectify the
! Vehicles without a diesel particle fil-
malfunction.
ter: in countries where only diesel fuel with
a high sulfur content is available, you will Refill only with commercially available
need to carry out your vehicle's oil change ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL (ULSD, maxi-
at shorter intervals. Further information on mum sulfur content 15 ppm), which fulfills the
oil change intervals can be obtained at a ASTM D975 standard.
The flow properties of diesel may be inade-
! Sprinter diesel engine quate at low outside temperatures due to
You will damage the diesel engine if you do paraffin separation.
not refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel or use
Z
i Malfunctions resulting from paraffin sep- Rthe operating conditions

aration can only be rectified by heating the Rthe type or quality of the fuel used
entire fuel system. Park the vehicle in a The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the
heated garage, for example. following situations:
To prevent operating problems, diesel with Rat very low outside temperatures
better flow qualities is available during the
Rin city traffic
winter months. You can obtain information at
Rduring short journeys
the gas station or from your fuel supplier.
Ron mountainous terrain
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel preheat-
ing system. This improves the flow properties Rwhen towing a trailer
of the diesel by approximately 46 ‡ (8 †). To keep fuel consumption low, observe the
ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL can be used advice in the "Protection of the environment"
without risk of malfunction down to an out- section (Y page 23).
side temperature of approximately 14 ‡ The following components of the different
(Ò10 †). vehicle versions influence fuel consumption:
Fuel additives Rtire sizes, tire tread, tire pressure, tire con-
! Do not add gasoline or kerosene to diesel dition
fuel to improve its flow characteristics. Rbody
Gasoline or kerosene impairs the lubricat- Rtransmission ratios for the drive assem-
ing properties of the diesel fuel. This can blies
result in damage to the fuel injection sys- Radditional equipment (e.g. air-conditioning
tem, for example. system, auxiliary heating system)
Information on fuel consumption For these reasons, the actual consumption

figures for your vehicle may deviate from the
Technical data
H Environmental note consumption figures determined according

CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- to EU Directive 80/1268/EEC.
tists believe to be principally responsible for Data concerning fuel consumption are recor-
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your ded in the on-board computer; use the steer-
vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to ing wheel buttons to call up the Trip com-
fuel consumption and therefore depend on: puter menu (Y page 195).
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Rdriving style
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi- General notes
ronmental influences, road conditions or ! Only use DEF in accordance with
traffic flow ISO 22241. The exhaust gas aftertreatment
You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis- system may otherwise be damaged.
sions by driving carefully and having it serv- Observe the MB Specifications for Service
iced regularly. Products, Sheet No. 352.0.
Damage caused by the use of other reduc-
Fuel consumption depends on:
ing agents will invalidate the New Vehicle
Rthe vehicle version Limited Warranty.
Rthe style of driving

! If DEF comes into contact with a painted Only store DEF in containers made of high-
or aluminum surface, wash the surface off alloy Cr‑Ni steel or Mo‑Cr‑Ni steel in accord-
immediately with plenty of water. ance with DIN EN 10 088‑1/2/3 or plastic
containers made of polypropylene or poly-
High ambient temperatures ethylene.
When opening the DEF tank filler cap at high
outside temperatures, ammonia vapors may Purity
escape. Ammonia vapors have a pungent ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. caused by other
odor and are particularly irritating for your service products, cleaning agents, dust,
skin, respiratory organs and eyes. This may etc.) result in increased emissions, mal-
result in burning eyes, nose and throat, as functions, catalytic converter damage or
well as coughing and watering eyes. Do not engine damage.
inhale ammonia vapors. The purity of DEF is essential to prevent mal-
If DEF heats up, e.g. in direct sunlight, in the functions in the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
DEF supply reservoir for some time to over If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g.
122 ‡ (50 †), ammonia vapor will develop. during repair work, the same liquid must not
Low ambient temperatures be used to refill the tank. Its purity is no longer
DEF freezes at a temperature of approx- guaranteed.
imately 12 ‡ (Ò11 †). The vehicle is equipped Disposal
with a DEF preheating system at the factory. Observe country-specific laws and regula-
Winter operation is therefore also guaranteed tions when disposing of DEF.
at temperatures under 12 ‡ (Ò11 †).
% Environmental note
Additives and tap water Dispose of DEF in an environmentally respon-
! Do not mix DEF with any additives and do sible manner.
Technical data
not dilute DEF with tap water. Otherwise,
the exhaust gas aftertreatment may be DEF supply reservoir content
damaged. Depending on equipment, the DEF supply res-
Observe the MB Specifications for Service ervoir content may vary.
Products, Sheet No. 352.0.
Tank contents
Damage that arises through the use of addi-
tives or tap water will invalidate the New Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)12
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Approximately 4.7 US gal (18.0 l)
Storage
DEF consumption
! Containers made of aluminum, copper,
For vehicles with a 4-cylinder, in-line
copper alloys as well as unalloyed or
engine (OM 651), the DEF consumption of
galvanized steel are not suitable for storing
the vehicle is:
DEF. If stored in these types of containers,
DEF could cause constituents of these met- Ras a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx.
als to dissolve and cause irreparable dam- 2322 MPG (0.2 l/100 km)
age to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Ras a Cab Chassis, approx. 1720 MPG
Damage caused by such impurities in the (0.35 l/100 km)
DEF will invalidate the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
12 DEF according to ISO 22241. Observe MB Specifications for Service Products, Sheet 352.0.
Z
For vehicles with a 6-cylinder, in-line The MB Specifications for Service Products
engine (OM 642), the DEF consumption of are valid for your vehicle13
the vehicle is:
R228.51
Ras a Cargo Van/Passenger Van, approx. R229.31
2322 MPG (0.10 l/100 km) R229.51
Ras a Cab Chassis approx. 1720 MPG
These are high quality engine oils which have
(0.14 l/100 km)
a positive effect on:
In each case, the stated consumption figure is
Rengine wear
a mean value between urban and extra-urban
driving cycles. The consumption figure does Rfuel consumption
not refer to a specific vehicle, but is provided Rexhaust gas emissions
for the purposes of comparison between dif- Multi-grade engine oils of the prescribed SAE
ferent vehicle types. class (viscosity) may be used all year round,
DEF consumption, like fuel consumption, is taking the outside temperatures into
very dependent on the driving style and the account.
operating conditions. This means that the real
consumption figures during operation of your Engine oil viscosity
vehicle may deviate from those stated.
! If the SAE viscosity class of the engine oil
used does not cover the outside tempera-
Engine oil ture range in which you are operating the
vehicle, it must be changed in good time, in
General notes particular before the cold season commen-
ces. Using an engine oil that does not have
! The bottles of the various engine oil types adequate temperature characteristics can
are marked with ACEA (Association des
lead to engine damage.
Technical data
Constructeurs Européens d'Automobiles)

and/or API (American Petroleum Institute) The temperature range information of the
classifications. Only use approved engine SAE classification always refers to that of
oils that conform to the following MB Spec- fresh oil. The temperature characteristics
ifications for Service Products and the pre- of the engine oil may deteriorate signifi-
scribed ACEA and/or API classifications. cantly due to aging in use, especially at low
Using engine oils of another quality is not outside temperatures.
permitted and may invalidate the New Vehi- We recommend that you change the engine
cle Limited Warranty. oil before the cold season commences. Use
The use of other, non-approved engine oils an approved engine oil of the specified SAE
for diesel engines can cause damage to the class.
diesel particle filter (DPF).
Use only engine oils that have been approved
for your vehicle according to the MB Specifi-
cations for Service Products.
13 If
the quality grade is not available for diesel, you may also add engine oils meeting the requirements in MB
Sheet No. 228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt (1 l).

added is then limited to a maximum of 1 qt

(1 l).
Engine oils are differentiated according to:
Rengine oil brand
Rquality grade (sheet number)
RSAE class (viscosity)
Subsequently have the engine oil changed at
the earliest possible opportunity.
Interval for oil change

Engine oil SAE classification
Viscosity indicates the flow characteristics of The on-board computer automatically shows
a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this the date for the next oil change as an event
means that it is thick; a low viscosity means message in the display.
that it is thin. Only by using engine oil with a particularly
Depending on the respective outside temper- high quality grade, e.g. according to Sheet
atures, select an engine oil according to SAE Number 228.51 of the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
classification (viscosity). The table displays ifications for Service Products, can the maxi-
the SAE classification to be used. The low mum interval for oil change be achieved.
temperature characteristics of engine oils We recommend having the oil changed at a
can noticeably deteriorate during operation, qualified specialist workshop.
e.g. from aging, soot and fuel accretion. For Engine oil for diesel engines
this reason, regular oil changes using an
approved engine oil from the suitable SAE Product name/number
classification are urgently recommended. See the Maintenance Booklet.
Technical data
MB Sheet Number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. Capacities
This could damage the engine.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
Miscibility of engine oils engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
! Mixing oils reduces the benefits of using excess engine oil siphoned off.
high grade engine oils. Oil change including oil filter
We recommend that you only add engine oil of
the same quality grade and SAE class as used Vehicles Engine oil
when the engine oil was last changed. 4-cylinder Approximately
If, in exceptional cases, oil of the type in the 3 US gal (11.5 l)
engine is not available, top up using another
approved mineral or synthetic engine oil. 6-cylinder Approximately
If the quality grade is not available for diesel 3.3 US gal (12.5 l)
engines, you may also add engine oils meet-
ing the requirements in MB Sheet Number
228.5, 229.3 or 229.5. The quantity to be
Z
Information about oil consumption Further information can be obtained at any

! If the vehicle is predominantly used for
short-distance driving, this could lead to a
Rear axle
malfunction in the automatic cleaning func-
tion for the diesel particle filter. As a result, Service product: transmission oil
fuel may accumulate in the engine oil and
cause engine failure. Product name/number Maintenance
interval
Therefore, if you mainly drive short distan-
ces, you should drive on a highway or on BP Energear Hypo DC —
rural roads for 20 minutes every 310 miles 80W-90
(500 km). This ensures sufficient regener- MB Sheet No. 235.20
ation of the diesel particle filter.
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle Mobil Delvac Synthetic
consumes a maximum of 1.0 US qt (1.0 l) of Gear Oil 75W-90
engine oil over a distance of 620 miles MB Sheet No. 235.8
(1000 km).
Oil consumption may be higher if: Further information can be obtained at any
Rthe
vehicle is new.
Ryou mainly operate the vehicle under ardu-
Steering
ous operating conditions.
Ryou frequently drive at high engine speeds. Service product: power steering fluid
Regular maintenance is one of the precondi- Product name/number Maintenance
tions for moderate rates of consumption. interval
You can only estimate the oil consumption
Technical data
after you have driven a considerable distance. Mobil ATF‑D, —

Check the engine oil level on a regular basis, Exxon Mobil Corporation
e.g. weekly or each time you refuel or equivalent
(Y page 250). MB Sheet No. 236.3
The steering is maintenance-free. Further

Transmission and power steering oil information can be obtained at any qualified
Automatic transmission
Service product: automatic transmission
fluid Brake fluid
Product name/number Maintenance G WARNING

interval Brake fluid is hazardous to health. Do not
swallow brake fluid. See a doctor immediately
Shell ATF 3403/M-115 — if you swallow brake fluid.
MB Sheet No. 236.10 Make sure that brake fluid does not come into
Fuchs/Shell ATF 3353 contact with skin, clothing or eyes. Rinse
affected areas with plenty of clean water and
MB Sheet No. 236.12
consult a doctor if necessary.

Always wear gloves and eye protection when There is usually a notice in the engine com-
topping up brake fluid. partment to remind you when the next
Store brake fluid only in the original closed brake fluid change is due.
container and keep it out of the reach of chil-
dren. Comply with safety regulations when
handling brake fluid. Coolant
G WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture G WARNING
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake ponents in the engine compartment, it may
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
brake system when the brakes are applied Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
hard. This would impair braking efficiency. freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
There is a risk of an accident. next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
You should have the brake fluid renewed at antifreeze from components before starting
the specified intervals. the engine.
! Brake fluid corrodes paint, plastic and ! Take care not to spill any coolant on pain-
rubber. If paint, plastic or rubber has come ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage
into contact with brake fluid, rinse with the paintwork.
water immediately. When handling, storing and disposing of cool-
Only use brake fluids approved for Sprinter ant and antifreeze, please observe the rele-
vehicles. Always check for the identification vant regulations and the safety notes in the
DOT 4 plus. "Service products and capacities" section
Technical data
Information about approved brake fluids can (Y page 318).
be found in the Maintenance Booklet or
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Coolant additive with antifreeze
requirements
Service product:
brake fluid ! Use only approved antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor that complies with MB Specifica-
Product name/ Intac B026E tion for Service Products, Sheet Number
number RBoilingpoint: 500 ‡ 325. Using other, non-approved anti-
(260 †) freeze/corrosion inhibitors may cause
RWet boiling point: damage to the coolant system and reduce
356 ‡ (180 †) the engine's service life.
Coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/
MB Sheet No. 331.0
corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following
Maintenance 2 years tasks:
interval Rcorrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
i Have the brake fluid renewed every 2 Rraises the boiling point
years at a qualified specialist workshop.
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and corrosion protection. Coolant
Z
must be used in the system all year round to Product name/number

ensure anti-corrosion protection and a raised
boiling point – even in countries with high Zerex G48, The Valvoline Company
outside temperatures. MB Sheet No. 325.0
To prevent damage to the engine cooling sys-
tem, use only approved corrosion inhibitor/ Glysantin G05, BASF AG
antifreeze that comply with the Mercedes- MB Sheet No. 325.0
Benz Specifications for Service Products.
We recommend corrosion inhibitor/anti- Capacities
freeze that meets the requirements in MB Engine cooling system
Specifications for Service Products Sheet
Number 325. Coolant Approximately
Check the antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor con- 10.75 US qt (10.0 l)
centration in the coolant every six months.
The percentage of corrosion inhibitor/anti-
freeze additive in the engine cooling system Refrigerant
should: The air-conditioning system uses the refrig-
Rbe at least 50%. This way, the engine cool- erant R‑134a. This refrigerant does not dam-
ing system is protected against freezing age the ozone layer.
down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
Product name/number Maintenance
interval
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively. Refrigerant R‑134a —
If there has been coolant loss, do not refill MB Sheet No. 361.0
only with water. If the vehicle has lost coolant,
Technical data
add equal parts water and corrosion inhibi-

Further information can be obtained at any
tor/antifreeze additive. The water used as
part of the coolant mixture must fulfill certain
requirements; these are usually fulfilled by
drinking water. If the water quality is not suf- Washer fluid
ficient, you must treat the water.
Service product: coolant
G WARNING
Product name/number Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
EURO Peak Coolant/Antifreeze, nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
OLD WORLD INDUSTRIES fire and injury.
MB Sheet No. 325.0 Make sure that no windshield washer con-
Zerex G05, The Valvoline Company centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
MB Sheet No. 325.0 ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.

Vehicle data 327
When handling washer fluid, observe the Cargo tie down points and carrier sys-
important safety notes on service products tems
(Y page 318).
Cargo tie down points
Mixing ratio
General notes
Add windshield washer concentrate to the ! Observe the information on the maximum
washer fluid all year round. Adapt the mixing loading capacity of the individual cargo tie-
ratio to the ambient temperature. down points.
At temperatures above freezing: If you use several cargo tie-down points to
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- secure a load, you must always take the
ture of water and windshield washer con- maximum loading capacity of the weakest
centrate, e.g. Summerwash to prevent cargo tie-down point into account.
smearing. If you brake hard, for example, the forces
acting could be up to several times the
At temperatures below freezing:
weight force of the load. Always use multi-
X Fill up the washer fluid reservoir with a mix- ple cargo tie-down points in order to dis-
ture of water and windshield washer contribute the force absorption. Load the
centrate, e.g. Winterwash if there is a dan- anchorages evenly.
ger of frost.
You will find further information about cargo
This prevents washer fluid from freezing on
tie down points and cargo tie-down rings in
the windshield.
the "Transporting" section (Y page 242).
Capacities Cargo tie-down rings

Windshield washer system with/without The maximum tensile load of the cargo tie-
down rings is:
Technical data
headlamp cleaning system
Cargo tie-down Permissible nomi-
Washer fluid Approx. 6.3 US qt
rings nal tensile load
(6.0 l)
Passenger Vans 786.5 lbf
(3500 N)
Vehicle data
Cargo Van 1124.0 lbf
General notes (5000 N)
The following section contains important
technical data for your vehicle. Your vehicle
registration documents contain vehicle-spe-
cific and equipment-dependent technical
data such as vehicle dimensions and vehicle
weights.
Z
328 Vehicle data
Load rails The roof carrier supports must be mounted

The maximum tensile loads of the cargo tie at equal distances.
down points in the cargo compartment are: We recommend that you have a stabilizer
installed on the front axle.
Cargo tie down Permissible nomi-
point nal tensile load ! For safety reasons, we recommend that
you only use roof carrier systems that have
Load rails on cargo 1124.0 lbf been tested and approved for the Sprinter.
compartment floor (5000 N) This will help to avoid damage.
Lower load rail on 562.0 lbf The data is valid for a load distributed evenly
sidewall over the entire roof area. Maximum roof load
(2500 N)
and minimum number of pairs of roof carrier
Upper load rail on 337.0 lbf supports on vehicles with:
sidewall (1500 N)
Maximum Minimum
roof load number of
The values specified apply only to loads pairs of
placed on the cargo compartment floor if: supports
Rthe load is secured to 2 cargo tie down
Standard 660 lbs 6
points on the rail and
roof (300 kg)
Rthe distance to the nearest load-securing
point on the same rail is approximately 3 ft High roof 330 lbs 3
(1 m). (150 kg)
Roof carrier Reduce the load on shorter roof carriers pro-

portionately. The maximum load per pair of
Technical data
G WARNING roof carrier supports is 110 lbs (50 kg).

When you load the roof, the center of gravity Loading directions and other information con-
of the vehicle rises and the driving character- cerning load distribution and load securing
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof can be found in the "Transporting" section
load, the driving characteristics, as well as (Y page 240).
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and Trailer tow hitch
General notes
G WARNING We recommend that you have the trailer tow
If you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi- hitch mounted at an authorized Sprinter
cle, the handling as well as the steering and Dealer.
braking characteristics are severely affected. Use only a trailer tow hitch that has been tes-
There is a risk of an accident. ted and approved specially for your vehicle by
Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle. the distributor named on the inside of the
Secure the load to prevent it from slipping. front cover. Only use a ball coupling that is
approved for your vehicle and Sprinter trailer
! The weight of any load carried on the roof, tow hitch. You can also find information on
including the roof carrier, must not exceed the permitted dimensions of the ball coupling
the maximum permissible roof load.

Vehicle data 329
on the identification plate of the trailer tow

hitch.
You can obtain advice from a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. Also observe the informa-
tion on towing a trailer in the "Driving and
parking" section (Y page 173).
Technical data
Z
330 Vehicle data
Maximum permitted weights and loads

! On vehicles with a permissible gross vehicle weight of 11030 lbs (5003 kg), the permissible
gross combination weight is less than the total of the permissible gross vehicle weight and
the permissible trailer load. Exceeding the permissible gross combination weight can lead to
damage to the drivetrain, to the transmission or to the trailer tow hitch.
If the vehicle or the trailer is fully laden, the relevant value for the permissible gross vehicle
weight or the permissible trailer load is therefore lower. In this case, the trailer or the vehicle
may only be partially loaded.
The permissible weights and loads which cannot be exceeded can also be found:
Rin your vehicle documents and
Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow hitch, the trailer and the vehicle (Y page 316).
You will find the basic values approved by the manufacturer in the following table. If the values
differ, the lowest value applies.
Make sure that you adhere to the weight restrictions by having the weight checked on a
calibrated weighbridge.
Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross Maximum Trailer Maxi-
type ble gross front axle rear axle permissi- load15 mum per-
weight load load ble gross GTW missible
GVWR GAWR GAWR weight of nose
(FA) (RA) vehicle/ weight
trailer TWR
combina-
tion14
Technical data
GCWR
2500 8550 lbs 3970 lbs 5360 lbs 13550 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(3878 kg) (1801 kg) (2431 kg) (6146 kg) (2268 kg) (227 kg)
3500 9900 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14900 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4490 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6759 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16
Canada
only 4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17
9990 lbs 4080 lbs 7060 lbs 14990 lbs 5000 lbs 500 lbs
(4531 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16
USA only
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17
(4600 kg) (1851 kg) (3202 kg) (6799 kg)16 (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16
14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer

15 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer
16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).

Vehicle data 331
Vehicle Permissi- Gross Gross Maximum Trailer Maxi-

type ble gross front axle rear axle permissi- load15 mum per-
weight load load ble gross GTW missible
GVWR GAWR GAWR weight of nose
(FA) (RA) vehicle/ weight
trailer TWR
combina-
tion14
GCWR
4410 lbs 15250 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (6917 kg)17 (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17
(5003 kg) (1851 kg) (3502 kg) (6917 kg) (2268 kg)16 (227 kg)16
4410 lbs 7500 lbs 750 lbs
(2000 kg) (3402 kg)17 (340 kg)17
Technical data
14 Maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle and trailer

15 Maximum permissible gross weight of the trailer
17 Not for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
16 Only for extra-long vehicles with an overall length of 289.2 in (7344 mm).
Z
332

FREIGHTLINER Sprinter 2015 Operating Instructions Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FREIGHTLINER Sprinter 2015 Operating Instructions Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

ESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler AG.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31

Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41

Opening and closing ........................... 65

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 81

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 91

Climate control ................................. 111

Driving and parking .......................... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 179

Stowing and features ....................... 229

Transporting loads ............................ 239

Maintenance and care ...................... 247

Roadside Assistance ........................ 273

Wheels and tires ............................... 283

Technical data ................................... 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1, 2, 3 ... Air-conditioning system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Transmission oil change ................ 324 Disconnecting and connecting

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning lamp ................................. 218 Sliding door ................................... 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Interior lighting .............................. 105 Cleaning

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ports .............................................. 237 Customer Assistance Center

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Digital speedometer Driving off-road

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

E Problem (malfunction) ................... 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Hydroplaning ..................................... 155 K

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Light switch ..................................... 92 Menu (vehicles with steering

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Off-road driving Operating system

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Perimeter lamp Rear compartment

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Side windows Sprinter Dealer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching the surround lighting Time

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Curb weight (definition) ................. 304 TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Trailer TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

W Removing a wheel .......................... 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating Instructions The original purchase contract documenta-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

G WARNING Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,

Examples of substances that are hazardous qualified specialist workshop.

RFuel starting the engine.

Protection of the environment braking.

H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-

Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion.

Notes on operating the vehicle Radio-based vehicle components

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Diagnostics connection The following work should always be carried